TRILUTION® LC Software v2.

0 User’s Guide
 TRILUTION® LC Software v2.0 User’s Guide

World Headquarters Gilson S.A.S.

Gilson, Inc. 19, avenue des Entrepreneurs
3000 Parmenter Street F-95400 VILLIERS LE BEL France
P.O. Box 620027
Middleton, WI 53562-0027 USA
Telephone: 608-836-1551 Fax: 608-831-4451

www.gilson.com
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

©2007 Gilson, Inc. All rights reserved. LT350009-06

Table of Contents

1 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 2 Project Library

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Project Library Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Standard Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Applications Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Methods Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Before Calling Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Filter Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Quick Start Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Introduction to TRILUTION® LC Software
for Preparative HPLC (#TRLCTRILUTION1—2 days) . . 1-4 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Advanced TRILUTION® LC Software for Custom How to Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Preparative HPLC (#TRLCTRILUTION2—1 day) . . . . . . 1-5 How to Share a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Modify a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Launch TRILUTION LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 How to Export Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Log On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 How to Import Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Delete a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
TRILUTION LC Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Liquid Chromatography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 How to Create an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Administrative Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Modify an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Log Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 How to Export Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 How to Import Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Delete an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Close TRILUTION LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
View Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

3 Method Builder 5 Method Builder - Bed Layout
Method Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Bed Layout Tab Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Configured Instruments Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Zone Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Bed Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Numbering Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Analysis Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 How to Create a Bed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
View a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Select a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Save a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Add a Rack/Rinse Station/Injection Port. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Define a Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
How to Export Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Select a Numbering Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
How to Import Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Number Wells in Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Delete a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Close the Method Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Modify a Bed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Modify a Bed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Delete a Bed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
4 Method Builder - Configuration
Configuration Tab Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Configured Instruments Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Instrument Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Available Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to Create a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Configuration Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Compressibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume 4-31
Modify a Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 6 Method Builder - Control 7 Method Builder - Analysis
Control Tab Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Analysis Tab Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Workspace Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Peak Integration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Error Handling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Report Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
How to Create a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Error Handling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Schedule Timed Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 How to Create an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38

Delete Task from Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Delete an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Modify Task Time and/or Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Integration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
Modify Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Peak Slope and Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Baseline Construction Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Add a Mobile Phase Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Inhibit/Enable Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Modify a Mobile Phase Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 Negative Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Delete a Mobile Phase Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Start/Stop Integration by Fraction Collection . . . . . . . 7-47

How to Create and Use Control Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 How to Define Retention Time Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-54
Set Retention Time Window Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
How to Simulate Fraction Collection by Slope or Level . . . 6-20 Resolve Overlapping Retention Time Windows . . . . . 7-56
How to Use the Peak Table During Data Analysis . . . . . . . . .7-57
Reasons for Missing Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Locate Reference Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Locate Non-Reference Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Update Peak Retention Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Schedule Timed Integration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60
Add Integration Task to Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Delete Integration Task from Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Modify Integration Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
How to Create and Use Analysis Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-61

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

8 Running an Application 9 Starting a Run
Application Run Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 How to Start a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 During a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Application Run Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Status Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Sample List Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Sample List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Run Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Chromatogram Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Method Configuration Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Interrupt a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chromatogram Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Pause a Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Bed Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Stop a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Status Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Restart a Run after Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
After a Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Sample List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Status of TRILUTION LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Default Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Shut Down the HPLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Additional Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 View the Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
How to Create a Sample List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
How to Create a Sample List
for Fraction Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
How to Create a Sample List
to Re-inject Collected Fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Set Initial Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
How to Export a Sample List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Modify Sample List in Microsoft® Excel® . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
How to Import a Sample List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 10 Manual HPLC System Control 11 Results
Manual Control Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Results Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Results Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Summary Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Calibration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Control of Mobile Phase Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 How to Export Run Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
Strip Chart Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 How to Archive Run Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to Instruments 10-8 How to Restore Run Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8
Reorder Commands or Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Remove Commands or Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Run Results Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Chromatogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Sample Bed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Fraction Bed Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Spectral Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
How to Overlay Results to Compare Sample Traces . . . . . 11-30
View Each Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Compare Traces for Different Samples in the
Same Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Removing Overlaid Traces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
How to Analyze Data in a Different Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Manual Baseline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

12 Calibrations 14 Reports
Results Window - Calibration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 The Reports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Calibration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Reports Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Graph Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Task Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Run Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
How to View Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Project Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
View Calibration Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 Method Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Calibration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 Sample Tracking Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
How to Recalibrate and Re-analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Export/Archive/Restore Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Calibration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
View a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
13 Working with Variables Viewing Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
How to Create a New Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Export a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
View and/or Modify Variable Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Delete Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 A List of Tasks 305/307 Pumps Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45

151/152 Detectors Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 306 Pump Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46

155/156 Detectors Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 321 HPLC Pump Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47

171/172 Diode Array Detectors Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 322 HPLC Pump Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48

202C Fraction Collector Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 331/333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49

206/FC 203B/FC 204/PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks . . . . A-10 332/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50

Fraction Collection System Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 VALVEMATE®/VALVEMATE® II Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51

819 Injection Module Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 402 Pump Single/

402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks . . . . . . . . . . A-52
845Z Injection Module Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Virtual Pumping System Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
215 Liquid Handler/
215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 506C System Interface Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54

231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20 Auxiliary Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55

233 XL Sample Injector Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23 Mobile Phase Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56

Gradient Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
234 Autoinjector Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27 Gradient Task with Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
235 Autoinjector Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30 Isocratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks . . . A-33
Linear Gradient with No Column Wash Out . . . . . . . . A-58
GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37 Multi Linear Gradient with
GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks . . . A-41 Step and Column Wash Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
Multi Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out . . . . . . A-59

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

All Tasks (in alphabetical order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60 GX Mix with Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212
151 152 Detector Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61 GX Outside Rinse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-218
155 156 Detector Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63 GX Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221
155 156 Scan Initiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-66 GX Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-223
171 172 Detector Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68 GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . A-230
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection . . . . . . . A-70 GX-271 Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-237
215 819 Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76 GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection . . . . . . . . . . A-243
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection . . . . . . . . . . . A-82 GX-271 Total Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-250
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89 GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill . . . . . . . . . . . . A-257
234 Partial Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95 GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . A-264
234 Total Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100 GX-281 Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-271
235S Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106 GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection . . . . . . . . . . A-278
235S Total Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112 GX-281 Rack Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-285
235T Injection Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-118 GX-281 Total Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-286
235T Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119 GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-293
235T Total Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125 GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection. . . A-299
506C Autozero Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131 Home Fraction Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-305
845Z Prep Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132 Home Liquid Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-306
845Z Prep Injection with Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138 Injection Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-308
Add Diluent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143 Injection Valve Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-309
Aspirate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-152 Inside Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-310
Collection and Travel Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-312
Conditional Fraction Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-155 Mix with Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-318
Contact Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157 Mix with Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-323
Detector Autozero Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-158 Move to Sample Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-328
Dilute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-159 Outside Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-330
Dispense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170 Partial Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-332
Execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171 Prep Injection with Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-338
Fraction Collection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-172 Prime Dilutor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-344
GSIOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-176 Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-346
GX Add Diluent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-177 Set Detector Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-347
GX Dilute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-187 Set Fraction Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-348
GX Home Liquid Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-200 Set Multiple Bed Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-349
GX Injection Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-202 Set Non Peak Per Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-351
GX Inside Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-204 Set Peak Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-352
GX Mix with Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-206 Set Peak Per Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-353

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Set Peak Slope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-354 B Rinse Locations
Set Peak Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-356
Set Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-357 215 Liquid Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Set Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-359 GX-271 Liquid Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Solvent Valve Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-361
GX-281 Liquid Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Start Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-362
Start Fraction Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-363
Stop Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-364 C Peak Integration
Stop Fraction Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-365
Switch VALVEMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-366 Effect of Peak Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-367 Effect of Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Total Loop Injection Overfill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-369 Front and Back Slope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-375 Back Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Turn Lamp Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-381
Effect of Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Turn Lamp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-382
Voltage On - Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-383
Wait for Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-384 D Fraction Collection Techniques
Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-385
Write to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-386 Coordinate Integration with Fraction Collection . . . . . . . . . . .D-2
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . A-387 Collect Heart of Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3
XL Partial Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-393 Collect Front to APEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-4
XL Total Loop Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-399
Collect APEX to Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-5
Collect APEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-6

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

E List of Commands Output Contact Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-20

Aspirate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3 Output Contact Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-20

Prime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
Aspirate Air Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
Aspirate Z-Inject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Prompt for Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
Autozero Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 Read Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-22
Clear Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 Read Valvemate Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
Dispense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 Record Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
Dispense Air Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 Rinse Pump (GX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
Dispense Inject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8 Run Executable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
Get Current Held Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 Scan Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
Get Max Holding Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 Service Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
GSIOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 Set DAD Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-26
GSIOC with ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10 Set Injection Valve Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-27
Home Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11 Set Valvemate Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
Home Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11 Set Collection and Travel Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
Home Syringes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11 Set Dual Ratio Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-28
Home Valvemate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12 Set Dual Ratio Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
Input Contact Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12 Set Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
LL Seek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13 Set Fraction Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
LLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14 Set Low Pressure Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
LLD Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14 Set Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
Lock Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 Set Non Peak Time Per Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
Log Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 Set Non Peak Volume Per Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
Move Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16 Set Peak Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
Set Peak Slope and Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
Move to Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Set Peak Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
Move to XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Set Scan Output Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
Move Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
Set Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-34
Output Contact Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
Output Contact Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19 Set Switching Valve Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Set Time Per Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35 F Task Builder
Set Volume Per Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35
Task Builder Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Set Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36 Tasks Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Solvent Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36 Operators Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 Commands Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Start Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Start Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Start File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37 How to Create a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
Start Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38 View a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
Stop Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38 Modify a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Stop Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38
Save a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-10
Sync Wait Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38
Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38 How to Export Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-11
Turn Lamp Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 How to Import Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-12
Turn Lamp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 Delete a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-13
Turn Lamp Saver Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-14
Turn Lamp Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40 Close the Open Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
UnLock Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40 Close All Open Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
Voltage Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41 Close the Task Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-14
Voltage On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-41
Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
Wait for Change in Contact State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
Wait with Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
Write to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-43
Zero Analog Offset Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-44

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

G Bed Layout and Utilities I Electronic Record Management (ERM)
Custom Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2 Features
How to Create a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-2 ERM Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-2
Delete a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6
User and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-3
Custom Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7 Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3
How to Create a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-8
Delete a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14
How to Export Racks and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-15 J GSIOC Configuration Editor
How to Import Racks and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-16
Close Bed Layout and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-17 K GSIOC Utility
Starting the GSIOC Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
Reviewing the Port and Baud Information . . . . . . . . . K-2
H Open Access Listing GSIOC Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
TRILUTION LC Open Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2 Basic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
How to Enable Open Access for Applications . . . . . . .H-2 Basic Mode Buttons and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
How to Launch Open Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-3 Basic Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
Open Access Application Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4 Advanced Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-6
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-4 Advanced Mode Buttons and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-6
Action Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-5 Advanced Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-9
Begin the Open Access Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-5
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-14
Open Access Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6 Immediate Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-14
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-6 Buffered Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-14
Sample Submit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-8 Insert an Immediate Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-15
Sample Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-10 Insert a Buffered Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-16
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-11 Send an Immediate Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-16
Submission of Sample(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-13 Send a Buffered Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-17

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

TRILUTION® LC Software is software for controlling high-pressure liquid chromatography systems and automated liquid handling instruments. TRILUTION LC
provides unsurpassed fraction collection capabilities including conditional logic collection, the ability to add additional fraction collectors for increased bed
capacity, intuitive and powerful slope collection parameters, and automatic sample list generation of collected fractions for post collection processing.

TRILUTION LC’s flexible, easy-to-use interface features graphical gradient creation and adjustments, click-and-drag icon-based tasks, and graphical method
optimization. Parameter and Time variables for universal method creation, in addition to an intuitive sample list, make TRILUTION LC a truly user-friendly
software package. Graphical custom task creation and rack creation allow for the flexibility and functionality to meet the most demanding application
requirements.
This chapter describes the two main menus, Liquid Chromatography and Administrative Tools.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-1

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Unpacking
Unpacking

Unpack TRILUTION® LC Software upon receipt even if the software will not be used immediately. Many
carriers must receive concealed damage claims within seven days of delivery.

Standard Equipment
You should have one multi-CD software case which includes the following:
• TRILUTION® LC Software installation disk
• Oracle® Database 10g Express Edition installation disk
• TRILUTION® LC Software Documentation CD
• TRILUTION® LC Quick Start Tutorial CD
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Siebel are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates.

Documentation
The following documents are included with TRILUTION LC:
• TRILUTION® LC Software Documentation CD
• TRILUTION® LC Software Installation Guide
• TRILUTION® LC Software Installation Qualification Procedure
• TRILUTION® LC Software Quick Reference Guide
• TRILUTION® LC Software Validation Certificate

1-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Customer Service

Customer Service
Gilson, Inc. and its worldwide network of authorized representatives provide customers with the following
assistance: sales, technical support, applications, and instrument repair.

If you need assistance, please contact your Gilson-authorized representative. Specific contact information
can be found on the Gilson web site at www.gilson.com.

Before Calling Us
Gilson-authorized representatives will serve you more efficiently if you have the following information (as
applicable):
• Serial number and model number of the Gilson instruments involved
• Installation procedures you used
• List of concise symptoms
• List of operating procedures and conditions you were using when the problems arose
• List of other instruments connected to the system and a description of those connections
• List of other electrical connections in the room

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-3

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Training
Training

Gilson’s TRILUTION LC training allows you to fully understand and operate your Gilson HPLC system. Training
courses are offered regularly at Gilson, or a customized training course can be brought to your facility. In
addition, complimentary training through use of Gilson’s Quick Start Tutorial provides you with
immediate access to “how to” movies. The following TRILUTION LC training has been developed to
specifically meet different experience levels.

Quick Start Tutorial

Let Gilson’s Quick Start Tutorial assist you with learning and using TRILUTION® LC Software. Your purchase of
a TRILUTION LC license includes the Quick Start Tutorial on CD-ROM, which automatically loads the tutorial’s
main menu. Eight TRILUTION LC Software tutorials are available for you to learn how to use TRILUTION LC
Software with a Gilson HPLC injection and fraction collection application. The tutorials can be launched in
any order by clicking on each selection from the main menu.

Introduction to TRILUTION® LC Software for Preparative HPLC

(#TRLCTRILUTION1—2 days)
Two days of classroom training focused on TRILUTION® LC Software in a preparative/semi-preparative HPLC
environment provides participants with the best learning experience for operating and understanding
their Gilson HPLC system. The majority of training time is spent performing applications using and
running TRILUTION LC under laboratory conditions with the supplied database tasks. This training course is
a complete and necessary introduction to TRILUTION LC for the preparative/semi-preparative HPLC chemist.

Course Objectives
After attending this course, participants will be able to:
• Create configurations with single and multiple fraction collectors in TRILUTION LC
• Use the Bed Layout Builder to create a tray that locates the positions of samples, reagents, standards, fractions,
etc.
• Program and run a variety of methods for fraction collection modes, system startup, shutdown, and
error handling
• Understand delay volume, fraction collection, and variables
• Collect and reinject fractions

1-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Advanced TRILUTION® LC Software for Custom Preparative

Training
HPLC (#TRLCTRILUTION2—1 day)
One day of classroom training specifically focused on customization in TRILUTION® LC Software in a
preparative/semi-preparative HPLC environment provides participants with the tools required for
creating custom tasks, racks, and calculations for their Gilson HPLC system. The majority of training time
is spent programming and running TRILUTION LC customs under laboratory conditions. This one-day
training, combined with course #TRLCTRILUTION1, is a complete TRILUTION LC certified training course for
the preparative/semi-preparative HPLC chemist.

Course Objectives
After attending this course, participants will be able to:
• Create and understand commands and operators for task building
• Adjust supplied tasks and create new custom tasks
• Create custom racks and elements

For further information on TRILUTION LC training courses or for course registration, please contact Gilson at
[email protected]. For a comprehensive training calendar of courses available at Gilson, Inc., please
visit www.gilson.com.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-5

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Launch TRILUTION LC
Launch TRILUTION LC

TRILUTION® LC Software has been validated in the following operating systems:

• Microsoft® Windows® 2000
• Microsoft® Windows® XP

To launch the software, do one of the following:

• Click Start and then select (All) Programs>Gilson Applications>TRILUTION LC 2.0>TRILUTION LC.

• On the Desktop, double-click the TRILUTION LC icon ( ).

The TRILUTION LC Log On window is displayed.

The TRILUTION LC Log On window

Log On
In the TRILUTION LC Log On window, do the following:
1 In the User Name field, type your user name.
2 In the Password field, type your password.
Note: Passwords have a 20-character limit.
3 Click OK.

The TRILUTION LC menu is displayed.

1-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Help

Help
On-line help comes with the software. The on-line help describes the commands and dialogs available in
the software and discusses the procedures needed to perform tasks.

You can access the on-line help in the following ways:

• Click Start and then select (All) Programs>Gilson Applications>TRILUTION LC 2.0>TRILUTION LC Help.
• By moving the mouse cursor over a button in the software. A box appears with text that describes what the
button does.

• By clicking Help ( ) to display help for the dialog.

• By clicking to display help about the window.

• By clicking to display help about the menu.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-7

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

TRILUTION LC Menus
TRILUTION LC Menus

TRILUTION LC has two main menus: Liquid Chromatography and Administrative Tools. These menus are

accessed from the TRILUTION LC menu. Click Home ( ) in the lower right corner of any builder to bring
forward the TRILUTION LC menu. A description of the these menus and submenus follows.

Liquid Chromatography
Use the options in this menu to create, organize, and run your application.

Project Library

Method

Task

Utilities

Reports

About

Help

Lock

Project Library
The Project Library is used for managing and organizing projects. Methods can be opened from the
Project Library. Applications can be run from the Project Library. Results can be viewed from the
Project Library.
For more information about the Project Library, see Chapter 2, Project Library.

1-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Method

TRILUTION LC Menus
The Method builder allows you to specify method conditions for controlling instruments and indicate how
collected data is analyzed and reported. Whether the data is analyzed at run time or afterwards, the
software uses the information in the analysis method to report on peaks detected in samples.
For more information about the Method builder, see Chapter 3, Method Builder.

Task
A Task is an action to be performed on a specific instrument. It is a combination of Commands and
Operators. A Task serves as a building block for a Method. The Task builder allows you to create, modify,
delete, export, and import Tasks.

For more information about the Task builder, see Appendix F, Task Builder.

For more information about the Gilson-supplied Tasks, see Appendix A, List of Tasks.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-9

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Utilities
TRILUTION LC Menus

Utilities accesses another menu with options for setting units, creating custom Bed Layouts, purging or
recovering deleted items, registering TRILUTION LC, setting notifications, and enabling ERM.

Unit Settings

Purge and Recover

Bed Layout and Utilities

Register

ERM

Notification

Back

1-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Unit Settings

TRILUTION LC Menus
This option, only available to members of the default
Admin group, allows you to set the units of
measurement for the Commands and Tasks and
elsewhere in the software. The unit types are listed in
the following table:

The Unit Settings window

Unit Type Units of Measurement

XYZ Movement mm, cm

Data Level mV, GSIOC, Au

Speed of Movement cm/sec, mm/hr, mm/min, mm/sec

Volume mL, nL, μL

Flow Rate mL/hr, mL/min, mL/sec, μL/min, μL/sec

Time hrs/min/sec

Pressure psi, MPa, Bar

Temperature C, F, K

WaveLength nm

Mass mg, μg

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-11

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Purge and Recover

TRILUTION LC Menus

Use the Purge and Recover Utility window to permanently delete the files from the database and/or
restore the deleted files back to the Project Library. It has the following buttons in the action bar:

Tab Description

PURGE Permanently deletes the files from the database. Purged files cannot be recovered.

Restores Applications and Methods back to their respective palettes in the Project Library and Tasks to the Tasks palette in the
RECOVER
Task builder, if not deleted from the database.

Bed Layout and Utilities

Use this utility to create custom templates and racks.

For more information, see Appendix G, Bed Layout and Utilities.

1-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Register

TRILUTION LC Menus
The Registration Overview window

The Registration menu allows you to register for a licensed version of TRILUTION LC. Two tabs are available:

Tab Description

Overview Explains the registration process.

Registration Information This is where the user information is entered.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-13

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

ERM
TRILUTION LC Menus

The implementation of an electronic record management system can be complex. TRILUTION LC can assist
chromatographers in attaining 21 CFR Part 11 compliance through the implementation of Electronic
Record Management (ERM). The ERM features allow electronic records security and tracking (audit trails),
electronic signatures, and method versioning of records, as well as permitting customized user access
levels within the software.

This menu, accessible only to members of the default Admin group, provides options for electronic record
management.

For more information, see Appendix I, Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features.

ERM Features
This menu is accessed from the ERM menu by a member of the default
Admin group. ERM is enabled from this menu by selecting the Enable ERM
Features check box. The software defaults with this box cleared (ERM
features disabled).
TRILUTION LC provides for the option to enable signature points each time a
component is saved. Enable this option by first selecting to Enable ERM
Features and then select the Enable Signature Points check box. Enable Signature Points defaults
cleared (no signatures required when saving).

Audit Trail
This menu is accessed from the ERM menu by a member of the default Admin group. The Audit Trail dialog
offers three options: Audit Trail, Event Log, and E-Signature.

Event Log records the click of any action button in all builders.
Audit Trail records the details of changes made in any of the builders prior to a save. Double-click the event
in the Audit Trail to display the details of the changes or click Preview to view the information in a report
format.

E-Signature records the details (including comments entered) of each e-signature prior to a save.

1-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Notification

TRILUTION LC Menus
The Notification menu allows you to launch a file if a
specified condition occurs. Those conditions are:
• Run complete
• No fraction sites available
• Insufficient solvent volume available
• Error method executed
• Unit ID not found
• Emergency Stop activated
• Run terminated
• Insufficient sample volume available
• No fractions collected
• Rack not found

Execute
The format required to launch the file is the complete
path and then a hyphen and then any arguments.

Notification Information
You can optionally send the notification message to a text file.

On the Browse for Folder window, select a folder and click OK. On completion of the run, the notifications
are saved in the specified folder with an .LCNT extension.

Clear Notification
Click to delete the notification message text files from the specified path folder.

Back

Click the Back button ( ) to return to the main menu.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-15

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Reports
TRILUTION LC Menus

This menu allows you to generate the following report types: Task Report, Run Report, Project Report,
Method Report, Sample Tracking Report, Analysis Report, Summary Report (Unknown or Standard),
and Calibration Report.
For more information about Reports, see Chapter 14, Reports.

About
This window displays the license information.

1-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Administrative Tools

TRILUTION LC Menus
User Settings

Change Password

Users and Groups

The Administrative Tools menu

The Administrative Tools menu allows you to create Users and Groups and change passwords. The
following are the menu options:
• User Settings: Allows you to choose whether or not the software should remember your user name when
logging on. See User Settings.
• Change Password: Allows you to change passwords. See Change Password.
• Users and Groups: Allows you to create and modify Users and Groups. See Users and Groups.

User Settings
If you want the software to remember your user name every time you log on,
access the User Settings option in the Administrative Tools menu. It
defaults selected (the software will remember your user name).

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-17

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Change Password
TRILUTION LC Menus

A member of the default Admin group provides the user

name and the default password. You can log on to the
software and change your password from the
Administrative Tools menu.
1 On the TRILUTION LC menu, click Administrative Tools.
2 On the Administrative Tools menu, select Change
Password option. The Change Password window is
displayed.
3 On the Change Password window, do the following:
a) In the Current User Name field, verify your user name.
b) In the Current Password field, type your old password.
c) In the New Password field, type a new password.
d) In the Confirm Password field, type the new password again.
e) Click OK. The password is changed.

Password is case sensitive and has a 20-character limit.

1-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Users and Groups

TRILUTION LC Menus
A User is an end user of the
product. Every User is
assigned to a Group based
on their roles. A Group
includes Users with
common rights.

The Users and Groups

menu allows you to create,
modify, delete, and view
Users and Groups.

During the software

installation, by default, two
groups are created: Admin
and Analyst.
“Administrator” is the default user in the Admin group. The Admin group is assigned all the rights.
“Analyst” is the default user in the Analyst group. The Analyst group can view, create, and modify in the
software.

To open Users And Groups:

1 On the TRILUTION LC menu, click Administrative Tools.
2 On the Administrative Tools menu, select Users and Groups option. The Users and Groups window is
displayed.

The Users and Groups window has two frames:

• The left frame provides two sections:
a) Users: Allows you to create and modify Users.
b) Groups: Allows you to create and modify Groups.
• The right frame displays the information based on the Tab selected:
a) On selecting the Users tab, the Group Name and the Group Description are displayed.
b) On selecting the Groups tab, the User Name and the User Description are displayed.

Only as a member of the Admin group can you create, modify, or delete Users and Groups.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-19

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Groups
TRILUTION LC Menus

A Group comprises Users with common roles. Each role is assigned rights.
The Groups tab lists all the available Groups. You can create, modify, and delete Groups. On selecting a
Group from the group tab, the Users belonging to that Group are displayed in the right frame.

For information about creating users, see Users.

How to create a Group

1 On the Users and Groups window, click Groups tab. The name of the default Groups ‘Admin’ and ‘Analyst’ are
displayed in the left frame.
2 Click Create to create a new Group. The Create New Group window is displayed.
3 In the Create New Group window, do the following:
a) In the Group Name field, type a new Group Name.
b) In the Description field (optional), type a brief Group description.
c) In the Permissions frame, select the permissions for the various areas in the software.
d) Click OK.

The new Group is created and is listed on the Groups tab.

Modify a Group
1 On the Users and Groups window, select a Group from the Group tab. The Users belonging to that Group are
displayed in the right frame and the Modify button is enabled.
2 Click Modify. The Modify Group Permissions window is displayed.
3 In the Modify Group Permissions window, make the required changes and then click OK.

Delete a Group
1 In the Groups tab, select a Group and then click Delete. A delete confirmation dialog box is displayed.
2 Click Yes.

The selected Group is deleted.

Users belonging to a deleted Group cannot log on to TRILUTION LC.

The Admin group cannot be deleted.

1-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Users

TRILUTION LC Menus
The Users are assigned to Groups based on their defined roles.
For Example,
• Operator
• Administrator
• Scientist

The Users tab lists all the available Users. You can create, modify, and delete Users.

Users can be assigned to one or more available groups.

For information about creating groups, see Groups.

How to create a User

1 On the Users and Groups window, click Users tab. The default Users ‘Administrator’ and ‘Analyst’ are displayed
in the Users tab with the Group name in the right window.
2 Click Create. The Create User window appears:
3 On the Create User window, do the following:
a) In the User Name field, type a User name.
a) In the User Description field (optional), type a brief description of the User.
b) In the Password field, type your password.
c) In the Confirm Password field, type your password for confirmation.

User name should be unique.

d) In the Select the Group section, select the Groups the User is assigned to.
4 Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-21

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1
Modify a User Properties
TRILUTION LC Menus

1 In the User tab, select a User. The Group name and its description to which the User belongs to is displayed in
the right frame.
2 Click Modify. The Modify User window is displayed.
3 In the Modify User window, you can do the following:
a) In the User Description field (optional), change the description.
b) In the Password field, type a new password.

The password for the default user, Analyst, is Analyst.

c) In the Confirm Password field, type the new password for confirmation.
d) In the Select the Group section, select the check box to add the User to a group or clear the check box to
remove the User from a Group.
e) Click OK.

A User name cannot be modified.

Delete a User
1 In the Users tab, select a User and click Delete. A delete confirmation dialog box is displayed.
2 Click Yes.

The selected User is deleted.

1-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

How to view the Group permissions

TRILUTION LC Menus
The Users and Groups tabs both provide the ability to view Group permissions.

View Group Permissions using the Users tab

1 On the Users and Groups window, select a User from the Users tab. The assigned Group names and descriptions
for the User display in the right frame.
2 Click Modify. The Modify User window appears.
3 In the Select the Group section, click View Permissions.
a) When multiple Groups are selected, TRILUTION LCdisplays a combination of all Group permissions.
b) When one Group is selected, TRILUTION LC displays permissions for that specific Group.
4 On the View Group Access Permissions window, view the following:
a) In the Group Name field, the Group Name.
b) In the Group Description field (optional), a brief description of the Group.
c) In the Permissions table, the permissions assigned to the group for the builders.
d) Click OK.

Click Cancel in the Modify User window to avoid saving Group changes to the User.

Log Off
This option ends the current user’s session and allows a different user to log on to the software.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 1-23

 TRILUTION® LC Software Overview 1

Lock
TRILUTION LC Menus

The Lock option allows you to manually lock out the system. All open, unsaved Tasks or Methods will
remain open. Only that user or a member of the default Admin group can log on after a lockout.

Lock TRILUTION LC operations

1 On the TRILUTION LC Menu, click the Lock button ( ). The
Confirm Lock window is displayed.
2 On the Confirm Lock window, click Lock. The Unlock TRILUTION LC
window is displayed.

Unlock TRILUTION LC operations

1 On the Unlock TRILUTION LC window, in the Password field, type the
password.
2 Click Unlock.

Close TRILUTION LC

Click on the TRILUTION LC menu.

1-24 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

The Project Library is used for managing and organizing projects. A Project can be considered a folder that contains the following:
• Applications
• Methods
• Results

In this chapter, you will learn:

• How to Create a Project
• How to Share a Project
• How to Export Projects
• How to Import Projects
• How to Create an Application
• How to Export Applications
• How to Import Applications

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-1

 Project Library 2

Project Library Window

Project Library Window

The Project Library serves as an organized, structured way to save and group Applications and Methods.

Filter Criteria

Applications Palette

Workspace

Methods Palette

Action Buttons

Info Window
The Project Library window

Applications Palette
Lists the available Applications.

For information on how to run an Application, see How to Start a Run.

Methods Palette
Lists the available Methods.

For information on how to create a Method, see How to Create a Method.

2-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

Filter Criteria

Project Library Window

Lists the Projects based on the filter selected.

Filter Description

Project Created by User Displays only the Projects that the Current User has created.

Displays on the projects that have been created by or shared with the Current User. The
exception is when the Current User is a member of the default Admin group. Those users see
All Projects for which the User has access all Projects created by all users.
For more information about sharing, see How to Share a Project.

Filter Buttons
The following buttons can be used when filtering.
Action
Description
Button

Collapses the view to show only the Projects branch.

Expands the view to display all Projects, Applications, and Methods.

Displays the Advanced Filter dialog in which Projects can be filtered by created date, modified date, or run date within a specified
date range.

Workspace
Forms the area to manage and organize Projects.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-3

 Project Library 2

Right-click menu
Project Library Window

The software employs the use of right-click options in the Project Library.

Project

Right-click on a Project icon ( ) in the Project Library to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Change Description Modify the short and/or long description for the Project.

Adds the Application from the Clipboard to the Project.

When an Application is pasted, a dialog is displayed to link the Application to other Applications with the same
name (Paste Same Copy) or rename the Application.
Paste
When Paste Same Copy is selected, any changes to the Application or its results are updated in all copies of that
Application. For example, if a Method is removed from the original Application, it will also be removed from the
pasted Application.

Save As Save an existing Project to a new name. Optionally, type a short and/or long description for the Project.

Deletes the Project if it does not have dependent Applications.

Delete
For more information, see Delete a Project.

Create an Application within the Project. Optionally, type a short and/or long description for the Application.
Create Application
For more information, see How to Create an Application.

Grants permission to a user and/or group to access or import the Project.

Share
For more information, see How to Share a Project.

2-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

Application

Project Library Window

Right-click on an Application icon ( ) in the Project Library to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Change Description Modify the short and/or long description for the Application.

Copy Copies the Application to the Clipboard.

Paste Adds the Method from the Clipboard to the Application.

Save an existing Application to a new name. Optionally, type a short and/or long description for the
Save As
Application.

Run Opens the Application Run Window.

Opens the Results window.

Results
For more information about Results, see Chapter 11, Results.

Remove Removes the Application from the Project and places it in the Applications palette.

Deletes the Application if it does not have dependent Methods or Results.

Delete
For more information, see Delete an Application.

Create Method Opens the Method Builder to create a Method within the Application.

Allows the Application to be accessible in TRILUTION LC Open Access. Applications enabled for Open Access

Enable Open Access use the following icon: .

For more information about Open Access, see Appendix H, Open Access.

Marks an Open Access Application inaccessible in TRILUTION LC Open Access.

Disable Open Access
For more information about Open Access, see Appendix H, Open Access.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-5

Project Library Window Project Library 2

Menu Description

Sets the minimum number of fraction sites required for each injection when the Application is enabled for
Minimum Fraction Sites Open Access.
For more information about Open Access, see Appendix H, Open Access.

Placement Safety defaults enabled. When placement safety is disabled, users will be prompted to place
Disable Placement Safety
samples even if the instrument is running.

Method

Right-click on a Method icon ( ) in the Project Library to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Change Description Modify the short and/or long description for the Method.

Copy Copies the Method to the Clipboard.

Paste Adds a copied Analysis to the Method.

Save As... Save an existing Method to a new name. Optionally, type a short and/or long description for the Method.

Open Opens the Method in the Method Builder.

Remove Removes the Method from the Application and places it in the Methods palette.

Deletes the Method or all versions of the Method.

Delete
For more information, see Delete a Method.

Default Method Sets the selected Method’s Configuration as the default Method Configuration in the Application Run screen.

2-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

Action Buttons

Project Library Window

The following action buttons are located in the lower left corner of the Project Library.

Action
Description
Button

Create a new Project.

New Project
For more information, see How to Create a Project.

Runs the selected Application.

Run
For more information, refer to Chapter 8, Running an Application.

Refresh Reloads the palettes with any new Applications or Methods created or imported.

Exports a Project to a specified location as a .LCPE file or exports an Application to a specified location as a .LCAE file.
Export
For more information, see How to Export Projects or How to Export Applications.

Imports a .LCAE file and lists the Application in the Applications palette in the Project Library or imports a .LCPE file and
displays the Project in the Project Library workspace.
Import
Imported components will not display until the window is refreshed.
For more information, see How to Import Projects or How to Import Applications.

Info Window
Displays Current User, Name, Created Date, Created By, Last Modified Date, Last Modified By,
Short Description, and Long Description.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-7

 Project Library 2

Project
Project

The following sections describe:

• How to Create a Project
• How to Share a Project
• How to Modify a Project
• How to Export Projects
• How to Import Projects
• How to Delete a Project

How to Create a Project

The drag-and-drop feature allows easy creation of a Project.
1 On the Liquid Chromatography menu, select Project Library.
2 In the Project Library, do one of the following:
a) Click New Project. The New Project dialog is displayed.
b) Right-click on the workspace and then select Create Project.
3 In the New Project dialog, do the following:
a) In the Project Name field, type a name.
b) In the Short Description field (optional), type a brief description
of the Project.
c) In the Long Description field (optional), type a detailed description of the Project.
d) Click OK. The Project Library is refreshed with the new Project listed in the workspace.

2-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2
4 To add an Application to the Project, do one of the following:

Project
• Right-click on the Project and then select Create Application,
The New Application dialog is displayed.
1) In the Application Name field, type a name.
2) In the Short Description field (optional), type a brief
description of the Application.
3) In the Long Description field (optional), type a detailed
description of the Application.
4) Click OK. The Project Library is refreshed with the new
Application listed in the Applications palette and in the
Project.
• From the Applications palette, drag an Application into the
workspace and then drop it in the Project.You will be given the option to link the Application to other
Applications with the same name (Paste Same Copy) or rename the Application.
When Paste Same Copy is selected, any changes to the Application or
its results are updated in all copies of that Application. For example, if
a Method is removed from the original Application, it will also be
removed from the pasted Application.
5 To add a Method to the Application, do one of the following:
• Right-click on the Application and then select Create Method. The
Method Builder opens.
• From the Methods palette, drag a Method into the workspace and then drop it in the Application.
• Drag a Method from an existing Application and then drop it in the
Application. You will be given the option to link the Method to other
Methods with the same name (Paste Same Copy) or rename the
Method.
When Paste Same Copy is selected, any changes to the Method are
updated in all copies of that Method. For example, if an Analysis is
removed from the original Method, it will also be removed from the pasted Method.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-9

 Project Library 2

How to Share a Project

Project

To enable other users to view or modify a Project, it must be shared. Once shared, the logged on user can
act on the Project per the permissions assigned to that user’s group. For example, a user with the Modify
Project Library permission can make changes to a Project that has been shared with him.

Projects are automatically shared with all members of the default Admin group and can be accessed by
those members by selecting “All projects for which user has access” filter criteria. Only members of the
default Admin group can unshare a Project with other members of the default Admin group.

To share a project, do the following:

1 In the Project Library, right-click the Project to be shared and then select
Share.
2 From the drop-down list of Groups, select the Group with which the Project
should be shared.
3 After the Group is selected, the list of Users in that group appears. Select the
check box next to each User with whom the Project should be shared.
4 Click Update.
5 Repeat for each additional Group.

Modify a Project
You can modify a Project by doing the following:
• Change a Description.
• Add Applications
• Remove Applications.
• Changing the Share settings. (How to Share a Project)

Change a Description
To change the description after the Project has been created:
1 Right-click on the Project and then select Change Description.
2 In the Short Description field (optional), type a brief description of the Project.
3 In the Long Description field (optional), type a detailed description of the Project.

2-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

Add Applications

Project
From the Applications palette, drag an Application into the workspace
and then drop it in the Project. You will be given the option to link the
Application to other Applications with the same
name (Paste Same Copy) or rename the Application.
When Paste Same Copy is selected, any changes to the Application or its results are updated in all copies
of that Application. For example, if a Method is removed from the original Application, it will also be
removed from the pasted Application.

Remove Applications
You can remove an Application from a Project without deleting the Application. To remove an Application,
right-click on the Application and then select Remove. The Application is removed from the Project, but
remains in the Applications palette.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-11

 Project Library 2

How to Export Projects

Project

1 In the Project Library, click Export. The Export window

is displayed.
2 In the Export window, do the following:
a) Click Project.
b) In the Select the items to be exported field, select
the Projects.

To select multiple Projects in a sequential order,

hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select Projects in a random order, hold CTRL
and then select multiple Projects with the mouse.
To select all Projects, click .
To clear all selected Projects, click .
To invert the selection of Projects, click .

c) In the Select a path field, do the following:

1) Click . The Browse For folder window is displayed.

You can create a new folder from the Browse For folder window.

2) On the Browse For folder window, select a folder and click OK.
3 Click OK. On completion of the Export operation, the Project (including the Applications and Methods, but not
Results) is saved in the specified folder with a .LCPE extension. The TRILUTION information dialog box is displayed.

If a Project with the same name is found in the Export path, an option is provided to rename or overwrite the
Project or to skip the Export operation for that Project.

a) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Export operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

2-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

How to Import Projects

Project
1 In the Project Library, click Import. The
Select Application or Project Files to
Import window is displayed.
2 From the Select Application or Project Files
to Import window, do the following:
a) Browse for and select the Project
Export Files (.LCPE).

To select multiple Projects in a

sequential order, hold SHIFT + any
arrow key simultaneously.
To select Projects in a random order,
hold CTRL and then select multiple
Projects with the mouse.

b) Click Open. The Project (including the

Applications and Methods, but not Results) is imported. On completion of the Import operation, the
TRILUTION information box is displayed.

If a Project, Method, or Application with the same name is found, an option is provided to import the
Method as a new revision or rename the Project, Method, or Application.

c) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Import operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

Delete a Project
To delete a Project, do the following:
1 Select a Project and right-click to view the submenu. On the submenu, click Delete.
2 On the Delete confirmation dialog box, click Yes. The Project is deleted. Use the Purge and Recover utility to
permanently delete the Project.

A Project cannot be deleted if it contains Applications. Remove or delete associated Applications before
attempting to delete the Project.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-13

 Project Library 2

Application
Application

The following sections describe:

• How to Create an Application
• How to Export Applications
• How to Import Applications

How to Create an Application

An Application contains Methods. You will run an Application to
obtain Results.
1 Right-click on the Project and then select Create Application, The
New Application dialog is displayed.
a) In the Application Name field, type a name.
b) In the Short Description field (optional), type a brief description
of the Application.
c) In the Long Description field (optional), type a detailed
description of the Application.
d) Click OK. The Project Library is refreshed with the new
Application listed in the Applications palette and in the Project.

Modify an Application
You can modify an Application by doing the following:
• Change a Description.
• Add Applications
• Remove Applications.

Change a Description
To change the description after the Application has been created:
1 Right-click on the Application and then select Change Description.
2 In the Short Description field (optional), type a brief description of the Application.
3 In the Long Description field (optional), type a detailed description of the Application.

2-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

Add Methods

Application
From the Methods palette, drag a Method into the workspace and then drop it in the Application. You will
be given the option to link the Method to other Methods with the same name (Paste Same Copy) or
rename the Method.

When Paste Same Copy is selected, any changes to the Method are updated in all copies of that Method.
For example, if an Analysis is removed from the original Method, it will also be removed from the pasted
Method.

Remove Methods
You can remove a Method from an Application without deleting the Method. To remove a Method,
right-click on the Method and then select Remove. The Method is removed from the Application, but
remains in the Methods palette.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-15

 Project Library 2

How to Export Applications

Application

1 In the Project Library, click Export. The Export window

is displayed.
2 In the Export window, do the following:
a) Click Application.
b) In the Select the items to be exported field,
select the Applications.

To select multiple Applications in a sequential

order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key
simultaneously.
To select Applications in a random order, hold
CTRL and then select multiple Applications with
the mouse.
To select all Applications, click .
To clear all selected Applications, click .
To invert the selection of Applications, click .

c) In the Select a path field, do the following:

1) Click . The Browse For folder window is displayed.

You can create a new folder from the Browse For folder window.

2) On the Browse For folder window, select a folder and click OK.
3 Click OK. On completion of the Export operation, the Application (and Methods, but not Results) is saved in the
specified folder with a .LCAE extension. The TRILUTION information dialog box is displayed.

If an Application with the same name is found in the Export path, an option is provided to rename or
overwrite the Application or to skip the Export operation for that Application.

a) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Export operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

2-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Project Library 2

How to Import Applications

Application
1 In the Project Library, click Import. The
Select Application or Project Files to
Import window is displayed.
2 From the Select Application or Project Files
to Import window, do the following:
a) Browse for and select the Application
Exported Files (.LCAE).

To select multiple Applications in a

sequential order, hold SHIFT + any
arrow key simultaneously.
To select Applications in a random
order, hold CTRL and then select
multiple Applications with the mouse.

b) Click Open. The Application (and

Methods, but not Results) is imported. On completion of the Import operation, the TRILUTION information
box is displayed.

If a Task, Method, or Application with the same name is found, an option is provided to import the Task or
Method as a new revision or rename the Task, Method, or Application.

c) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Import operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

Delete an Application
To delete an Application, do the following:
1 Select an Application and then right-click to view the submenu. On the submenu, click Delete.
2 On the Delete confirmation dialog box, click Yes. The Application is deleted. Use the Purge and Recover utility
to permanently delete the Application.

An Application cannot be deleted if it contains Methods or Results. Remove or delete associated Methods
and archive Results before attempting to delete the Application.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 2-17

 Project Library 2

View Results
View Results

To view results, do one of the following:

• Right-click on an Application and then select Results.

• Double-click the Results component ( ).

For more information about Results, refer to Chapter 11, Results.

2-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder 3

To begin creating a Method, select Method from the Liquid Chromatography menu.

In this chapter, you will learn:

• How to Create a Method
• How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions
• How to Create and Use Control Variables

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 3-1

 Method Builder 3

Method Builder
Method Builder

Using the options in the Method Builder, you specify the Configuration, a Bed Layout, method conditions
for controlling instruments (Control), and analysis parameters (Analysis).
Configuration Tab Control Tab

Bed Layout Tab Analysis Tab

Action Buttons

The Method Builder window

3-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder 3

Action Buttons

Method Builder
The following action buttons are located in the lower left corner of the Method Builder.

Action
Description
Button

NEW Create a new Method.

Open an existing Method.

OPEN
For more information, see View a Method.

SAVE Save an existing Method to the same name.

SAVE AS Save a new Method or save an existing Method to a new name. Optionally, type a short and/or long description for the Method.

MODIFY Modify the short and/or long description for the Method.

Deletes the open Method or all versions of the Method.

DELETE
For more information, see Delete a Method.

Exports the Method to a specified location as a .LCME file.

EXPORT
For more information, see How to Export Methods.

Imports a .LCME file and lists the Method in the Methods palette in the Project Library or replaces it in the Application.
IMPORT
For more information, see How to Import Methods.

Allows you to reload the Configured Instruments palette with any new Tasks created. It basically allows you to update the builder
with the latest Tasks.
REFRESH
It also allows you to update any changes to the unit settings.
Refresh after deleting and before adding new instruments.

Runs the Application that the current Method was last saved to.
RUN
For more information, see Chapter 8, Running an Application.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 3-3

 Method Builder 3

Configuration Tab
Method Builder

For details about this tab and how to create a Configuration, see Chapter 4, Method Builder -
Configuration.

Bed Layout Tab

For details about this tab and how to create a Bed Layout, see Chapter 5, Method Builder - Bed Layout.

Control Tab
For details about this tab and how to add steps to a Method, see Chapter 6, Method Builder - Control.

Analysis Tab
For details about this tab and how to create Analyses, see Chapter 7, Method Builder - Analysis.

3-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder 3

View a Method

View a Method
1 On the Method Builder, click Open. The Open Method window appears.

The Open Method window

Clear the Show Latest Versions check box to see all versions of all Methods in the current database.
2 On the Open Method window, select a Method and then click OK. The Method appears in the workspace.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 3-5

 Method Builder 3

Save a Method
Save a Method

When finished creating the Method:

1 Click Save.
2 When the Save As dialog appears:
a) Select an Application from the
drop-down menu to which this
Method will be saved.
b) Type a name for the Method in
the Name field.
c) Optionally, type a short and/or
long description.
d) Optionally, rename the
Configuration and Bed Layout.

The following special characters are not permitted in names or descriptions: ampersand (&), apostrophe (‘),
greater than (>), and back slash (\).

After the Method has been saved, the Run button becomes active. Click Run to launch the
Application Run screen. For more information, see Chapter 8, Running an Application.

3-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder 3

How to Export Methods

How to Export Methods

1 On the Method Builder, click Export. The
Export window displays all the available Methods.
2 In the Export window, complete the following:
a) In the Select the items to be exported field,
select the Methods.

To select multiple Methods in a sequential order,

hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select Methods in a random order, hold CTRL
and then select multiple Methods with the
mouse.

b) In the Select a path field, complete the following:

1) Click . The Browse For Folder window

appears.
2) On the Browse For Folder window, select a
folder and then click OK.
3 Click OK. On completion of the Export operation, the Method (and Tasks) is saved in the specified folder with a
.LCME extension. The TRILUTION information dialog box appears.

If a Method with the same name is found in the export path, an option is provided to rename or overwrite
the Method or to skip the export operation for that Method only.

4 On the TRILUTION information dialog box, complete the following:

• To view the log information of the Export operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 3-7

 Method Builder 3

How to Import Methods

How to Import Methods

1 On the Method Builder, click Import. The

Select Method Files to Import window
appears.
2 On the Select Method Files to
Import window, complete the following:
a) Browse for and select the Method
Export files.

To select multiple Methods in a

sequential order, hold SHIFT + any
arrow key simultaneously.
To select Methods in a random order,
hold CTRL and then select multiple
Methods with the mouse.

b) Click Open. Some or all of the

following dialogs will appear:
• A dialog appears with options for importing the Tasks in the Method. Indicate whether to import the
task as a new version, rename the task, import all tasks as new versions, or skip the import of all tasks.
• A dialog appears with options for importing the Method. Indicate whether to import the Method as a
new version, rename the Method, or import all Methods as new versions.
On completion of the Import operation, the TRILUTION information box appears.
c) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, complete the following:
• To view the log information of the Import operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

Delete a Method
1 Open a Method and on the action bar, click Delete. A Delete confirmation dialog box appears.
2 On the Delete confirmation dialog box, do one of the following:
• Click Yes. The Method is deleted.
• Select the Delete All Versions check box and then click Yes. All versions of the Method are deleted.
Use the Purge and Recover utility to permanently delete the Method.

3-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder 3

Close the Method Builder

Close the Method Builder

On the Method Builder, do one of the following:

• Click ( ) on the lower right corner of the Method Builder to return to the TRILUTION LC menu.

• Click ( ) on the upper right corner of the Method Builder to close the builder.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 3-9

Method Builder - Configuration 4

A Configuration consists of a group of uniquely named instruments. The Configuration is part of a Method.

The drag-and-drop feature enables easy creation of Configurations. You can drag an instrument and drop it in the Workspace.

For information about how to create a Configuration, see How to Create a Configuration.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 4-1

 Method Builder - Configuration 4

Configuration Tab Window

Configuration Tab Window

The Configuration window in the Method Builder is a graphical interface used to create a Configuration.

Configured
Instruments Available
Panel Instruments

Workspace
Instrument
Types
Properties

The Method Builder - Configuration tab window

4-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Configuration 4

Configured Instruments Panel

Configuration Tab Window

This panel is used to provide information and also for navigation. Information
provided is dependent on the instrument type.

Instrument
Information Provided
Type

Lists data channels and any associated analyses. Can navigate to the Analysis tab by
Detector
clicking on an analysis name.

Fraction
Lists Bed Layout. Can navigate to the Bed Layout tab by clicking the Bed Layout name.
Collector

Used only for navigation. Click on the instrument name to view the property page for
Injector
that instrument.

Liquid Handler Lists Bed Layout. Can navigate to the Bed Layout tab by clicking the Bed Layout name.

Used only for navigation. Click on the instrument name to view the property page for
Mobile Phase
that instrument.

Used only for navigation. Click on the instrument name to view the property page for
Switching Valve
that instrument.

Lists data channels and any associated analyses. Can navigate to the Analysis tab by
Communication
clicking on an analysis name.

Used only for navigation. Click on the instrument name to view the property page for
Syringe Pump
that instrument.

For information on how to create a Configuration, see How to Create a Configuration.

Bed Layout tab

For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Bed Layout tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 4-3

 Method Builder - Configuration 4

Control tab
Configuration Tab Window

For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Control tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Analysis tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Analysis tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Instrument Types
Lists the available instrument groups.
For information on how to create a Configuration, see How to Create a Configuration.

Available Instruments
Lists the instruments of the selected instrument group or those identified during the scan.

For information on how to create a Configuration, see How to Create a Configuration.

Workspace
Forms the area to create or view a Configuration.

For information on how to create a Configuration, see How to Create a Configuration.

Properties
Forms the area used to view and/or edit instrument properties.

For a detailed description of properties by instrument, see Configuration Properties.

For information on how to create a Configuration, see How to Create a Configuration.

4-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Configuration 4

How to Create a Configuration

How to Create a Configuration

1 In the Method Builder, select the Configuration tab.
2 Do one of the following:
• From the Instrument Types, select an instrument group (Detector, Fraction Collector, Injector, Liquid
Handler, Mobile Phase, Switching Valve, Communication, or Syringe Pump). The instruments in that group
are listed in the Available Instruments window.
• Click Scan. The software searches for Gilson GSIOC or Ethernet instruments.
• Click Browse. Select an existing Configuration then click OK.
3 From the Available Instruments window, drag an instrument and then drop it in the Workspace.

If an instrument with the same GSIOC ID is found, an option is provided to add the instrument at a different
GSIOC ID.

4 If a data instrument (Detector or Communication) will be used, do the following:

a) Right-click on a data channel marked for use and then select Primary Channel. One channel per
Configuration must be specified as the primary channel.
Note: When collecting fractions, the software monitors the primary channel.
b) Right-click on a data channel in the Configured Instruments Panel and then select Add Analysis. When
prompted, name the analysis and then do one of the following:
• Optionally, set the peak integration, report, and error handling options for the Analysis. See Chapter 7,
Method Builder - Analysis for details.
• Click the Configuration tab and repeat step b for any additional data channels.
• Right-click on a data channel and then select Select Analysis to associate an existing analysis from the
current Method to the data channel. Any changes to the analysis will be reflected in all copies of the
analysis with the same name.
• Right-click on an analysis and then select Browse Analysis to associate an existing analysis from any
Method to the data channel. Any changes to the analysis will be reflected in all copies of the analysis
with the same name in any Method.
• Right-click on an analysis and then select Copy Analysis to copy the analysis to the clipboard. To paste
the analysis, right-click on the data channel and then select Paste Analysis. When prompted, name the
analysis.
c) Right-click on an analysis and then select Default Analysis to specify which analysis TRILUTION LC will use
during the run for the associated data channel.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 4-5

 Method Builder - Configuration 4

Configuration Properties
How to Create a Configuration

Instruments are grouped by type on the Configuration tab of the Method Builder.

Each Instrument has a set of properties unique to that instrument. The set of properties for an instrument
may include one or more of the following tabs:

Tab Description

Setup Provide specific information about the instrument to the software.

Contacts Name input and output contacts. This information will be used to identify the contact in a Task.

Enter the instrument name and GSIOC ID or serial numbers. This information will be used to identify the instrument in a Task
General
and to the software.

The table below lists the instrument types.

Instrument Type

Detector Mobile Phase

Fraction Collector Switching Valve

Injector Communication

Liquid Handler Syringe Pump

4-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Detector
Configuration Properties

151 Detector 152 Detector

155 Detector 156 Detector

171 DAD 172 DAD

Detector Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

151 Detector, 152 Detector, 155 Detector, 156 Detector
Optionally, type a unique description for each data channel. This description and the data channel’s signal will be
displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run if the Use check box is selected for that data channel.
Data Channels DataChannel1 N/A
The Use check box for Data Channel 1 defaults selected. There are three data channels available (labeled
DataChannel1, DataChannel2, DataChannel3).

Data Rate (Points/Sec) The number of data points collected per second for the channel. Optionally, set a different data rate for each channel. 20 1–80

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Detector N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the software that allows the software to
GSIOC ID 16 10–19
communicate with the instrument.

171 DAD, 172 DAD

Optionally, type a unique description for each data channel. This description and the data channel’s signal will be
Data Channels displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run if the Use check box is selected for that data channel. DataChannel1 N/A
The Use check box for Data Channel 1 defaults selected. There are eight data channels available (labeled 1 through 8).

The number of data points collected per second for all channels. One rate is set for all channels.
Data Rate (Points/Sec) 10 1–10
The recommended setting is between 5 and 10 Points/Sec.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s status will be displayed at all times
Contacts in the status box during an Application Run. There are two Outputs available (labeled 1, 2) and two Inputs N/A N/A
available (labeled A, B).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Detector N/A

Instrument Serial Number The serial number of the detector. N/A N/A

Detector Properties

4-7 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Fraction Collector
Configuration Properties

202C Fraction Collector FC 204 Fraction Collector

206 Fraction Collector PrepFC Fraction Collector

FC 203B Fraction Collector

Fraction Collector Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

202C, Fraction Collector, 206 Fraction Collector, FC 203B Fraction Collector, FC 204 Fraction Collector
The volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell and the inlet to the fraction collection valve.
Fraction Collection Delay Volume (mL) 0 N/A
See How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume for more information.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s status will be displayed at all times in the
Contacts status box during an Application Run. There are two Outputs available (labeled 1, 2) and two Inputs available (labeled A, N/A N/A
B). The 206 Fraction collector has one additional Output (labeled 3). The 202C Fraction Collector does not have contacts.

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Fraction Collector N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the software that allows the software to
GSIOC ID 6 0–63
communicate with the instrument.
Fraction Collector Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

4-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Fraction Collector Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

PrepFC Fraction Collector
The volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell and the inlet to the fraction collection valve.
Fraction Collection Delay Volume (mL) 0 N/A
See How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume for more information.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s status will be displayed at all times in the
Contacts status box during an Application Run. There are two Outputs available (labeled 1, 2) and four Inputs available (labeled A, N/A N/A
B, C, D). Output 1 is used as an Event contact, Input C is an Advance contact, and Input D is a Divert contact.

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Fraction Collector N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the software that allows the software to
GSIOC ID 6 0–9
communicate with the instrument.

Fraction Collector Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

4-9 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Fraction Collection System
Configuration Properties

The Fraction Collection System (FCS) is a group of instruments that are combined to allow fraction collection to multiple beds. An FCS consists of two or more
fraction collectors and a VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II. The Configuration can only include one FCS.

Fraction Collection System

Fraction Collection System Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

Fraction Collector The fraction collectors in the Configuration. N/A N/A

The VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II, selected from a drop-down list of

VALVEMATE N/A N/A
VALVEMATEs and VALVEMATE IIs in the Configuration, that the FCS will use.

Position The valve position on the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II. N/A 1–10, depending on the valve

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this system in a Task. Fraction Collection System N/A

Fraction Collection System Properties

How to use an FCS

1 Drag two fraction collectors into the workspace (for example, a 215 Liquid Handler to be used as a fraction collector and an FC 204 Fraction Collector) and set the
properties.
2 Drag a VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II into the workspace and set the properties. The VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II should be plumbed and ready to go at this point.
3 Drag a Fraction Collection System into the workspace.
a) On the Setup tab, do the following:
• In the VALVEMATE field, click the arrow and then select the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II from the drop-down list.
• In the Position field, click the arrow and then select the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II valve position from the drop-down list that corresponds to the first fraction
collector.
Note: When using a 2-position valve on a VALVEMATE, choose 1 for position 0 or 2 for position 1.
b) On the General tab, do the following:
• In the Instrument Name field, type a name for the FCS.
c) Repeat step 3 for additional fraction collectors.

4-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Injector
Configuration Properties

819 Injection Module

845Z Injection Module

Injector Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

819 Injection Module, 845Z Injection Module
Injection Module Name The name that will be used to identify this injection module in a Task. Injector N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the injection module and to the software
GSIOC ID 29 20–29
that allows the software to communicate with the injection module.

845Z Injection Module

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this injection module in a Task. Injector N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the injection module and to the software
GSIOC ID 29 20–29
that allows the software to communicate with the injection module.

Injector Properties

For a list of supplied tasks for the 819 Injection Module, see 819 Injection Module Tasks.

For a list of supplied tasks for the 845Z Injection Module, see 845Z Injection Module Tasks.

4-11 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler
Configuration Properties

215 Liquid Handler 233 XL Sample Injector GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump

215 Liquid Handler without Pump 234 Autoinjector GX-271 Prep Liquid Handler

231 XL Sample Injector 235 Autoinjector GX-281 Analytical Liquid Handler

232 XL Sample Injector GX-271 Analytical Liquid Handler GX-281 Prep Liquid Handler

4-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler Properties
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

215 Liquid Handler, 215 Liquid Handler without Pump
Z Arm Type (mm) This is the height of the Z-arm installed on the liquid handler. 125 mm Z-Arm 125 mm Z-Arm, 175 mm Z-Arm

This number corresponds to where the mounting clamp is on the vertical ruler on
Z Clamp Height (mm) 125 0–175
the installed Z-arm.

The Z-height to which the instrument’s probe moves before moving in the X or Y Range provided on-screen; calculated based on
Z Safe Height (mm) 122
direction. Z Clamp Height and Z Arm Type.

The volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell and the inlet to the
Fraction Collection Delay Volume (mL) fraction collection valve. 0 N/A
See How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume for more information.

ID A unique identifier to address syringes on the instrument. (215 Liquid Handler) A A

Syringe Name A unique name to address syringes on the instrument. (215 Liquid Handler) A N/A

Size (μL) The capacity of each installed syringe. (215 Liquid Handler) 1000 100, 250, 500, 1000, 5000, 10000, 25000

A unique name used to identify the liquid that is flowing through the associated
Reservoir Name Reservoir N/A
syringe. It is important for sample tracking. (215 Liquid Handler)

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
Contacts N/A N/A
There are four Outputs available (labeled 1, 2, 3, 4), four Inputs available (labeled
A, B, C, D), and one 24V Output.

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Liquid Handler N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the
GSIOC ID 22 20–29
software that allows the software to communicate with the instrument.

Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 1 of 6)

4-13 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

231 XL Sample Injector, 232 XL Sample Injector, 233 XL Sample Injector
56 mm Z-Arm, 123 mm Z-Arm,
Z Arm Type (mm) This is the height of the Z-arm installed on the liquid handler. 123 mm Z-Arm
183 mm Z-Arm (232 and 233 XL Sample Injector)

The Z-height to which the instrument’s probe moves before moving in the X or Y Range provided on-screen; calculated based on
Z Safe Height (mm) -2
direction. Z Clamp Height and Z Arm Type.

Injection Valve Location The location of the installed injection valve. (233 XL Sample Injector) Right Left, Right

The type of fraction collection valve installed. The switching valve is built-in to the
Fraction Valve instrument. The low pressure valve is installed on the Z-arm. (233 XL Sample Switching Switching, Low Pressure
Injector)

The volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell and the inlet to the
Fraction Collection Delay Volume (mL) fraction collection valve. (233 XL Sample Injector) 0 NA
See How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume for more information.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description will be used to
Contacts identify the contact in a Task. There are eight Outputs available (labeled 1 – 8) and N/A N/A
five Inputs available (labeled 1 – 5).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Liquid Handler N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the
GSIOC ID 10 0–31
software that allows the software to communicate with the instrument.

Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 2 of 6)

4-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

234 Autoinjector
The Z-height to which the instrument’s probe moves before moving in the X or Y
Z Safe Height (mm) -2 -56 to 0
direction.

ID A unique identifier to address the syringe on the instrument. A A

Syringe Name A unique name to address the syringe on the instrument. A N/A

Size (μL) The capacity of the installed syringe. 500 100, 500

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
Contacts N/A N/A
There are two Outputs available (labeled 1, 2) and three Inputs available (labeled
A, B, C).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Liquid Handler N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the
GSIOC ID 10 0–63
software that allows the software to communicate with the instrument.

235 Autoinjector
ID A unique identifier to address the syringe on the instrument. A A

Syringe Name A unique name to address the syringe on the instrument. A N/A

Size (μL) The capacity of the installed syringe. 500 100, 250, 500, 1000

Pause instrument when door is opened. Cleared

Interior light is turned on. Selected

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
Contacts N/A N/A
There are four Outputs available (labeled 1, 2, 3, 4) and four Inputs
available (labeled A, B, C, D).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Liquid Handler N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the
GSIOC ID 20 20-29
software that allows the software to communicate with the instrument.

Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 3 of 6)

4-15 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

GX-271 Analytical Liquid Handler, GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump, GX-271 Prep Liquid Handler
If the stop pin was inserted in S1, select 56 mm Probe. 125 mm Probe
Probe Type (mm) If the stop pin was inserted in S2, select 125 mm Probe. (GX-271 Analytical) 56 mm Probe, 125 mm Probe, 175 mm Probe
If no stop pin was used, select 175 mm Probe. 175 mm Probe (GX-271 Prep)

This number corresponds to where the mounting clamp is on the vertical ruler on 125 (GX-271 Analytical)
Z Clamp Height (mm) 0–260
the installed Z-arm. 175 (GX-271 Prep)

The Z-height to which the instrument’s probe moves before moving in the X or Y 122 (GX-271 Analytical)
Z Safe Height (mm) Calculated based on Z Clamp Height and Probe Type.
direction. 172 (GX-271 Prep)

Rinse Park Location The rinse location to where the instrument home completes. Rear Front, Center, Rear

1.1 (GX-271 Analytical) 0.5, 1.1, 5, 10.5

Transfer Tubing (mL) The size of the tubing being used from pump to probe.
30 (GX-271 Prep) 1.1, 5, 10.5, 30, 50 (GX-271 Prep)

When selected, the non-standard size of the tubing being used from pump to
Other Tubing (mL) 0 0–1000000
probe. (GX-271 Analytical and GX-271 Prep)

1/16" (GX-271 Analytical)

GX Direct Inject Valve Indicate the size of the injection valve installed. Not Installed, 1/8", 1/16"
1/8" (GX-271 Prep)

Waste Indicate which port will be used for waste. (GX-271 Analytical and GX-271 Prep) Port 1 Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, Port 4, Port 5, Port 6

Optionally, type a description of the solvent valve port. Five ports are available.
Ports 1 – 6 N/A N/A
One port is used for waste. (GX-271 Analytical and GX-271 Prep)

The volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell and the inlet to the
Fraction Collection Delay Volume (mL) fraction collection valve. 0 N/A
See How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume for more information.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
Output There are two Outputs available (labeled 1, 2). N/A N/A
Additionally, indicate whether the contact should open, close, or remain in the
same state on error. The default is No Change.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
24V Output There are two 24V Outputs available (labeled 1, 2). N/A N/A
Additionally, indicate whether the contact should open, close, or remain in the
same state on error. The default is Open.

Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 4 of 6)

4-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
Input status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run. N/A N/A
There are two inputs available (labeled A, B).

Optionally, type a description for the solenoid. There are two Solenoids
Solenoid N/A N/A
available (labeled 1, 2).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Liquid Handler N/A

Instrument Serial Number The serial number of the instrument. N/A N/A

Pump Serial Number The serial number of the GX Solvent System. (GX-271 Analytical and GX-271 Prep) N/A N/A

Injection Module Serial Number The serial number of the injection module. N/A N/A

GX-281 Analytical Liquid Handler, GX-281 Prep Liquid Handler

125 mm Probe
Probe Type (mm) This is the Z travel height. (GX-281 Analytical) 125 mm Probe, 175 mm Probe, 210 mm Probe
175 mm Probe (GX-281 Prep)

This number corresponds to where the mounting clamp is on the vertical ruler on 125 (GX-281 Analytical)
Z Clamp Height (mm) 95–300
the installed Z-arm. 175 (GX-281 Prep)

The Z-height to which the instrument’s probe moves before moving in the X or Y 122 (GX-281 Analytical) 0-175
Z Safe Height (mm)
direction. 172 (GX-281 Prep) Calculated based on Z Clamp Height and Probe Type.

Rinse Park Location The rinse location to where the instrument home completes. Left 1 Left 1, Left 2, Left 3, Right 1, Right 2, Right 3

1.1 (GX-281 Analytical) 0.5, 1.1, 3, 5, 10.5

Transfer Tubing (mL) The size of the tubing being used from pump to probe.
30 (GX-281 Prep) 1.1, 3, 5, 10.5, 30, 50

When selected, the non-standard size of the tubing being used from pump to
Other Tubing (mL) 0 0–1000000
probe.

1/16" (GX-281 Analytical)

Left GX Direct Inject Valve Indicate the size of the injection valve installed in the left position. Not Installed, 1/8", 1/16"
1/8" (GX-281 Prep)

1/16" (GX-281 Analytical)

Right GX Direct Inject Valve Indicate the size of the injection valve installed in the right position. Not Installed, 1/8", 1/16"
1/8" (GX-281 Prep)

Z Injection Valve Indicate whether (checked) or not (cleared) a Z Injection Valve is installed. Cleared N/A

Waste Indicate which port will be used for waste. Port 1 Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, Port 4, Port 5, Port 6

Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 5 of 6)

4-17 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

Optionally, type a description of the solvent valve port. Five ports are available.
Ports 1 – 6 N/A N/A
One port is used for waste.

The volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell and the inlet to the
Fraction Collection Delay Volume (mL) fraction collection valve. 0 N/A
See How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume for more information.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
Output There are four Outputs available (labeled 1, 2, 3, 4). N/A N/A
Additionally, indicate whether the contact should open, close, or remain in the
same state on error. The default is No Change.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run.
24V Output There are four 24V Outputs available (1, 2, 3, 4). N/A N/A
Additionally, indicate whether the contact should open, close, or remain in the
same state on error. The default is Open.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the contact’s
Input status will be displayed at all times in the status box during an Application Run. N/A N/A
There are four Inputs available (labeled A, B, C, D).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Liquid Handler N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the
GSIOC ID 25 20–29
software that allows the software to communicate with the instrument.

Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 6 of 6)

4-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Mobile Phase
Configuration Properties

305 Pump 321 HPLC Pump 332 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump

306 Pump 322 HPLC Pump 333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump

307 Pump 331 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump 334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump

Mobile Phase Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

305 Pump, 306 Pump, 307 Pump
Head Size The size of the pump head fitted to the pump. 5 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200

Pump Usage Indicate the function of the pump in the HPLC system. Mobile Phase Mobile Phase

The pump, using any solvent, that is being ramped in gradient

Organic Pump templates. N/A N/A
One HPLC pump in each Configuration must be designated “organic”.

Other Liquid, Water, Methanol, Acetonitrile, Tetrahydrofuran, Benzene,

n-Hexane, Carbon Tetrachloride, Water-Methanol 10-90, Water-Methanol 20-80,
Solvent Identifies the solvent that will be delivered from the pump. Water Water-Methanol 40-60, Water-Methanol 50-50, Water-Methanol 60-40,
Water-Methanol 80-20, Chloroform, Methylene Chloride, Ethanol, Acetone,
n-Heptane, Diethyl Ether

Type the name of the solvent to be delivered from the pump. Used
Solvent Name N/A N/A
only if Other Liquid is selected from the Solvent List.

Mobile Phase Properties Table (Page 1 of 4)

4-19 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Mobile Phase Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

A measure of how much the solvent being pumped can be
compressed when placed under pressure. The software uses the
compressibility setting to correct the flow characteristics of the
Compressibility (Mbar-1) system. 46 N/A

See Compressibility for compressibility values for some common

Mobile Phases.

The duration of one piston refill stroke.

For Analytical systems, a fast refill of 125 ms is appropriate. For
Refill Speed (ms) preparative flows (>10 mL/min), use a value in the range of 125 to 125 125–999
400 ms. Slower speeds may be necessary when pumping viscous
Mobile Phases.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the
contact’s status will be displayed at all times in the status box during
an Application Run. The 305 Pump and 306 Pump have five
Contacts N/A N/A
Outputs (labeled 1, 2, 3, High, Low). The 305 Pump has two
Inputs (labeled 1, 2). The 307 Pump has four Outputs (1, 2, 3, 4) and
two Inputs (labeled 1, 2).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Mobile Phase N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument

GSIOC ID and to the software that allows the software to communicate with the 1 0–63
instrument.

321 HPLC Pump, 322 HPLC Pump

Head Type The type of pump head fitted to the pump. H1 H1, H2

Pump Usage Indicate the function of the pump in the HPLC system. Mobile Phase Mobile Phase

The pump that is being ramped in gradient templates.

Organic Pump N/A N/A
One HPLC pump in each Configuration must be selected as organic.

Other Liquid, Water, Methanol, Acetonitrile, Tetrahydrofuran, Isopropanol,

Hexane, Dichloromethane, Water-Acetonitrile 10-90, Water-Acetonitrile 20-80,
Water-Acetonitrile 30-70, Water-Acetonitrile 40-60, Water-Acetonitrile 50-50,
Water-Acetonitrile 60-40, Water-Acetonitrile 70-30, Water-Acetonitrile 80-20,
Solvent Identifies the solvent that will be delivered from the pump. Water
Water-Acetonitrile 90-10, Water-Methanol 10-90, Water-Methanol 20-80,
Water-Methanol 30-70, Water-Methanol 40-60, Water-Methanol 50-50,
Water-Methanol 60-40, Water-Methanol 70-30, Water-Methanol 80-20,
Water-Methanol 90-10

Mobile Phase Properties Table (Page 2 of 4)

4-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Mobile Phase Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

Type the name of the solvent to be delivered from the pump. Used
Solvent Name N/A N/A
only if Other Liquid is selected from the Solvent List.

A measure of how much the solvent being pumped can be

compressed when placed under pressure. The software uses the
compressibility setting to correct the flow characteristics of the
Compressibility (Mbar-1) system. 34 N/A

See Compressibility for compressibility values for some common

Mobile Phases.

The duration of one piston refill stroke.

For Analytical systems, a fast refill of 125 ms is appropriate. For
Refill Speed (ms) preparative flows (>10 mL/min), use a value in the range of 125 to 125 125–999
400 ms. Slower speeds may be necessary when pumping viscous
Mobile Phases.

Mixing Chamber Size (uL) Physical volume setting for the dynamic mixer. 1000 200–2200

Indicate whether or not a Solvent Selection Valve Block is installed and

Solvent Valve Configuration No Solvent Valve No Solvent Valve, Solvent Valve
will be used.

Sets the solvent valve position. The valve position cannot be switched
Solvent Selection Valve during a run. Used only if Solvent Valve is selected from for the Solvent B1 B1, B2, B3, B4
Valve Configuration.

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the
contact’s status will be displayed at all times in the status box during
Contacts N/A N/A
an Application Run. The 321 HPLC Pump has four Outputs (labeled 1,
2, 3, 4) and two Inputs (labeled 1, 2).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Mobile Phase N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument

0–63 (321 HPLC Pump)
GSIOC ID and to the software that allows the software to communicate with the 1
0-9 (322 HPLC Pump)
instrument.

331 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump, 332 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump, 333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump, 334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump
H2 H2 (331 and 332 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump)
Head Type The type of pump head fitted to the pump.
H3 H3 (333 and 334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump)

Pump Usage Indicate the function of the pump in the HPLC system. Mobile Phase Mobile Phase

Mobile Phase Properties Table (Page 3 of 4)

4-21 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Mobile Phase Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

The pump, using any solvent, that is being ramped in gradient
Organic Pump templates. N/A N/A
One HPLC pump in each Configuration must be designated “organic”.

Indicate whether or not a Solvent Selection Valve Block is installed and

Solvent Valve Configuration No Solvent Valve No Solvent Valve, Solvent Valve
will be used.

Sets the solvent valve position. The valve position cannot be switched
Solvent Selection Valve during a run. Used only if Solvent Valve is selected from for the Solvent 1 1, 2, 3, 4
Valve Configuration.

Other Liquid, Water, Methanol, Acetonitrile, Tetrahydrofuran, Isopropanol,

Hexane, Dichloromethane, Water-Acetonitrile 10-90, Water-Acetonitrile 20-80,
Water-Acetonitrile 30-70, Water-Acetonitrile 40-60, Water-Acetonitrile 50-50,
Water-Acetonitrile 60-40, Water-Acetonitrile 70-30, Water-Acetonitrile 80-20,
Solvent Identifies the solvent that will be delivered from the pump. Water
Water-Acetonitrile 90-10, Water-Methanol 10-90, Water-Methanol 20-80,
Water-Methanol 30-70, Water-Methanol 40-60, Water-Methanol 50-50,
Water-Methanol 60-40, Water-Methanol 70-30, Water-Methanol 80-20,
Water-Methanol 90-10

Type the name of the solvent to be delivered from the pump. Used
Solvent Name N/A N/A
only if Other Liquid is selected from the Solvent List.

A measure of how much the solvent being pumped can be

compressed when placed under pressure. The software uses the
compressibility setting to correct the flow characteristics of the
Compressibility (Mbar-1) system. 34 N/A

See Compressibility for compressibility values for some common

Mobile Phases.

Physical volume setting for the dynamic mixer. (331 and 332
Mixing Chamber Size (uL) 1000 200–2200
Prep-Scale HPLC Pump)

Optionally, type a description for the contact. This description and the
contact’s status will be displayed at all times in the status box during
Contacts N/A N/A
an Application Run. The 331 and 333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps have
four Outputs (labeled 1, 2, 3, 4) and two Inputs (labeled 1, 2).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Mobile Phase N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument

1 0–63 (331 and 333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump)
GSIOC ID and to the software that allows the software to communicate with the
2 0-9 (332 and 334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump)
instrument.

Mobile Phase Properties Table (Page 4 of 4)

4-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Switching Valve
Configuration Properties

VALVEMATE

VALVEMATE II

Switching Valve Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

VALVEMATE, VALVEMATE II
2, 4, 6, 8
(VALVEMATE)
Valve Positions The number of positions. 2
2, 4, 6, 8, 10
(VALVEMATE II)

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Valve N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the software that allows the software to communicate with the
GSIOC ID 35 30–39
instrument.

Switching Valve Properties

For a list of supplied tasks for the VALVEMATE and VALVEMATE II, see VALVEMATE®/VALVEMATE® II Tasks.

4-23 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Communication
Configuration Properties

506C System Interface

Communication Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

506C System Interface
Optionally, type a unique description for each data channel. This description and the data channel’s signal will be displayed
Data Channels at all times in the status box during an Application Run if the Use check box is selected for that data channel. There are four DataChannelA N/A
Data Channels available (labeled A, B, C, D).

Data Rate (points/sec) The number of data points collected per second for the channel. There are four Data Channels available (labeled A, B, C, D). 20 1–80

Optionally, type a description for the contacts. This description and the contacts’ status will be displayed at all times in the
Contacts status box during an Application Run. There are six Outputs (labeled 1 – 6), four Inputs (labeled A, B, C, D), and four Analog N/A N/A
Inputs (labeled A, B, C, D).

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Contact N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the software that allows the software to
GSIOC ID 63 0–63
communicate with the instrument.

Communication Properties

For a list of supplied tasks for the 506C System Interface, see 506C System Interface Tasks.

4-24 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Syringe Pump
Configuration Properties

402 Pump Dual 402 Pump Single

402 Pump Dual with Tee Virtual Pumping System

Syringe Pump Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

402 Pump Dual, 402 Pump Dual with Tee, 402 Pump Single
A
Syringes to Use The syringes that will be used when this instrument is selected as the Pump in a Task. A
A, B (402 Dual)

N/A
ID A unique identifier to address syringes on the instrument. A
A, B (402 Dual)

A
Syringe Name A unique name to address syringes on the instrument. N/A
A, B (402 Dual)

Size (μL) The capacity of each installed syringe. 1000 100, 250, 500, 1000, 5000, 10000, 25000

A unique name used to identify the liquid that is flowing through the associated syringe. It is important for sample
Reservoir Name Reservoir N/A
tracking.

Instrument Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Pump N/A

A unique numerical address that must be known to the instrument and to the software that allows the software to
GSIOC ID 0 0–31
communicate with the instrument.

Virtual Pumping System

Probe The probes in the Configuration using the VPS. Probe

Syringe The syringes in the Configuration using the VPS. Syringe

VALVEMATE The VALVEMATE that the VPS will use (if any). VALVEMATE

Syringe Pump Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

For a list of supplied tasks for the 402 Pump Dual, 402 Pump Dual with Tee, and 402 Pump Single, see 402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks.

4-25 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Syringe Pump Properties (Continued)
Configuration Properties

Name Brief Description Default Value Range

Position The valve position (A–H) on the VALVEMATE. Required when a VALVEMATE is selected. Position

Pump Name The name that will be used to identify this instrument in a Task. Pump Pump Name

Syringe Pump Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

For a list of supplied tasks for the 402 Pump Dual, 402 Pump Dual with Tee, and 402 Pump Single, see 402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks.

4-26 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
402 Pump Dual with Tee
Configuration Properties

The 402 Dual with Tee is a uniquely designed syringe pump that allows for two different syringe sizes to function as one syringe pump.

For the syringe pump to function properly, the following will be true:
• The left syringe capacity is greater than the right syringe capacity.

The following describes how the syringes work together:

ASPIRATE (TRAY)
• The valve must be in the probe position.
• The right syringe will be used if the requested volume is less than 95% of the right syringe capacity. Held volume is considered.
• The left syringe will be used if the requested volume is 95% or greater than the right syringe capacity.

ASPIRATE (RESERVOIR)
• The valve must be in the reservoir position
• The left syringe will be used.

DISPENSE
• The right syringe will be used if the requested volume is less than 95% of the right syringe capacity. Held volume is considered.
• The left syringe will be used if the requested volume is 95% or greater than the right syringe capacity.

For a list of supplied tasks for the 402 Pump Dual with Tee, see 402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks.

4-27 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Virtual Pumping System
Configuration Properties

The Virtual Pumping System (VPS) is a group of instruments that are combined to perform as a pumping system. A VPS consists of a probe from a liquid
handler and syringes. Optionally, a VALVEMATE may be included to provide additional fluid paths. The Configuration can include one or more VPS.

Using a VPS
For a system using multiple reservoir solutions, complete the following:
1 Drag and drop a liquid handler with installed single syringe pump into the workspace (for example, 215 Liquid Handler) and set the properties.
2 Drag and drop a VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II into the workspace and set the properties. Your VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II should be plumbed and ready to go at this
point.
3 Drag and drop a Virtual Pumping System into the workspace.
a) In the VALVEMATE field, click the arrow and then select the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II from the drop-down list.
b) In the Position field, click the arrow and then select the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II valve position from the drop-down list that corresponds to the first reservoir
solution.
c) In the Pump Name field, type a name for the first VPS. This is a good place to reference the first reservoir solution. This name will be used to identify the VPS in a Task.
4 Repeat step 3 for additional reservoirs.

Single-Probe, Multiple-Syringe Configuration

1 Drag and drop a liquid handler into the workspace and set the properties.
2 Drag and drop a VALVEMATE into the workspace and set the properties. Your VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II should be plumbed and ready to go at this point.
3 Drag and drop the pumps into the workspace and set the properties. You will need to set a unique GSIOC ID for each.
4 Drag and drop a Virtual Pumping System into the workspace.
a) Click on a Syringe Name and then click the up or down arrow to associate the syringe with a probe.
b) In the VALVEMATE field, click the arrow and then select the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II from the drop-down list.
c) In the Position field, click the arrow and then select the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II valve position from the drop-down list that corresponds to the syringe.
d) In the Pump Name field, type a name for the VPS. This name will be used to identify the VPS in a Task.
5 Repeat step 4 for each additional syringe.

4-28 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Configuration 4

Compressibility

How to Create a Configuration

The following table provides the compressibility values for some common mobile phases.
Compressibility

Instrument
30x-Series Pumps 32x- and 33x-Series Pumps

Solvent Temperature (ºC) Compressibility Temperature (ºC) Compressibility

20 46
25 46
Water 30 45
20–23ºC 34
40 45
20 121–123
25 125–127
Methanol 30 129–130
20–23ºC 162
40 138
20 94–95
25 96–97
Benzene 30 101–103
20–23ºC
40 110
20 97–101
25 97
Chloroform 30 108–110
20–23ºC 204
40 118–119

Methylene Chloride 25 97 20–23ºC

20 103–105
25 106–108
Carbon Tetrachloride 30 112–113
20–23ºC
40 120–122
20 110–112
25 114–116
Ethanol 30 118–119
20–23ºC 148
40 126–127
20 126–127
25 124
Acetone 30 133
20–23ºC
40 144–156
20 140–145
25 142–149
n-Heptane 30 150–155
20–23ºC 270
40 160
20 150–165
25 161–171
n-Hexane 30 165–180
20–23ºC 290
40 183

Dichloromethane 20–23ºC 200

20 184–187
Diethyl Ether 25 195–200 20–23ºC
30 208–209
Compressibility Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 4-29

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Compressibility (Continued)
Compressibility

Instrument
30x-Series Pumps 32x- and 33x-Series Pumps

Solvent Temperature (ºC) Compressibility Temperature (ºC) Compressibility

Acetonitrile 99 20–23ºC 180

Tetrahydrofuran 93 20–23ºC 150

Isopropanol 20–23ºC 162

Water-Methanol, 10-90 117 20–23ºC 130

Water-Methanol, 20-80 86 20–23ºC 110

Water-Methanol, 30-70 20–23ºC 92

Water-Methanol, 40-60 56 20–23ºC 73

Water-Methanol, 50-50 52 20–23ºC 55

Water-Methanol, 60-40 46 20–23ºC 46

Water-Methanol, 70-30 20–23ºC 43

Water-Methanol, 80-20 40 20–23ºC 40

Water-Methanol, 90-10 20–23ºC 37

Water-Acetonitrile, 10-90 20–23ºC 146

Water-Acetonitrile, 20-80 20–23ºC 123

Water-Acetonitrile, 30-70 20–23ºC 103

Water-Acetonitrile, 40-60 20–23ºC 82

Water-Acetonitrile, 50-50 20–23ºC 62

Water-Acetonitrile, 60-40 20–23ºC 52

Water-Acetonitrile, 70-30 20–23ºC 48

Water-Acetonitrile, 80-20 20–23ºC 42

Water-Acetonitrile, 90-10 20–23ºC 36

Compressibility Table (Page 2 of 2)

4-30 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Configuration 4

How to Calculate Fraction Collection Delay Volume

How to Create a Configuration

Delay Volume is the volume in the flow path between the detector flow cell outlet and the inlet of the
fraction collection valve.
You can calculate delay volume (milliliters) with this equation:

Delay Volume (mL) = (length x volume per length) / 1000

You’ll need to know:

• length of detector-to-collector inlet tubing (mm)
Note: If using a Fraction Collection System with multiple fraction collectors, measure the length of tubing
between the detector flow cell and the VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II and also the length of tubing between the
VALVEMATE or VALVEMATE II and the inlet to the fraction collection valve for each fraction collector in the
Fraction Collection System.
• internal diameter of detector-to-collector inlet tubing (mm)
• volume of detector-to-collector inlet tubing (mL) determined using the Calculating Delay Volume table.

Enter the final value in TRILUTION LC.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 4-31

 Method Builder - Configuration 4
Calculating Delay Volume
How to Create a Configuration

Inlet Tubing ID Volume of Inlet Tubing per Length

in mm Volume μL/in Volume μL/cm

0.001" 0.025 mm 0.013 μL/in 0.005 μL/cm

0.002" 0.051 mm 0.051 μL/in 0.020 μL/cm

0.003" 0.076 mm 0.114 μL/in 0.045 μL/cm

0.004" 0.102 mm 0.206 μL/in 0.081 μL/cm

0.005" 0.127 mm 0.323 μL/in 0.127 μL/cm

0.006" 0.152 mm 0.460 μL/in 0.181 μL/cm

0.007" 0.178 mm 0.632 μL/in 0.249 μL/cm

0.008" 0.203 mm 0.820 μL/in 0.323 μL/cm

0.009" 0.229 mm 1.046 μL/in 0.412 μL/cm

0.010" 0.254 mm 1.288 μL/in 0.507 μL/cm

0.011" 0.279 mm 1.552 μL/in 0.611 μL/cm

0.012" 0.305 mm 1.854 μL/in 0.730 μL/cm

0.013" 0.330 mm 2.172 μL/in 0.855 μL/cm

0.014" 0.357 mm 2.540 μL/in 1.000 μL/cm

0.015" 0.381 mm 2.896 μL/in 1.140 μL/cm

0.016" 0.406 mm 3.287 μL/in 1.294 μL/cm

0.017" 0.432 mm 3.721 μL/in 1.465 μL/cm

0.018" 0.457 mm 4.163 μL/in 1.639 μL/cm

0.019" 0.483 mm 4.650 μL/in 1.831 μL/cm

0.020" 0.508 mm 5.146 μL/in 2.026 μL/cm

0.030" 0.762 mm 11.577 μL/in 4.558 μL/cm

0.040" 1.016 mm 20.581 μL/in 8.103 μL/cm

0.050" 1.270 mm 32.160 μL/in 12.660 μL/cm

Volume calculated using where h is the length of inlet tubing.

Calculating Delay Volume

4-32 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Configuration 4

Modify a Configuration

Modify a Configuration
You can modify a Configuration by doing the following:
• Add new instruments to an existing Configuration.
• Delete instruments from an existing Configuration.
• Modify the instrument properties of the instruments in a Configuration.

When you right-click on an instrument in the Workspace, a menu is displayed with the option to delete the
instrument.

You can delete selected instruments in the workspace by pressing the DELETE key.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 4-33

Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

A Bed Layout serves as one of the building blocks of a Method. It consists of the following:
• A Template
• Footprints
• Racks
• Wells

To create a Bed Layout, see How to Create a Bed Layout.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 5-1

 Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

Bed Layout Tab Window

Bed Layout Tab Window

The Bed Layout window in the Method Builder is a graphical interface used to create a Bed Layout.

Zone
Management

Configured
Instruments
Panel

Workspace

Numbering
Pattern

The Method Builder - Bed Layout Tab window

5-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

Configured Instruments Panel

Bed Layout Tab Window

This panel is used to provide information and also for navigation. Information
provided is dependent on the instrument type.
For Fraction Collectors and Liquid Handlers, the Bed Layout is listed under the
instrument type. You can navigate to the Bed Layout by clicking the Bed Layout
name.

For all other instruments, the Configured Instruments Panel on the Bed Layout tab has no function.

Configuration tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Configuration tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Control tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Control tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Analysis tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Analysis tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Zone Management
Allows you to create, modify, delete, or select zones.

For information on how to create a Bed Layout, see How to Create a Bed Layout.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 5-3

 Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

Numbering Pattern
Bed Layout Tab Window

Allows you to select how blocks of wells will be numbered.

To select a pattern for numbering the wells, do the following:

1 Click on the desired pattern.
2 Click on the starting corner desired for the pattern (the well is highlighted red).

For information on how to create a Bed Layout, see How to Create a Bed Layout.

Workspace
Forms the area to create or view a Bed Layout.

For information on how to create a Bed Layout, see How to Create a Bed Layout.

5-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

How to Create a Bed Layout

How to Create a Bed Layout

In the Method Builder, select the Bed Layout tab.

Select a Template
Do one of the following.
• To use the displayed template, continue to Add a Rack/Rinse Station/Injection Port.
• Click Templates. Then select a Bed Layout template. Click OK. The window is refreshed to display the new
template.
• Click Browse. Select an existing or imported Bed Layout and then click OK.
• In the Configured Instruments Panel, right-click the instrument and then select Create Bed Layout.
The window is refreshed to display the default template for the selected instrument.

Add a Rack/Rinse Station/Injection Port

1 On the template, select a footprint. The footprint is highlighted with a red border.
2 To add a rack/rinse station/injection port, do the following:
a) Double-click the footprint.
b) Select a rack and then click OK or double-click the rack. The window is refreshed to display the rack/
rinse station/injection port on the template.

Define a Zone
To define a Zone, do the following:
1 Click Add Zone.
2 Type a unique name, select colors, and select the starting number.
• Name: It is possible to create multiple zones, but each must have a unique name.
• Starting: The first number that will be used when numbering wells in the zone.
• Active Text Color: The color that is used for the numbers of the wells when the zone is active.
• Active Zone Color: The color used for the wells in the zone when it is active. As new zones are added, the
Active Zone Color automatically increments. The zone becomes active when it is selected from the Zone
drop-down menu. Only one zone can be active at a time. Refer to the Sample in the dialog to see the Active
Text Color on the Active Zone Color.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 5-5

 Method Builder - Bed Layout 5
• Inactive Text Color: The color that is used for the numbers of the wells when the zone is inactive.
How to Create a Bed Layout

• Inactive Zone Color: The color used for the wells in the zone when it is inactive. The zone becomes
inactive when another zone is selected from the Zone drop-down menu. Multiple zones can be inactive at
one time. The default Inactive Text Color is Black. The default Inactive Zone Color is Beige. Refer to the
Sample in the dialog to see the Inactive Text Color on the Inactive Zone Color.
3 Click OK. The zone is listed under Zone Management.

Select a Numbering Pattern

To select a pattern for numbering the wells, do the following:
1 Click on the desired pattern.
2 Click on the starting corner desired for the pattern (the well is highlighted red).

Number Wells in Zone

To add wells to a zone, do any of the following:
• Hold SHIFT and then click on individual wells to number them in the order selected.
• Lasso blocks of wells to number them according to the numbering pattern selected.
• When using multiple layer racks, hide one layer to assign zones to another. To do this, select/highlight the
element then right click and select Hide from the menu. Select Show All to unhide the elements.

Zoom
In the workspace, do the following:
• To zoom the Bed Layout, toggle the Auto Scale selection off.

• To zoom in on the Bed Layout, click once or repeatedly. The software will zoom in to the center of the cross
hairs. Move the cross hairs by scrolling the window.

• To zoom out on the Bed Layout, click once or repeatedly.

• To zoom to a specific scale factor, enter the number in the Scale Factor field.

5-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

Modify a Bed Layout

Modify a Bed Layout

You can modify a Bed Layout by doing the following:
• Add new racks, wells, or zones to the template.
• Delete racks from the workspace.
• Delete zones.
• Change the numbering pattern.
• Replace racks in the workspace.
• Add or clear wells from zones.

When you right-click on a rack or well in the workspace, a menu is provided with options to delete the rack
or clear the well from the active zone or from all zones.

You can also delete racks from the workspace by selecting the rack and then pressing the DELETE key.

Modify a Bed Layout

1 Open the Method and then click the Bed Layout tab.
2 Do any of the following:
a) Add new racks, wells, or zones to the template, see How to Create a Bed Layout.
b) Delete racks from the workspace by doing the following:
1) Click to select/highlight the rack.
2) Right-click then select Delete or press the DELETE key.
c) Delete wells from all zones or from the active zone by doing the following:
1) Select the wells.
2) Right-click and then select either Clear Selected Wells from Active Zone or Clear Selected Wells
from All Zones.
d) Clear all zones or clear the active zone by doing the following:
1) Click to select any element.
2) Right-click and then select either Clear All Zones or Clear Active Zone.
e) Delete zones by doing the following:
1) Select the zone to be deleted.
2) Click Delete or press the DELETE key.
f ) Change the colors. Double-click the zone name to modify.
g) Change the numbering pattern, see Select a Numbering Pattern.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 5-7

 Method Builder - Bed Layout 5

Delete a Bed Layout

Delete a Bed Layout

To delete a Bed Layout, do one of the following:

• Under Configured Instruments, select the Bed Layout Name and then right-click to view the submenu. On the
submenu, select Delete.
• Under Configured Instruments, select the Bed Layout Name and then press the DELETE key.
• In the Bed Layout and Utilities, click Delete Bed Layout, select the Bed Layout, and then click Delete.

Use the Purge and Recover utility to permanently delete the Bed Layout.

5-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

This section provides an overview of setting up a Method and describes the options available on the Control tab of the Method Builder.

To begin creating a Method, select Method from the Liquid Chromatography menu.

To create a Method, see How to Create a Method.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-1

 Method Builder - Control 6

Control Tab Window

Control Tab Window

The Control tab window in the Method Builder is a graphical interface used to organize the tasks used in
a Method.
Workspace Tab

Error Handling Tab

Method Builder - Control tab window

6-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

Workspace Tab

Control Tab Window

Right-click menu

Toolbar

List View

Configured Instruments Panel

Workspace

The Method Builder - Workspace Tab window

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-3

 Method Builder - Control 6

Configured Instruments Panel

Control Tab Window

This panel is used to sort Tasks that will be added to the Control. Use this tab to specify Task conditions for
controlling instruments. One default group (Auxiliary) exists for every Method.
Auxiliary tasks are not specific to any instrument.

Mobile Phase tasks are listed under Mobile Phase and then under the instrument name given to the pump

All other tasks are listed alphanumerically under the instrument name.

Configuration tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Configuration tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Bed Layout tab

For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Bed Layout tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Analysis tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Analysis tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

List View
Displays and describes Control Tasks using text and minimal graphics.

6-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

Right-click menu

Control Tab Window

Right-click on a Task icon to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Delete Deletes the Task from the Method Control.

Open Opens the Task in the Task Builder.

Property Allows you to change the time of the Task or the values for the properties.

Expand All Expands the view to display all properties and values.

Workspace
Shows a graphic representation of timed events and Mobile Phase concentration information.
For information on how to create a Method, see How to Create a Method.

Toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Control window. To activate a tool, just click on its
icon.

Displays a dialog listing default variables and all variables used in the Method. Current value for
each variable is displayed. Right-clicking in this dialog also allows you to Modify or Delete Method
Variable tool
variables. Click the up and down arrows to reorder the variables. They will display this way in the
Sample List.

Identifies the zone specified in the injection task so that the software knows where fractions for
Set Sample Variable tool
re-injection are located.

Zoom In tool Makes the viewable time scale shorter.

Zoom Out tool Makes the viewable time scale longer.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-5

Control Tab Window Method Builder - Control 6

After selecting a chromatogram from a previous run to overlay the Method Control and after any
Update Chromatogram tool fraction collection conditions have been modified, click this tool to update the overlay with the
fraction collection start and stop lines.

Displays the Application Run Results dialog. Select a chromatogram from a previous run to
Application Run Results tool
overlay the Method Control.

List View Print tool Prints the Control Tasks displayed in the List View.

Hide List View tool Hides the List View.

Show List View tool Shows the List View.

Left tool Scrolls the X-axis to the left.

Right tool Scrolls the X-axis to the right.

Help tool Displays the on-line help information.

Reverses the last action when the last action was to add or delete a task, modify the task time
Undo tool
graphically, or modify a gradient task graphically.

Redo tool Repeats the last action prior to an undo.

Right-click menu

Task
Right-click on a Task icon in the Method Builder - Control to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Property Allows you to change the time of the Task or the values for the properties.

6-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

Control Tab Window

Menu Description

Delete Deletes the Task from the Method Control.

Open Opens the Task in the Task Builder.

Grid
Right-click on the grid in the Method Builder - Control to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Color: Back Allows you to change the color of the background of the grid.

Color: Front Allows you to change the color of the vertical lines on the grid.

Grid Toggles hide or show the vertical lines on the grid.

Gradient
Right-click on a gradient in the Method Builder - Control to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Property Allows you to change flow rate, time, and percent composition of the gradient.

Delete Deletes the gradient from the Method Control.

Add new Gradient Allows you to add a new gradient.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-7

 Method Builder - Control 6

Error Handling Tab

Control Tab Window

TRILUTION LC can automatically respond to the occurrence of defined errors during a run. To make this
happen, set up Methods that tell the software what to do if it encounters one of those errors. The
error handling Method should not include an error handling Method.

The Method Builder - Control - Error Handling Tab window

6-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6
There are four possible user-defined responses for when a defined error occurs during a run. A description

Control Tab Window

of those responses follows:
• An error handling Method is identified and Resume Run is checked.
• No error handling Method is identified and Resume Run is checked.
• An error handling Method is identified and Resume Run is not checked.
• No error handling Method is identified and Resume Run is not checked.

A notification is displayed to indicate than an error has been encountered. See Notification in Chapter1.

Set up instrument error handling

1 Select the instrument to monitor from the drop-down list of instruments in the Configuration.

To monitor pressure when using a 331/332 or 333/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pump combination, select only the
331 or 333.

2 Optionally, select an error method to run when this error is encountered.

3 Select the parameter from the drop-down list of possible parameters for the instrument selected.
4 Select a valid mathematical operator (all are listed, though some would not make sense).
5 Type the value to monitor in the field to the right of the mathematical operator.
6 Optionally, select the Resume Run check box.
7 Click New.
8 Repeat all steps for additional instruments or set up additional parameters for the same instrument.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-9

 Method Builder - Control 6

Error Responses and Parameter Descriptions

Control Tab Window

The following table describes all responses post error for all errors except Pressure. For Pressure error
responses, see Pressure Error Responses.
Error Responses

Error Handling Method Identified? Resume Run? Response

• Error Method Execution notification appears*

• Control Method terminates
Yes Yes • Error handling Method executes
• Run resumes starting with the next step in the Sample List
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

• Error Method Execution notification appears*

No Yes • Run continues
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

• Error Method Execution notification appears*

• Control Method terminates
Yes No • Error handling Method executes
• Application Run terminates
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

• Error Method Execution notification appears*

No No • Application Run terminates
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

Error Responses

* Notification only appears if specified.

Bed Location Error

This error results when a zone or well referenced in a Task or Sample List does not exist in the Bed Layout.

Instrument Error
This error results when any scheduled command fails to execute or if the software loses communication
with an instrument. For Mobile Phase pumps, the error will only result if the software loses communication
with the pump. Refer to the table Error Responses that describes all possible responses post error.

6-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

No Fraction Sites

Control Tab Window

This error results when no fraction wells are available or when not enough wells are available based on the
minimum fraction sites criteria set in the Sample List. Refer to the table Error Responses that describes all
possible responses post error.

No Fractions Collected
This error results when no fractions are collected for a sample. This only applies if the Method contains
tasks to establish fraction collection parameters. Refer to the table Error Responses that describes all
possible responses post error.

Wait Time
This error results when an input contact does not occur within the length of time set on this screen. If the
wait time is set to zero (0), the system waits indefinitely for the input contact. The valid mathematical
operator is greater than or equal to. Refer to the table Error Responses that describes all possible
responses post-error.

Contact Error
This error results when an error input contact is activated. The valid mathematical operator is == and the
valid values are TRUE or FALSE where TRUE=CLOSE and FALSE=OPEN. Refer to the table Error Responses
that describes all possible responses post-error.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-11

 Method Builder - Control 6

Pressure
Control Tab Window

This error results when the system pressure exceeds or is equal to or is lower than the value set on this
screen. Refer to the table Pressure Error Responses that describes all possible responses post-error.
Pressure Error Responses

Error Handling Method Identified? Resume Run? Response

• Pumps stop
• Control Method terminates
• Error handling method executes
Yes Yes • Error Method Execution notification appears*
• Application Run resumes starting with the next sample in the
Sample List
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

• Pumps stop
• Error Method Execution notification appears*
No Yes • Application Run resumes starting with the next sample in the
Sample List
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

• Pumps stop
• Control Method terminates
Yes No • Error handling method executes
• Error Method Execution notification appears*
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

• Pumps stop
• Error Method Execution notification appears*
No No
• Run terminates
• Run Complete notification appears (with errors, see log for details)*

Pressure Error Responses

* Notification only appears if specified.

6-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

Modify instrument error handling

Control Tab Window

You can modify instrument error handling by doing the following:
• Setting up error handling for additional instruments in the Configuration.
• Setting up error handling with additional criteria for the same instrument.
• Deleting instruments and/or parameters from the monitored list of criteria.
• Modifying the instruments and/or parameters in the monitored list of criteria.

When you right-click on a row in the table of monitored criteria, a menu is displayed with the option to
delete the criteria.
To make a modification, select the row, make the desired changes, and then click Modify.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-13

 Method Builder - Control 6

How to Create a Method

How to Create a Method

The following provides an overview of the steps to create a Method.

1 Create a Configuration. For more information, see How to Create a Configuration.
2 Create a Bed Layout. For more information, see How to Create a Bed Layout.
3 Add a Mobile Phase task. For more information, see How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions.
4 Add a fraction collection task and set the fraction collection parameters. For more information, see Fraction
Collection Settings or Conditional Fraction Collection.
5 Add a task to autozero the detector. For more information, see Detector Autozero Channel or 506C Autozero
Channel.
6 Add an injection task and set the injection task parameters. For more information, see Appendix A, List of Tasks.
7 Add a synchronize to sync 1 in the injection task. For more information, see Sync.
8 Add the Start Data Collection task. For more information, see Start Data Collection.
9 Add a synchronize to the end of the injection task. For more information, see Sync.
10 Add the Start Fraction Collection task. For more information, see Start Fraction Collection.
11 Add the Stop Fraction Collection task. For more information, see Stop Fraction Collection.
12 Add the Stop Data Collection task. For more information, see Stop Data Collection.

6-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

Schedule Timed Tasks

Schedule Timed Tasks

Each command issued in the Method Control is referred to as Task. You can specify Tasks that set the
gradient profile, start and stop data collection, control the injector, or send or wait for a contact signal.

By dragging Tasks into the Control, you tell the software when to issue commands to Gilson instruments.

Within the properties box, there is a Time box for indicating the time point at which to start the Task.

When placing multiple Tasks for one instrument, allow enough time for the instrument to perform one
Task before issuing another Task. As a suggestion, separate the Tasks by a minimum of 0.1 min.

Delete Task from Control

To remove a Task from the Control, select the task and then do one of the following:
• Right-click and then select Delete.
• Press the DELETE key.

Modify Task Time and/or Properties

To change Task time or properties, do one of the following:
• Double-click the task icon.
• Right-click the Task icon and then select Property.

Modify Task
To modify the Task:
1 Right-click the Task.
2 Select Open. The Task will open in the Task Builder.

Gilson-supplied tasks cannot be saved using the supplied name.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-15

 Method Builder - Control 6

How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions

How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions

A basic gradient task and several gradient profiles are provided. Modify them to fit the Application.
Mobile Phase templates default to 10 minutes. For a detailed description of the supplied gradient tasks
and profiles, see Appendix A, List of Tasks.

For an example of how to graphically adjust the time and composition, view the Quick Start Tutorial,
supplied with TRILUTION LC.

Note: Unlike other Tasks, gradient tasks cannot be opened in the Task Builder.

Keywords:
• Node: The starting and ending point of a Mobile Phase event.
• Mobile Phase Event: A line between two nodes characterized by time, flow rate, and pump percent
composition.
• Gradient: One or many Mobile Phase events.

Add a Mobile Phase Event

To add a Mobile Phase event to an existing template in the workspace, do the following:
1 Right-click on any horizontal Mobile Phase event on the gradient in the Control workspace and then, from the
submenu, select Add new Gradient.
2 In the Gradient Properties dialog, type a flow rate, the start and end times for the new Mobile Phase event, and
the percent composition for the pumps.
3 Click OK. The Mobile Phase event is added.

6-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

Modify a Mobile Phase Event

How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions

To modify a Mobile Phase event, change the start or end time, the flow rate, or the percent composition
for the pumps.

Modify the Mobile Phase event start or end time

To modify the start time for a Mobile Phase event, do one of the following:
• Move the mouse cursor over the node until the cursor changes to a double arrow ( ). and then click and drag
the node to the desired time. The time is displayed dynamically above the workspace.
• Double-click on the horizontal Mobile Phase event on the gradient in the Control workspace and then in the
Gradient Properties dialog, type the start and/or end time and then click OK.

Modify the flow rate

To modify the flow rate, do the following:
1 Right-click on the horizontal Mobile Phase event on the gradient in the Control workspace and then, from the
submenu, select Property.
Or, double-click on the horizontal Mobile Phase event on the gradient in the Control workspace.
2 In the Gradient Properties dialog, type the new flow rate and then click OK.

Modify the percent composition

To modify the percent composition for the pumps, do one of the following:
• Modify the percent composition using dialog boxes.
a) Right-click on the horizontal Mobile Phase event on the gradient in the Control workspace.
b) From the submenu, select Property.
c) In the Gradient Properties dialog, type the new percent composition for the pumps.
d) Click OK.
• Modify the percent composition graphically.
a) Move the cursor over the horizontal Mobile Phase event in the Control workspace until the cursor changes
to a crosshair ( ).
b) Click and drag the event to the desired composition for the Organic pump (as indicated in the
Configuration). The composition is displayed dynamically above the workspace.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-17

 Method Builder - Control 6

Delete a Mobile Phase Event

How to Create Gradient or Isocratic Conditions

To delete a Mobile Phase event, do the following:

1 Right-click on any horizontal Mobile Phase event on the gradient in the Control workspace.
2 From the submenu, select Delete.

6-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Control 6

How to Create and Use Control Variables

How to Create and Use Control Variables

To make your Method more flexible, you can indicate a variable name instead of entering a value for a
property in a Task. A variable name begins with # and can be any combination of letters and numbers and
can contain some special characters. Valid variable names would be #Wavelength and #Sample_Vol1.

When setting a Sample List for a run, assign values to any undefined variables used by the Method. If the
run is started and a value has not been assigned to a variable or if the value is not within the specified
range, the following message will be displayed:

To see what variable names have been set for the Method and to indicate a default and acceptable range
for each variable, do the following:
1 In the Method Control window, click the Variable tool ( ).
2 When the Variable List appears, select the variable and then do any of the following:
• To set a default value for the variable:
1) Click Modify or double-click or right-click and then select Modify.
2) Type a value in the Default Value box.
• To set an acceptable range for the variable:
1) Click Modify or double-click or right-click and then select Modify.
2) Type a value in the Min Value and Max Value boxes.
• To remove an unused variable name, select the variable then press the DELETE key, click Delete, or
right-click and then select Delete.

3 Click the up ( ) or down ( ) arrow to reorganize the variables. Variables listed up to down in the Method
Variables dialog will appear left to right in the Sample List.
4 Click OK when finished.

For more information about variables, see Chapter 13, Working with Variables.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 6-19

 Method Builder - Control 6

How to Simulate Fraction Collection by Slope or Level

How to Simulate Fraction Collection by Slope or Level

Optimize fraction collection settings using the Fraction Collection Simulator as follows:
1 Create a Method that includes fraction collection by slope or level. For more information, see How to Create a
Method.
2 Browse in a representative example chromatogram from a previous run’s results.
a) Click the Application Run Results tool ( ).
b) From the drop-down menu, select the Application that was run to obtain the results that will be overlaid.
c) Double-click the Run Name/Method/Channel. The Select Injection dialog appears.
d) On the Select Injection dialog, do one of the following:
1) Double-click the injection number.
2) Click to select the injection number and then click OK.
3) Click to cancel.
The chromatogram overlays the Method control beginning at time 0 (NOT at Start Data Collection).
3 Click the Update Chromatogram tool ( ). The fraction start and fraction end lines overlay the chromatogram
showing the current fraction collection settings in effect.
If variables were used for any of the fraction collection parameters, modify the Default Value for the variable in
the Variable dialog. If the Default Value is not modified, 0 (the default Default Value) will be used in the
simulation. For more information about creating variables, see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 Optionally, modify the fraction collection parameters.
5 Click the Update Chromatogram tool ( ). The fraction collection parameters modifications update the
fraction start and fraction end lines.

6-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

This section describes how to set conditions for analyzing peaks in collected data. Each analysis indicates how collected data is analyzed during a run or
re-analysis processing. Analysis includes setting peak parameters, naming peaks, and identifying the reports to generate.

Using the options in the Method Builder - Analysis window, you indicate how collected data is analyzed and reported. Whether the data is analyzed at run
time or afterwards, TRILUTION LC uses the information in the analysis to report on peaks detected in samples.
To create an Analysis, see How to Create an Analysis.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-1

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Analysis Tab Window

Analysis Tab Window

The Analysis tab window in the Method Builder is a graphical interface used to organize the analysis tasks
used in a Method.
Peak Integration Tab

Report Tab Error Handling Tab

Method Builder - Analysis tab window

7-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Peak Integration Tab

Analysis Tab Window

The Peak Integration tab in the Analysis window provides for setting analysis conditions.
• Integration Tasks set integration parameters for distinguishing peaks from baseline interference and sets
alternate baseline techniques.
• Background Removal indicates if a blank chromatogram is subtracted from data analyzed by the method.
• Peak Table allows for entering a peak name and retention time to label peaks on the chromatogram. Also allows
for the option to select Peak fill colors and to label peaks as a reference or internal standard.
• Error Handling tells the software what types of checks to do on the calculated peak amounts and how the
software responds if it detects an error. See Set Up Analysis Error Handling.

Right-click menu

Configured Instruments Panel Toolbar

Workspace

List View tab

Background Removal
Custom Calculation

Peak Purity
Peak Table Spectral Library

Void Volume Retention Time

Calibration

The Method Builder - Analysis - Peak Integration tab window

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-3

Analysis Tab Window Method Builder - Analysis 7

Configured Instruments Panel

This panel is used to provide information and also for navigation. Information
provided is dependent on the instrument type.

Instrument
Information Provided
Type

Lists data channels and any associated analyses. Can navigate to the Analysis tab by
Detector
clicking on an analysis name.

Fraction
Lists Bed Layout. Can navigate to the Bed Layout tab by clicking the Bed Layout name.
Collector

Injector Clicking an injector name from this tab does nothing.

Liquid Handler Lists Bed Layout. Can navigate to the Bed Layout tab by clicking the Bed Layout name.

Mobile Phase Clicking a Mobile Phase pump name from this tab does nothing.

Switching Valve Clicking a switching valve instrument name from this tab does nothing.

Lists data channels and any associated analyses. Can navigate to an Analysis by clicking
Communication
on its name.

Syringe Pump Clicking a syringe pump name from this tab does nothing.

Configuration tab
For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Configuration tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Bed Layout tab

For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Bed Layout tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

7-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Control tab

Analysis Tab Window

For a description of the Configured Instruments Panel as it relates to the Control tab, see
Configured Instruments Panel.

Workspace
Shows a graphic representation of timed tasks and peak retention time windows

Toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Analysis window.

To activate the following tools, just click on its icon:

After making changes to the Peak Table, click the Update Chromatogram icon and the changes are
reflected in the graph.
Update Chromatogram
To remove the peak windows from the graph, right-click on the graph and then select
Delete Peak window.

To overlay results from a previous run, click the Application Run Results tool. This displays the
Application Run Results
Application Run Results dialog in which you can select the results from a previous run.

Zoom In tool Makes the viewable time scale shorter.

Zoom Out tool Makes the viewable time scale longer.

Left tool Scrolls the X-axis to the left.

Right tool Scrolls the X-axis to the right.

Help tool Displays the on-line help information.

Reverses the last action when the last action was to add or delete a task or modify the task time
Undo tool
graphically.

Redo tool Repeats the last action prior to an undo.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-5

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Right-click menu
Analysis Tab Window

Task
Right-click on a Task icon to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Delete Deletes the Task from the Analysis.

Property Allows you to change the time of the Task or the values for the properties.

Grid
Right-click on the grid to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Color: Back Allows you to change the color of the background of the grid.

Color: Front Allows you to change the color of the vertical lines on the grid.

Grid Toggles hide or show the vertical lines on the grid.

7-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

List View tab

Analysis Tab Window

Displays and describes Analysis Tasks using text and minimal graphics.

Right-click menu
Right-click on a Task icon to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Delete Deletes the Task from the Analysis.

Property Allows you to change the time of the Task or the values for the properties.

Expand All Expands the view to display all properties and values.

Peak Table
The Peak Table is where you tell the software about the peaks in data analyzed by the Analysis. If you name
peaks in the peak table, your reports refer directly to those peaks when reporting areas, heights, amounts,
and so on.

Right-click on a row to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Add Allows you to insert additional rows in the table to add more peaks.

Delete Allows you to delete the information for a peak by deleting the row in the table.

Group Allows you to create peak groupings. For more information, see Group.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-7

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Retention Time
Analysis Tab Window

Retention time is the retention time for the peak, defined by the APEX of the peak. The limit of resolution
is hundredths of a minute (0.01 min).

Peak retention time is based on start of data collection indicated in the Control executed at the same time
as the Analysis. If the beginning of data collection and injection are not synchronous, retention times
reported deviate from actual retention times by their difference.

For more information, see How to Define Retention Time Windows.

Name
In the Peak Table, you indicate peak names and their retention times. You get retention time information
by injecting and acquiring traces for test samples.

Identify each peak for the component it represents.

Note: Reports are limited to displaying 20 characters for the peak name.

Reference Peak (optional)

The software uses reference peaks to correct for retention time shifts that can occur during runs that
analyze multiple samples. When the software notices a difference between a reference peak’s expected
and actual retention times, it adjusts the retention times of the preceding non-reference peaks in its
internal peak table.

You can designate an unlimited number of reference peaks in both calibration and unknown samples. An
ideal reference peak is a large isolated peak with a consistent retention time. You can designate several
reference peaks with retention times at the beginning, middle, and end of the run. If you designate just
one reference peak, it should be a late-eluting peak.

7-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Group

Analysis Tab Window

When you right-click on a row in the Peak Table and then select Group, options for grouping peaks appear
in the Peak Group dialog. TRILUTION LC reports total area for all peaks selected in addition to the area of
each individual peak.

Set up group names

To indicate group names:
1 In the Peak Group dialog, type a name in the Group field.
2 Click Insert. The group name is added to the list.
3 Select the group name from the list.
4 Click Group.

Group peaks
1 Select the row in the Peak Table.
2 Right-click and then select Group.
3 Select the group name from the list.
4 Click Group.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to assign other peaks to groups.
6 To remove a peak from a group, choose its name in the list and click Ungroup.

Delete group names

To delete group names:
1 Right-click the group name.
2 Select Delete.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-9

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

IntStd (Internal Standard)

Analysis Tab Window

When you select the IntStd check box, you indicate that the peak is an internal standard. Indicate the time
frame during which to use the standard.

Start Time
Start Time is the time at which to begin using the internal standard.

End Time
End Time is the time at which to stop using the internal standard. It must be later than the Start Time.

Color
Double-click to select from available color fills for the peak. The default is no fill.

Absolute Error and Relative Error

These are the retention time window parameters. To compensate for possible retention time drift, the
software defines a window around the retention time for each peak. If a peak elutes at any time during
that window, the software identifies it.

Absolute error is a constant amount of time on either side of a peak’s nominal retention time. The software
automatically searches for eluted peaks at every named retention time plus or minus this amount of time.

Relative error is a percentage of peak retention time. Relative error, and, therefore, the width of
retention time windows, increases with increasing retention time. Because late-eluting peaks are often
broader than early peaks, the software uses this correction factor to improve the likelihood of locating
late-eluting peaks.

The software uses the following formulas to calculate the beginning and end of any peak’s time window.
Each peak’s time window appears in the graph pane.

Beginning: Ret. Time - [Abs. Error + (Ret. Time x Rel. Error)]

End: Ret. Time + (Abs. Error + Ret. Time x Rel. Error)

7-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Background Removal

Analysis Tab Window

When you select the Background Removal check box and you set the Sample Type in the Sample List as
BLANK, you indicate that its data will be subtracted from sample data during the run during re-analysis
processing.
Clearing the Background Removal check box indicates that you do not want the software to perform
background subtraction.

For more information about sample types, see Sample Type.

Calibration
Select the Calibration check box to tell the software that you will be running a Calibration. To tell the
software how to construct the calibration curve, click Calibration. The Calculation dialog appears.

When analyzing a sample, the software determines the peak area (or height) for each named component.
For each peak, the software generates a calibration curve to determine the amount of that component in
each unknown sample.

A component’s calibration curve plots the average peak area (or height) versus the amount injected.

For more information about calibrations, see Chapter 12, Calibrations.

Type

Area
Tells the software to generate the curve based on the area of each standard peak.

Height
Tells the software to generate the curve based on the height of each standard peak.

External Calibration
Tells the software to generate the curve based on a previous calibration run. When this type is selected, the
Browse button becomes active to load an external calibration.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-11

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
Internal Standard
Analysis Tab Window

Tells the software that an internal standard will be used. You must then select whether to quantify the
standard peaks by area or height when generating the curve.

Curve Fit

Cubic
The software generates a smooth curve that best represents the set of means. The curve may have two
bends.

To determine the amount of that component in an unknown sample, the software determines where that
component’s peak area intersects the calibration curve.

Linear
Using a best-fit method, the software constructs a line that best represents the set of means. This method
minimizes the sum of the squares of the error distance between each mean and the line.

Linear through Zero

Using a best-fit method, the software constructs a line that best represents the set of means and includes
the origin (0 area, 0 height) as a point.

Point to Point
The software connects the mean amount for each standard using a linear segment. For a single-standard
calibration plot, the software generates a linear segment between the origin (0 area or 0 height, 0 amount)
and mean peak area at the amount.

Quadratic
The software generates a smooth curve that best represents the set of means. The curve may have one
bend.

Void Volume Retention Time

This is the retention time of unretained effluent. This value is used to calculate Capacity (k').

7-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Peak Purity

Analysis Tab Window

Peak Purity is a spectral comparison of the apex spectrum to spectra from across the peak. This
comparison is used to check the purity of the peak. The spectra that are compared depend on the Number
of Sampled Spectra selected. To set peak purity options, click Peak Purity.

Number of Sampled Spectra

Identifies the number of spectra to be evaluated and used in the peak purity algorithm for each integrated
peak. Select 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, or All. TRILUTION LC selects spectra between the peak’s apex and peak height
threshold. Refer to the following diagrams for more information.

Number of Sampled Spectra = 7

Number of Sampled Spectra = 1 The apex spectrum is compared
The apex spectrum is compared with equally spaced spectra
with the spectrum at the median. between the median and the
threshold intersections.

Number of Sampled Spectra = 9

Number of Sampled Spectra = 3 The apex spectrum is compared
The apex spectrum is compared with equally spaced spectra
with spectra at the median and the between the median and the
two peak threshold intersections. threshold intersections.

Number of Sampled Spectra = 5

The apex spectrum is compared Number of Sampled Spectra = All
with spectra at the median, the The apex spectrum is compared with all spectra between the threshold intersections.
threshold intersections, and the
mid-points between the median
and threshold intersections.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-13

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Wavelength Range: Minimum and Maximum (nm)

Analysis Tab Window

Identify the lowest and highest wavelength to use when calculating peak purity. You should limit the
wavelength range to the area of absorption for your compounds of interest. TRILUTION LC’s peak purity
algorithm may give misleadingly high results if wavelengths outside the UV/VIS absorption range for the
compounds are included. The default range is 190–350 nm. The valid range is dependent on the detector.

Peak Height Threshold (%)

Specifies the percentage above the baseline at which spectra for the peak will be extracted. The selection
of spectra is based on the peak height threshold and the number of sampled spectra.

Purity Threshold
If TRILUTION LC calculates a peak purity that is below this value, the peak is color filled red on the Peak Purity
Display graph. If the calculated peak purity is above this value, the peak is color filled green on the Peak
Purity Display graph. For more information about the Peak Purity Display graph, see Peak Purity Tab.

7-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Spectral Library

Analysis Tab Window

In TRILUTION LC you can assemble reference databases of spectral peaks of known compounds. You can
then search and match the database’s contents to the chromatogram for an unknown sample and report
the outcome.

To perform spectral matching at run time, do the following:

1 Click Spectral Library. The Search Spectral Library dialog appears.
2 In the Search Spectral Library dialog, do the following:
a) Select the check box next to the Library Name for each library to be searched.

To select all libraries, click .

To clear all selected libraries, click .
To invert the selection of libraries, click .

b) For each peak spectrum to match, do one of the following:

• Select the check box next to the Peak Name and under All Peaks to search all spectral library peaks.
• Select the check box next to the Peak Name and under Time Period and then enter Start and End
times to limit the search to spectral library peaks whose retention times are within that time period.
c) In the Match Threshold field, indicate the smallest match value to be reported. A match value of 1000
indicates a perfect match.
3 Click OK.

Custom Calculation
Custom Calculation allows you to type a formula that the software will use to generate the amount that
appears in a column in the table in the report. You specify a name for this expression and then add it to the
column contents for the report in any method.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-15

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
The Custom Calculation dialog lists quantities and mathematical operators that can be used in your
Analysis Tab Window

calculation. The following table provides a description of each calculable quantity.

Calculable
Description
Quantity

Amount Returns the peak amount

AMOUNT_% Returns the peak’s amount as a percentage of the total amount calculated for all named peaks in the sample

Area Returns the peak area

Area % Returns the peak’s area as a percentage of the total area of all integrated peaks in the sample

ASYMMETRY Returns the peak’s asymmetry, a value that identifies the shape of the peak

BACK_RESOLUTION Returns the resolution of a peak in relation to the next peak

BACK_SLOPE Returns the slope at half height of the peak's descending edge

CAPACITY Returns the capacity factor (k'), which measures the degree of retention

END_TIME Returns the time point at which integration stopped for the peak

END_VALUE Returns the returns the height at which integration stopped for the peak

FRONT_RESOLUTIO
Returns the resolution of the peak in relation to the previous peak
N

FRONT_SLOPE Returns the slope at half height of the peak's ascending edge

Height Returns the distance from the baseline to the maximum of the peak.

HEIGHT_% Returns a peak’s height as a percentage of the total height of all integrated peaks in the sample

7-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Analysis Tab Window

Calculable
Description
Quantity

INJ_NUMBER Returns the number of the injection that corresponds to the peak.

%_CONC Returns the peak’s percent concentration (as related to the total sample amount) of each reported peak

PLATE_NUMBER Returns the plate number, a value that indicates column efficiency

PURITY Returns the peak purity.

RETENTION_TIME Returns the elapsed time between the point of injection and maximum of the peak

START_TIME Returns the time point at which integration began for the peak

START_VALUE Returns the height at which integration began for the peak

TAILING_FACTOR Returns the tailing factor

WIDTH Returns the peak width

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-17

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Report Tab
Analysis Tab Window

The report tab provides options for setting reporting conditions and report formats for the
Analysis (see Analysis Report Elements), Calibration (see Calibration Report Elements), and Summary
Reports.
Data Channel Settings Company Logo & Address

Report Template
Include All
Analysis Report Elements

Report Column Format

Calibration Report Elements

Auto Action

The Method Builder - Analysis - Report Tab window

Report Template
Select from two different templates.

Select Template 1 to display one chromatogram per page.

Select Template 2 to display more than one chromatogram per page.

7-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Include All

Analysis Tab Window

Select this check box and the software reports information about every peak that meets its integration
requirements. Clear the check box (and set the appropriate parameters, described following) to get
information only about the peaks of interest.

Unnamed Peaks
If you want the software to report information about every peak that meets its integration requirements,
select this check box (and set the appropriate parameters, described following). If you only want
information on peaks named in the peak table, clear this check box.

If the software integrates peaks that have not been named in the peak table, it assigns the peak a name
based on the order in which it eluted. For example, the peak table named two peaks, Phenol and
Benzaldehyde. However, during the run, the software detects a peak between those two peaks. The
unnamed peak would be labeled “PN: 1”.

Minimum Area
You can specify a minimum valid peak area to exclude insignificant peaks from reports. Unnamed peaks
with area smaller than the specified value are not reported.

Maximum Area
You can specify a maximum valid peak area. Unnamed peaks with area greater than the specified value are
not reported.

Minimum Height
You can specify a minimum valid peak height to exclude insignificant peaks from reports. Unnamed peaks
with height smaller than the specified value are not reported.

Maximum Height
You can specify a maximum valid peak height. Unnamed peaks with height greater than the specified
value are not reported.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-19

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Report Column Format

Analysis Tab Window

Report Type
Four report types can be modified. A description of the types follows.

Sample: This table is optionally included in the Analysis Report.

Sample Summary: This table is included in the Unknown Summary Report.

Calibrator: This option is only available if the method has been specified as a Calibration method. This
table is optionally included in the Calibration Report.

Calibration Summary: This option is only available if the method has been specified as a Calibration
method. This table is included in the Standard Summary Report.

Report column format review and modification

If you want to vary the default format for reports, you can add or remove column information.

Checking columns
To view what is printed for each report, on the Method Analysis Report tab, select the report type from the
drop-down list.

Report contents
To set report contents:
1 Select a Report Type from the drop-down list.
2 Select the information type to be added to the report from the Contents list.

3 Click the right arrow ( ) to add the information to Column Contents and to the report.

4 Click the up ( ) or down ( ) arrow to reorganize the columns. Columns listed up to down in the Column
Contents will appear left to right in the report.

7-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
% Concentration

Analysis Tab Window

% Deviation
Calculated for samples marked CONTROL only.

((Nominal Amount – Unknown Amount)*100)/Nominal Amount

Amount
The actual amount entered in the Sample List for a standard or the calculated amount for an unknown.

Amount %
Percentage of the peak in relation to the total amount of all named peaks.

Area
Area of the integrated peak.

Area %

Back Resolution
Resolution of a peak in relation to the next peak.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-21

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
Back Slope
Analysis Tab Window

Slope at half height of peak’s descending edge.

Capacity (k')
Measures the degree of retention.

Covariance

End Value
The mV at the end of the peak.

Fraction Area
The sum of the sub-fraction areas.

7-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
Fraction End Time

Analysis Tab Window

Elapsed time between the point of injection and the end of a fraction that occurs within 5 seconds of the
end of the peak.

Fraction Site(s)
The location to which fractions for the peak are collected. Reported as Zone, Well Number(s).

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-23

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
Fraction Start Time
Analysis Tab Window

Elapsed time between the point of injection and the start of a fraction that occurs within 5 seconds of the
start of the peak.

Front Resolution
Resolution of a peak in relation to the previous peak.

Front Slope
Slope at half height of peak’s ascending edge.

7-24 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
Height

Analysis Tab Window

Distance from the baseline to the maximum of the peak.

Height %

Injection Number
The number of the injection that corresponds to the peak.

Mean Area

where x is a measurement (area or height) and n is the number of measurements.

Nominal Amount
The nominal amount entered in the Sample List.

Number Average
The total number of injections.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-25

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
Peak Asymmetry
Analysis Tab Window

Factor that identifies the shape of the peak. If this value is 1, the peak is symmetric. If the peak is skewed
to the right (tailing peak), this value is greater than 1. If the peak is skewed to the left (fronting peak), this
value is less than 1.

Peak End Time

Elapsed time between the point of injection and the end of the peak.

Peak Name
Name assigned to the peak in the peak table.

Peak Start Time

Elapsed time between the point of injection and the start of the peak.

Peak Purity
Peak Purity is a spectral comparison of the apex spectrum to spectra from across the peak. This
comparison is used to check the purity of the peak. The spectra that are compared depend on the Number
of Sampled Spectra selected. To set peak purity options, click Peak Purity.

7-26 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
Peak Width 1/2 HT

Analysis Tab Window

Peak Width at Half Height =
Time at Half Height of Descending Edge - Time at Half Height of Ascending Edge

Peak Width 10%

Peak Width at 10% =
Time at 10% Height of Descending Edge - Time at 10% Height of Ascending Edge

Plate Number
This value can be used to determine column efficiency.

Retention Time
Elapsed time between the point of injection and the maximum of the peak.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-27

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
Sample Description
Analysis Tab Window

The sample description assigned in the Sample List.

Sample Location
The location of the original sample. Reported as Zone, Well Number.

Sample Name
The sample name assigned in the Sample List.

Spectral Match 1
The best spectral match according to spectral search criteria defined in the Method Builder - Analysis.

Spectral Match 2
The second best spectral match according to spectral search criteria defined in the Method
Builder - Analysis.

Spectral Match 3
The third best spectral match according to spectral search criteria defined in the Method
Builder - Analysis.

Standard Deviation
Square Root (Number of Observation * Summation(square(value)) – Square(Summation(value)) /
(Number of Observations * (Number of Observations – 1)))

Start Value
The mV at the start of the peak.

Sub Fraction Area

The area of each sub fraction of a peak. When added together, the sum is the fraction area.

7-28 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
Tailing Factor

Analysis Tab Window

Changing the position of a column
To move a column:
1 Select the column in the Column Contents list box.

2 Click on the up ( ) and down ( ) arrows to change the position of the column in the report. The top
column will be the left-most column in the report.

Analysis Report Elements

A report can contain any or all of the following:
• Annotation
• Graph
• Sample Table
• Spectrum
• Run Variables
• Grouped Peaks

Select the check box for each element to include.

Annotation
You can choose which parts of the report’s annotation will be viewed and printed. To make your
selections:
1 On the Method Builder Analysis Report tab, click Annotation Contents... .
2 When the Annotation Contents dialog appears, use the check boxes to turn off or on parts of the annotation.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-29

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Graph
Analysis Tab Window

You can choose how peaks are labeled in the report’s graph and the run results.
1 On the Method Builder Analysis Report tab, click Graph Settings... .
2 When the Peak Information and Graph Settings dialog appears, use the check boxes to turn off or on labels on
the graph.
3 Specify the size of the chromatogram (Graph Size) as a percentage of the page. The graph is printed on a
different page than the annotation, if necessary.
4 Optionally, add the grid line to the graph (select the check box) and change the grid color.

Sample Table
The columns in the table are chosen in the Report Column Format when Sample is specified as the Report
Type. The default columns are Injection Number, Peak Name, Retention Time, Area, Height, Sample Name,
Sample Location, and Fraction Site(s). See Report column format review and modification.

Spectrum
You can choose whether spectral views will be displayed and how they will be displayed in the Analysis
Report.
1 On the Method Builder Analysis Report tab, click Spectrum Settings... .
2 When the Spectrum Settings dialog appears, use the check boxes to select which spectral views to display in the
Analysis Report.
3 Specify the minimum and maximum wavelengths to display, color scheme (3D and Iso-electric plots only), and
elevation angle and rotation (3D plot only).
4 Specify the size of the spectrum as a percentage of the page.

Run Variables
If this check box is selected, variables shown in the sample list will be reported with the values used to
satisfy those variables.

Grouped
If this check box is selected, the sum total area for all grouped peaks will be calculated and displayed in the
report.

7-30 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Auto Action

Analysis Tab Window

Auto Print
Select this check box to automatically print an Analysis Report after each sample completes. If a Method
uses multiple data channels with multiple analyses, Auto Print is only available for the Default Analysis for
each data channel.

Auto Export
Select this check box to automatically export an Analysis Report at the end of the run. The software
automatically names the exported file. The file is named
RUN NAME_METHOD NAME_DATA CHANNEL NAME_ANALYSIS NAME. The file type (and therefore file
extension) is dependent on the Format specified.

Format
Select a format from the drop-down list for the auto-exported file.

Calibration Report Elements

A Calibration Report can contain any or all of the following:
• Annotation
• Graph
• Sample Table
• Run Variables
• Plot
• Plot Table

Select the check box for each element to include. The check boxes for the Plot and Plot Table are found in
the Calibration Contents dialog.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-31

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Annotation
Analysis Tab Window

You can choose which parts of the Calibration Report’s annotation will be viewed and printed. To make
your selections:
1 On the Method Builder Analysis Report tab, click Annotation Contents....
2 When the Annotation Contents dialog appears, use the check boxes to turn off or on parts of the annotation.

Graph
You can choose how peaks are labeled in the report’s chromatograms and run results.
1 On the Method Builder Analysis Report tab, click Graph Settings... .
2 When the Peak Information and Graph Settings dialog appears, use the check boxes to turn off or on labels on
the chromatograms.
3 Specify the size of the chromatogram (Graph Size) as a percentage of the page.
4 Optionally, add the grid line to the chromatograms (select the check box) and change the grid color.

Sample Table
The columns in the table are chosen in the Report Column Format when Calibrator is chosen as the Report
Type. The default columns are Peak Name, Mean Area, Amount, Standard Deviation, Covariance, and
Number Average. See Report column format review and modification.

Run Variables
If this check box is selected, variables shown in the sample list will be reported with the values used to
satisfy those variables.

Calibration
You can choose to include the calibration plot and/or plot table. To make your selections:
1 On the Method Builder Analysis Report tab, click Calibration Contents....
2 When the Calibration Contents dialog appears, use the check boxes to turn off or on the plot and the plot table.

7-32 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Data Channel Settings

Analysis Tab Window

In the Data Channel Settings dialog, you indicate how the lines for the
data channels are displayed on the chromatogram plot during the
run, in the results, and in reports.
To specify data channel parameters:
1 On the Analysis Report tab, click Data Channel Settings.
2 Review the information in the areas of the dialog box and modify the information, if necessary.

% Offset
Use this parameter to move any additional channel’s line away from the horizontal axis (and from other
channel lines) on chromatogram plot. Express the offset as a percent of 100 mV.

Show All Channels

This parameter, which is selected by default, specifies whether all channels or just one channel will be
displayed on the chromatogram plot. Display differs depending on the area of the software:
Application Run, Results, or Reports.

Application Run
Lines for all channels being used will be displayed during the application run.

Results and Reports

Select this check box to display a line for each channel being used that has an associated analysis.

Clear the check box to display the line for the selected channel only.

Thickness
Identifies the width of the line in pixels.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-33

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Color
Analysis Tab Window

Identifies the color of the line.

Display differs depending on the area of the software: Application Run, Results, or Reports. Pre-defined
(not user-defined) colors will be used if data channels share an analysis or when viewing results or reports
with Show All Channels selected.

Company Logo & Address

Allows you to add a logo and address to the upper-left corner of the Analysis Report, Method Report,
Summary Report, and Calibration Report.

Add a logo and address

To add a logo and address to the report:
1 Click Browse.. to browse for a logo in one of the following file formats: .JPG, .PNG, or .BMP.
2 Type a name and up to three lines in the address to appear below the logo.
3 When finished, click OK.

Delete a logo
To delete a logo:
1 Click Clear to delete the logo.

When finished, click OK.

7-34 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Error Handling Tab

Analysis Tab Window

Error Handling tells the software what types of checks to do on the calculated peak amounts and how the
software responds if it detects an error.
The software can perform validation and system performance checks on peaks in samples.

The Error Handling tab lists the error conditions that the software should be aware of when analyzing data
using the method.

For information about control error handling, see Error Handling Tab.

The Method Builder - Analysis - Error Handling Tab window

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-35

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Set Up Analysis Error Handling

Analysis Tab Window

Selecting a peak name and indicating error conditions for it activates error handling. What happens
during a run or re-analysis processing then depends on whether an error method is chosen and whether
the Resume Run check box is selected.
• If neither a method nor the Resume Run check box is selected, the run or re-analysis processing is stopped when
the error condition is met.
• If both a method and the Resume Run check box are selected, the software executes the error handling method
and then proceeds to the next step in the Sample List.
• If a method is indicated but the Resume Run check box is not selected, the software does one of the following:
*during a run, it executes the error handling method and then stops the run.
*during re-analysis processing, it stops processing.
• If a method is not indicated, but the Resume Run check box is selected, the software finishes the current step and
proceeds to the next step in the Sample List.

Indicate Analysis error conditions

To specify error conditions:
1 Peak Name. Choose the name of the peak to monitor. The list box shows the peaks set in the peak table.
2 Error Method. Choose the method to execute when the selected error condition is met.
3 Resume Run. Select this check box if the run or re-analysis processing should continue even if an error has been
encountered. Refer to Set Up Analysis Error Handling to see how this check box affects what happens during
the run or re-analysis.
4 Parameter. In the list box, choose the peak calculation or value to monitor. Then, from the drop-down list,
choose one of the mathematical operators: greater than, less than, outside range, less than or equal to, equal to
or greater than, or equal to. In the text box, type the monitor value.
Note: When monitoring % CONCENTRATION, the software only monitors sample type STANDARD.
5 Click New.
6 Repeat for the next peak or parameter.

7-36 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Modify Analysis error conditions

Analysis Tab Window

To modify an error condition set for a peak:
1 Select the row with the peak name in the table.
2 Make desired changes.
3 Click Modify.

Delete Analysis error conditions

To delete an error condition set for a peak:
1 Select the row with the peak name in the table.
2 Right-click and then select Delete.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-37

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

How to Create an Analysis

How to Create an Analysis

1 On the Configured Instruments panel on the Configuration tab, click to select an Analysis.
2 Set the peak integration (see Peak Integration Tab), report (see Report Tab), and error handling options (see
Error Handling Tab) for the Analysis.
3 Do one of the following:
• Repeat for each Analysis.
• Right-click on an analysis and then select Copy Analysis to copy the analysis to the clipboard. To paste and
automatically rename the analysis, right-click on the data channel and then select Paste Analysis.
4 Right-click on an analysis and then select Default Analysis to specify which analysis the software will use during
the run.

Delete an Analysis
On the Configured Instruments palette, select an Analysis and then right-click to view the submenu. On
the submenu, click Delete Analysis.

7-38 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Integration Tasks

Integration Tasks
When you first open an Analysis window (Peak Integration tab), the following integration events are
immediately set at 0.00 minutes:
• Default Baseline
• Inhibit Negative Peak Integration
• Peak Slope and Sensitivity

For most separations, these are the only events to set. However, you can delete or modify these events, if
necessary.

Note: Integration always begins at analysis time 0. Analysis time 0 begins at the start of data collection in
the Control. If integration tasks are deleted or moved away from time 0, the default parameters for the
integration tasks will be used at time 0 until the first integration task. The default baseline is
Default Baseline. Negative Peak integration is inhibited. The default Front and Back Slopes are 25 and the
default Sensitivity is 85.

Note: Removing the Inhibit Negative Peak Integration event does not turn on negative peak integration.
Insert an Enable Negative Peak Integration event at the time point at which to start negative peak
integration.

To be integrated, a peak must elute during data collection. Furthermore, every contour rising from and
falling to the baseline must meet the peak detection criteria. An unlimited number of peaks per run can
be integrated.

The software’s ability to integrate peaks depends on the peak width, peak slope, and slope sensitivity
settings. These settings give information to the software about the size and shape of your peaks and the
noise level riding the baseline. However, if one or more peaks of interest are not integrated, modify some
or all of these parameters before subsequent runs or re-analysis processing.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-39

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
The following table shows the icons representing integration events.
Integration Tasks

Tool Icon Description

Default Baseline
Baseline Default Baseline

Horizontal Baseline
Baseline Horizontal Baseline

All Valleys
Baseline All Valleys Baseline

Tangent Skim
Baseline Tangent Skim Baseline

Next Valley
Baseline Next Valley Baseline

Inhibit/Enable Integration
Integration Inhibit Integration Enable Integration

Inhibit Negative Peak Enable Negative Peak Negative Peak

Negative Peak Integration Integration

Peak Slope and Sensitivity

Analysis Settings Analysis Settings

Start/Stop Integration by Fraction Collection

Start Integration by Stop Integration by
Fraction Collection
Fraction Collection Fraction Collection

7-40 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Peak Slope and Sensitivity

Integration Tasks
Peak Width is measured at half height and the default is 0, indicating
that Peak Width will not be used when determining integration.
Peak Width is used as a filter. A peak will not be integrated if the
peak width at half height is less than or equal to the Peak Width setting.

By default co-eluted peaks are not integrated. To integrate co-eluted

peaks, select the Co-eluted Peaks check box.

Peak slope is expressed in degrees. You can specify a front slope and/or
a back slope. The defaults are 25 degrees. If the peak has significant
tailing, the Back Slope value should be increased to reduce the amount
of the tail that is integrated or decreased to increase the amount of the
tail that is integrated. Smaller Front Slope values will integrate smaller,
sharper peaks. To reduce the number of small peaks integrated, increase
the Front Slope values.

The sensitivity setting maximizes the number of peaks that are integrated while minimizing the
integration of trace artifacts. If the trace has a lot of noise, then the value should be decreased to reduce
the number of smaller peaks that are integrated or increased to increase the number of peaks that are
integrated.

Baseline Construction Techniques

TRILUTION LC provides several baseline construction techniques. If you change the construction technique,
the software uses the first affected peak to determine when to use the technique. The first affected peak
is the peak whose end follows the scheduled time. Therefore, when applying an alternate construction
technique within a series of peaks, enter a time that coincides with the peak retention time. Use these
techniques sparingly and carefully so that data are analyzed in a meaningful way.
Accurate peak integration depends on the shape of the baseline, which in turn depends on the peak shape
and on the resolution from neighboring peaks.

Note: Changes to the baseline construction technique remain in effect until the next baseline task is
scheduled.

The images that follow demonstrate changes to the baseline at time 0 (zero). One example shows the
effects on merged peaks, while the other shows effects on resolved peaks.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-41

Integration Tasks Method Builder - Analysis 7

Default Baseline

Horizontal Baseline All Valleys Baseline

Tangent Skim Baseline Next Valley Baseline

Resolved Peaks - Baseline Integration Task at Time 0

7-42 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Integration Tasks
Default Baseline

Horizontal Baseline All Valleys Baseline

Tangent Skim Baseline Next Valley Baseline

Merged Peaks - Baseline Integration Task at Time 0

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-43

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Default Baseline
Integration Tasks

Baselines are drawn from the start and end of each

peak. If the software encounters merged peaks (no
baseline resolution between peaks), Default
Baseline draws a straight line from the start of the
first merged peak to the end of the last merged
peak, and drops perpendicular lines from the valley
of each merged peak to the new baseline. The start
and end point of each peak may be shifted to
prevent the baseline from crossing the
chromatogram trace.

Horizontal Baseline
Draws a forced horizontal baseline. The first peak after the horizontal baseline task determines the
baseline level. If the trace drops below the current horizontal baseline, a new horizontal baseline is drawn.
Perpendiculars are drawn from each peak start and each peak end to the baseline. The baseline level
remains the same until a peak (peak start or peak end) falls below the horizontal baseline or a new
horizontal baseline task is scheduled.

Horizontal Baseline Task at Time 0 Horizontal Baseline Tasks at Times 0 and 0.2 min

7-44 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

All Valleys

Integration Tasks
The All Valleys option forces the start and end point
to the valley of the chromatogram trace. The start
and end point of each peak may be shifted to
prevent the baseline from crossing the
chromatogram trace.

Tangent Skim
Baselines are drawn from the start and end of each
peak. If the software encounters merged peaks (no
baseline resolution between peaks), Tangent Skim
moves the integration endpoint of the first merged
peak to the end of all the merged peaks, and then
draws a line tangent to all of the remaining peaks
within the start and new end of first merged peak.
The start and end point of each peak may be shifted
to prevent the baseline from crossing the
chromatogram trace.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-45

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Next Valley
Integration Tasks

The Next Valley task baseline technique applies only to the next peak after the task. When the start of the
next peak is a merged peak (no baseline resolution between peaks), Next Valley technique moves the
baseline to the valley of the trace. The Default Baseline technique is used for all of the remaining peaks.
The start and end point of each peak may be shifted to prevent the baseline from crossing the
chromatogram trace.

Default Baseline at Time 0

Default Baseline
Next Valley Baseline at Time 0.2 min.

Inhibit/Enable Integration
If a region of a trace is uninteresting to you or if a region contains many unresolved peaks, you can inhibit
integration during that period. Schedule one task to inhibit integration. Then schedule another task for
the time at which to resume integration. This technique can eliminate a large number of uninteresting
peaks from being listed in reports.

For more information on scheduling timed tasks, see Schedule Timed Integration Tasks.

Negative Peak
If a region of the chromatogram contains negative peaks, you can tell the software to integrate those
peaks. Schedule one timed Task to enable integration. Then schedule another Task at the time to disable
integration.

For more information about scheduling timed tasks, see Schedule Timed Integration Tasks.

7-46 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Start/Stop Integration by Fraction Collection

Integration Tasks
Uses slope, specified in the Analysis, to determine the integration baseline and uses the fraction collection
start and stop lines for the start and end of the baseline.
The fraction collection start (solid green vertical line) and end (dashed red vertical line) must occur within
the peak analysis start (arrow up) and peak analysis end (arrow down) for the peak to be integrated using
Integration by Fraction Collection.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-47

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
The following diagrams show how the integration of a peak differs when integrating by fraction collection.
Integration Tasks

For this example, the analysis start and end are outside the fraction collection window.

Diagram 1: Fraction Collection by Level - Integration by Peak Slope and Sensitivity

Diagram 1a: Fraction Collection by Level - Integration by Peak Slope and Sensitivity

Diagram 1b: Fraction Collection by Level - Integration by Fraction Collection

7-48 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Integration Tasks
Collecting fractions by slope
When collecting fractions by slope, fraction collection start and end lines are determined according to
the settings in the fraction collection task in the Control (Fraction Collection Settings or Set Peak Slope).
The slope in the fraction collection task also determines the start and stop of integration. Baseline type
is set in the Analysis.

Collecting sub fractions

When collecting fractions by slope, it is possible to collect peaks within peaks (sub fractions) by time or
volume. Sub fractions are collected according to the settings in the Fraction Collection Settings
task (Peak Per Tube) or the Peak Per Tube task. Vertical integration lines are drawn within the peak in
addition to the baseline drawn according to the baseline type set in the Analysis.

Set Peak Slope Task Properties (Control)

Baseline Setting (Analysis)

Fraction Collection Settings Task Properties - Slope Selected (Control)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-49
 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Collecting fractions by time or volume

Integration Tasks

When collecting fractions by either time or volume, fraction collection start and end lines are determined
according to the settings in the fraction collection task (Fraction Collection Settings or Set Peak per Tube).
The slope indicated in the Peak Slope and Sensitivity task in the Analysis is used to determine the start and
stop of integration. Baseline type is set in the Analysis.

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Time Selected (Control)

7-50 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Integration Tasks
Peak Slope and Sensitivity (Analysis)

Fraction Collection Settings Task Properties - Volume Selected (Control)

Baseline Setting (Analysis)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-51

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Collecting fractions by level

Integration Tasks

When collecting fractions by level, fraction collection start (solid, green vertical line) and end
lines (dashed, red vertical line) are determined according to the settings in the fraction collection task in
the Control (Fraction Collection Settings or Set Peak Level).

Set Peak Level Task Properties (Control

Fraction Collection Settings Task Properties - Level Selected (Control)

7-52 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
The slope indicated for Peak Slope and Sensitivity task in the Analysis is considered when determining the

Integration Tasks
analysis start (arrow up) and analysis end (arrow down). Baseline type is set in the Analysis.

Baseline Setting (Analysis)

Peak Slope and Sensitivity (Analysis)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-53

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

How to Define Retention Time Windows

How to Define Retention Time Windows

Reference and non-reference peaks in unknown samples are located by matching actual retention times
to retention times listed in the analysis peak table. To compensate for possible retention time drift, the
software defines a time window around each expected peak. It finds an expected peak if that peak lies
within the retention time window.
You can modify the Absolute Error and/or Relative Error parameters to control the width of
retention time windows.

Absolute error is a constant amount of time flanking a peak’s nominal retention time. The software
automatically searches for eluted peaks at every named retention time plus or minus this amount of time.

Relative error is a percentage of peak retention time. Relative error and, therefore, the width of
retention time windows, increases with increasing retention time. Because late-eluting peaks are often
broader than early peaks, the software adds this correction factor to improve the likelihood of locating
late-eluting peaks.

You can calculate the beginning and end of any peak’s time window using the following formulas:

Beginning: Ret. Time - [Abs. Error - (Ret. Time x Rel. Error)]

End: Ret. Time + (Abs. Error + Ret. Time x Rel. Error)

Set Retention Time Window Parameters

It is easy to understand how absolute error contributes to the width of retention time windows since it is
simply a constant amount of time that brackets every named retention time. The contribution of relative
error is harder to grasp because it varies with retention time.

The following diagram and table show what happens when absolute error is held constant at 0.1 minutes
and the relative error is varied (1%, 5% or 10% of retention time). The time windows were calculated as
described previously.

7-54 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7
Notice that the retention time of Peak 3 (9.94 minutes) was very close to the upper limit (9.98 minutes) of

How to Define Retention Time Windows

the windows at 1% relative error. In this example, relative error should be set higher than 1% to avoid
missing peaks.
Peak 1 Peak 2 Peak 3

Nominal Ret. Time 2.27 4.77 9.78

Actual Ret. Time 2.30 4.85 9.94

Window
2.15–2.39 4.62–4.92 9.58–9.98
(1% rel. error)

Window
2.06–2.48 4.43–5.11 9.19–10.37
(5% rel. error)

Window
1.94–2.60 4.19–5.35 8.70–10.86
(10% rel. error)

Effect of Relative Error on Width of Retention Time windows

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-55

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Resolve Overlapping Retention Time Windows

How to Define Retention Time Windows

Retention time windows must be wide enough to permit detection of every peak yet narrow enough to
minimize windows overlapping. Overlapping can occur if windows are too wide or if peaks are too close
together. Since the software cannot know whether a peak belongs to the earlier or later window in an
overlapping pair, it uses the following algorithm during data analysis to revise the limits of both windows
and to establish a new boundary between them. The following examples are presented in the order of
least to most amount of overlap.

Type 1
When the beginning of window 2 occurs after the
midpoint of window 1, a new boundary is
established at the midpoint of the overlapping
region.

Type 2
When the beginning of window 2 occurs before
the midpoint of window 1, a new boundary is
established midway between the midpoint and
end of window 1.

Type 3
When the midpoint of window 2 occurs at any
time during window 1, a new boundary is
established midway between the center
of window 1 and the center of window 2.

7-56 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

How to Use the Peak Table During Data Analysis

How to Use the Peak Table During Data Analysis

When the software begins to analyze data collected during a run, it looks for the reference peaks and
non-reference peaks that you identified in the peak table. It knows where to look because you set the peak
retention times and retention time window parameters.

After finding the peaks, the software checks the retention times of those peaks and updates its peak table
so it knows when to expect those peaks in the next sample.

Reasons for Missing Peaks

The software might fail to identify reference or non-reference peaks if:
• the peak slope, peak sensitivity, and peak width were incompatible with chromatogram peaks
• the wrong sample was injected
• changing chromatographic conditions (flow rate, mobile phase composition, pressure, temperature) or leaks in
the system resulted in inconsistent retention times
• an insufficient number or a poor choice of reference peaks were named
• the absolute error and/or relative error need to be adjusted

Locate Reference Peaks

When you create a peak table, you can specify retention times for one or more reference peaks. The
software looks for peaks named in the peak table whose actual retention times fall within the reference
peaks’ time windows.

Use reference peaks cautiously. An ideal reference peak is a large, well-separated, isolated peak with a
consistent retention time.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-57

 Method Builder - Analysis 7
If, during data analysis, it finds a peak in a
How to Use the Peak Table During Data Analysis

retention time window, it presumes it found the

desired reference peak. As the software identifies
reference peaks, it constructs an internal graph of
actual retention times versus expected
retention times.

If two or more peaks fall within the same

reference peak time window, it chooses the
largest one as the reference peak. If two peaks in
a window are equally tall, the earliest peak is
chosen as the reference peak.

Locate Non-Reference Peaks

Using the internal graph, described previously, the
software updates the expected
retention times (and retention time windows) for all
non-reference peaks named in the Peak Table. It
then looks for non-reference peaks named on the
peak table whose actual retention times fall within a
corrected retention time window.

If the software finds such a peak, it presumes it is the

desired non-reference peak. If two or more
non-reference peaks fall within the same window, it
chooses the earliest peak whose retention time is
closest to the window’s center.

7-58 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

Update Peak Retention Times

How to Use the Peak Table During Data Analysis

Over the course of multi-sample runs, retention times could drift so much that peaks would elute outside
their original time windows. To ensure that the software always knows the most likely retention time of
each named peak, the software continuously updates the retention time windows of reference and
non-reference peaks on its internal peak table.

In the first sample, the software expects that named peaks have the retention time specified in the
peak table. In each subsequent sample, it adjusts the expected retention time according to information it
gathers during the run.

The new midpoint of each peak’s retention time window is calculated as a weighted sum of each peak’s
previously determined window midpoint (75%) plus its retention time in the current sample (25%). A
weighted sum is necessary to minimize the influence of a single bad sample in a multi-sample run.

For example, after several samples, the midpoint of a peak’s retention time window is at 3 minutes. In the
next sample, that peak’s retention time was 3.2 minutes. On the software’s peak table, the midpoint of the
retention time window is adjusted to 3.05 minutes.

(3 minutes x 0.75) + (3.2 minutes x 0.25) = 3.05 minutes

This updating only occurs if all reference peaks are found in the current sample. If all reference peaks are
found, the retention time window of each reference and non-reference peak found during that sample is
updated as described previously.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-59

 Method Builder - Analysis 7

Schedule Timed Integration Tasks

Schedule Timed Integration Tasks

Each command issued in the Method Analysis is referred to as an Integration Task.

Note: Unlike other Tasks, these Tasks cannot be opened in the Task Builder.

You can specify Integration Tasks that set the baseline, inhibit or enable integration, inhibit or enable
negative peak integration, set the peak slope, set the slope sensitivity, and start or stop integration by
fraction collection.

By dragging Tasks into the Analysis, you tell the software when to collect peaks.

Within the properties box, there is a Time box for indicating the time point at which to issue the Task.

Add Integration Task to Analysis

1 Drag the icon ( ) to the Analysis.
2 Indicate time and command parameters. Allow at least 0.01 min between integration tasks.
Note: During a run, the integration task time is based on the time at which data collection begins in the Control.
The change is applied to the first peak whose end follows the Integration Task time. When applying an alternate
baseline in a series of close peaks, choose a time that corresponds to the retention time of the first peak of
interest.
3 Click OK.

Delete Integration Task from Analysis

To remove a Task, select the task and then do one of the following:
• Right-click and then select Delete.
• Press the DELETE key.

Modify Integration Task

To modify the Task:
1 Right-click the Task.
2 Select Property.

7-60 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Method Builder - Analysis 7

How to Create and Use Analysis Variables

How to Create and Use Analysis Variables

To make your Method more flexible, you can indicate a variable name instead of entering a value for a
property in a Task. A variable name begins with # and can be any combination of letters and numbers and
can contain some special characters. Valid variable names would be #Slope and #Sensitivity.

When setting a Sample List for a run, assign values to any undefined variables used by the Method. If the
run is started and a value has not been assigned to a variable or if the value is not within the specified
range, the following message will be displayed:

To see what variable names have been set for the Method and to indicate a default and acceptable range
for each variable, do the following:
1 In the Method Control window, click the Variable tool ( ).
2 When the Variable List appears, select the variable and then do any of the following:
• To set a default value for the variable:
1) Click Modify or double-click or right-click and then select Modify.
2) Type a value in the Default Value box.
• To set an acceptable range for the variable:
1) Click Modify or double-click or right-click and then select Modify.
2) Type a value in the Min Value and Max Value boxes.
• To remove an unused variable name, select the variable then press the DELETE key, click Delete, or
right-click and then select Delete.

3 Click the up ( ) or down ( ) arrow to reorganize the variables. Variables listed up to down in the Method
Variables dialog will appear left to right in the Sample List.
4 Click OK when finished.

For more information about variables, see Chapter 13, Working with Variables.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 7-61

Running an Application 8

In the Application Run window, you specify the list of steps, called a Sample List, to execute during a run. A step in the Sample List identifies a sample to inject
and the Method that includes the control and analysis conditions to process that sample. Or, a step may identify a Method to use for system startup or
shutdown. This section describes the components of the Application Run window and how to generate the Sample List.

The Application Run window is also where you start and monitor the progress of a run. In addition, it is where you perform manual control as described in
Chapter 10, Manual HPLC System Control.

In this chapter, you will learn:

• How to Create a Sample List
• How to Create a Sample List for Fraction Collection
• How to Export a Sample List
• How to Import a Sample List

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-1

 Running an Application 8

Application Run Window

Application Run Window

Access the Application Run window by:

• right-clicking an Application in the Project Library and then choosing Run or
• selecting an Application in the Project Library and then clicking Run or
• clicking Run in the Method Builder after saving the Method.
Title Bar Run Name Status Box

Application Run Toolbar

Run Time
Sample List Toolbar Method Configuration Toolbar

Chromatogram Tab
Bed Layout Tab
Chromatogram
Toolbar

Action Buttons Info Window

The Application Run window

Title Bar
The title bar displays the names of the running Application and Sample List.

8-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

Application Run Toolbar

Application Run Window

Choose available functions using the icons at the top of the Application Run window.
Icon Label Description
Control HPLC system manually.
Manual Control
For more information, see Chapter 10, Manual HPLC System Control.

Manual Advance Manually advances the fraction collector dispense head to the next well.

If the fraction collector is collecting and Divert is clicked, the fraction collector advances to the
next tube and effluent is diverted. If the fraction collector is not collecting, and Divert is clicked,
Divert Valve effluent continues to be diverted to waste.
The software resumes collection according to the fraction collection parameters.

Show Graph in Cascade Mode Creates a separate window for each data channel and cascades the windows.

Show Graph in Tiled Mode Creates a separate window for each data channel and cascades the windows.

Gradient Hold Allows you to temporarily change the flow rate and ramp the Mobile Phase composition.

Allows you to indicate the volume of reservoir solvent. When the volume reaches 0, a notification
Solvent Settings
is sent, if indicated in the Notification utility.

Sample List Toolbar

The Sample List lists the steps to execute during a run. Choose available functions using the icons in the
Sample List workspace.
Icon Description
Allows you to import Sample List (.TSL) files.
For more information, see How to Import a Sample List.

Prompts to save the current Sample List then allows to export it to a selected location as a .TSL file.
For more information, see How to Export a Sample List.

Allows you to set initial volumes for any or all wells in each Bed Layout in the Application.
For more information, see Set Initial Volumes.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-3

Application Run Window Running an Application 8

Icon Description
Allows you to set the criteria for fraction re-injection and to select the Method to run when re-injecting fractions.
If after you set the criteria, you choose to not re-inject fractions, you must clear the Auto Re-injection check box in the Fraction
Re-injection Criteria dialog.

Allows you to set the minimum number of fraction sites required for each injection.
If the specified number of fraction sites are not available on any one fraction collector prior to the injection, the Application skips to
the next step in your run which prevents the sample from being lost.

Refreshes the Sample List.

Right-click menu
Select a row and then right-click and the following options are displayed.

Menu Description

Add Sample Adds the first sample to a new list or adds a sample to the bottom of the list.

Add Multiple Samples Adds a user-specified number of samples to the bottom of the list.

Insert Sample Adds a sample between two existing samples.

Clear Sample Clears a sample row of all values, but keeps the row in the Sample List.

Delete Sample Removes a sample from the Sample List.

Paste Row Special Pastes a user-specified number of copies of the selected sample after the selected sample row.

Open Method Opens the Method in the selected sample row in the Method Builder.

Identifies the sample row in the Sample List running an optional shutdown method.
Select as Shutdown
For more information, see Specify a Shutdown.

8-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8
A description of options available when right-clicking a pending sample follows.

Application Run Window

Option Description
Functions as a resume or continue when a sample/step has been paused.

Allows you to skip the sample/step.

Allows you to pause a sample until the right-click Run option is selected.

Run Name
Type a name for the run (50 characters maximum) that will be used to identify the run in the
Results Window and in reports. (Defaults to the current date and time at the start of the run.)

Method Configuration Toolbar

The Configuration selected will display in the Status box.

Icon Description

After selecting a Method from the drop-down list of all Methods in the Application, click to set the Method’s Configuration that
will be monitored in the Status box prior to beginning the run.

Action Buttons
The following action buttons are located in the lower left corner of the Application Run window.

Action Button Description

This option begins the Application Run.

RUN/STOP To stop the run, click Stop. You will be asked if you want to save data for the current sample. The Mobile Phase
composition and flow conditions in effect at the time of termination remain in effect.

This option causes gradient progression and task execution to enter a timed hold. Mobile Phase continues to flow at the
composition and flow rate at the time of the pause; data collection and fraction collection continue.
PAUSE/CONTINUE To continue the gradient progression and task execution, click Continue. Task execution resumes from the time of the
pause. The gradient progression resumes at the composition and flow rate when the run was paused. The run time
extends the duration of the pause.

STOP PUMP This option stops flow from the pumps. It is only available until the run starts.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-5

Application Run Window Running an Application 8

Action Button Description

EMERGENCY STOP This option stops the run and stops the flow from the pumps.

NEW Create a new Sample List. For more information, see How to Create a Sample List.

OPEN Open an existing Sample List.

SAVE Saves the current Sample List (including shown columns and widths) to the Application.

SAVE AS Save a new Sample List or save an existing Sample List to a new name. Optionally, type a description for the Sample List.

DELETE Deletes the open Sample List.

Chromatogram Tab
Shows the run-time chromatographic plot of acquired data, gradient profile, and run-time events.
The trace begins at the data collection begin time (usually synchronized with injection).

For the gradient profile, the Mobile Phase composition (Y-axis—labeled % Mobile Phase) is plotted with
respect to time (X-axis).

Chromatogram Toolbar
The chromatogram displays the real-time run data. Choose available functions using the icons in the
chromatogram toolbar. All settings are temporary and revert to the Graph Settings and Data Channel
Settings on the Method Builder-Analysis-Report Tab at the start of each sample.
Icon Description

Toggles between hiding and showing the baseline.

Toggles between hiding and showing fraction collection start and stop lines.

Toggles between hiding and showing actual percent Mobile Phase

Toggles between hiding and showing expected percent Mobile Phase

8-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

Application Run Window

Icon Description

Displays the print dialog for printing the chromatogram as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the chromatogram, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Displays the minutes and mVolts at the intersect of the crosshair.

Displays the Peak Analysis Result window.

Changes the color of the traces and Mobile Phase and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Changes the orientation and color of the peak name labels and allows you to choose to show or hide the label.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Moves one or more of the traces.

This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting or dividing
chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-7

 Running an Application 8

Right-click menu
Application Run Window

Select the Move Channel tool ( ) and then right-click on a trace to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Displays the Channel Offset Settings dialog which allows you to change the color of the displayed trace and offset
Set Offset
the race in either the X (Minutes) or Y (mVolts) direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to the
Set mVolts Offsets
previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the traces
Set All mVolts Offsets
to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to the
Set Minutes Offsets
previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

Set All Minutes After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the traces
Offsets to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

Move in Minutes Only Allows you to move the trace only horizontally.

Move in mVolts Only Allows you to move the trace only vertically.

8-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

Bed Layout Tab

Application Run Window

When creating a Sample List, you can view the Bed Layout, select multiple wells, and have the software
generate steps in the Sample List.
1 Open the Application Run window.
2 Place the cursor in the first cell for which you will be selecting a well.
3 Click to select the Bed Layout tab.
4 Select a Bed Layout and a Zone from the drop-down lists. Available wells appear in the zone’s active color.
5 Choose multiple well locations as described below.
To select random wells within one zone:
a) Press the CTRL key and then select each well.
b) Click Add Single and all wells selected will be added as one row in the Sample List or click Add Multiple and
each well selected will be added as its own row in the Sample List.
To select a range of wells within one zone:
a) Lasso the range of wells.
b) Click Add Single and all wells selected will be added as one row in the Sample List or click Add Multiple and
each well selected will be added as its own row in the Sample List.
6 Review the Sample List and, if necessary, enter or change the sample description for each sample.

Status Box
Displays status information for the components of the HPLC system. Pressure information and contact
status is displayed here.

Run Time
Displays the time that has passed since the start of the current running Method.

Info Window
Lists run-time events and the time they occurred.

After the run, this information can be viewed in the log file. For more information, see View the Log File.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-9

 Running an Application 8

Sample List
Sample List

The Sample List is an editable grid that specifies how many samples will be run, information about those
samples, and qualifies any variables in the associated Methods.

Before you set up a Sample List, create the Methods.

To increment the contents in a column, click in the first cell and drag down through the cells to increment.
The cursor displays as a plus sign (+) briefly when the value can be incremented.
To copy the contents of one cell to others in the same column, click in the cell with contents to be copied and
then hold CTRL and drag down through the cells to which the contents should be copied. The cursor displays
as a plus sign (+) briefly when the value can be copied.
To copy the contents of one row to another, select the row to be copied and then when the cursor
changes ( ), drag and drop the row at the destination.

Not all columns and rows allow copying and incrementing. Refer to the following table.

Increment Contents in
Column Copy Contents of One Cell? Copy Contents of Row?
Column?
Method Name NO NO YES

Sample Name YES COPIES YES

Sample Description YES COPIES YES

Amount YES YES YES

Sample Type YES COPIES YES

EXCEPT ACTUAL AND EXCEPT ACTUAL AND EXCEPT ACTUAL AND

NOMINAL AMOUNTS NOMINAL AMOUNTS NOMINAL AMOUNTS

Sample Re-injection NO NO NO

Notes YES COPIES YES

8-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

Default Columns

Sample List
When a new Sample List is created, columns for Method Name, Sample Name, and Notes appear by
default.
Columns can be shown or hidden. Right-click on a column name and then select the column name from
the menu. Doing so toggles the column to hide. Repeat to toggle the column to show.

Columns can be re-sized by dragging the column border in the column header.

Columns can be moved by dragging the column to a new location.

Saved Sample Lists include shown columns and selected widths.

Column

Method Name

Sample Name

Amount

Sample Description

Sample Type

Sample Re-injection

Notes

Additional Columns

Method Name
This column is required. Select a Method from the drop-down list of Methods in the Application. This is the
Method that will be used when the selected sample is run and to analyze the collected data for that
sample.

If the Method is deleted after the Sample List has been saved, the Sample List can be opened, but samples
referencing that Method will be removed. Review and resave the Sample List.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-11

 Running an Application 8

Sample Name
Sample List

This column is optional. Click in the cell and type a name that describes the Sample (default is “Sample”).
This name appears in the run-time chromatogram and the Samples drop-down list in the
Run Result window, and optionally, in reports.

Amount
This column is optional. Type an amount to be used when monitoring percent concentration for analysis
error handling.

Sample Description
This column is optional. Click in the cell and type a name that describes the Sample (default is “Sample
Description”).

Sample Type
This column is required. There are four choices (BLANK, CONTROL, UNKNOWN, and STANDARD) in the
drop-down list that are described below. The default is UNKNOWN.

BLANK
A blank sample is generally the mobile phase solvent. A run with a blank solvent enables the software to
subtract the solvent noise from an actual run.

8-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

CONTROL

Sample List
A control sample is a reference sample containing the
target analyte of a known amount.

When the sample is identified as a control, the Standard

Information dialog appears. Enter a value for the Actual
Amount and optionally, for the Nominal Amount.

Actual Amount
Actual Amount is the amount you actually measured to
prepare a particular unknown sample.

Nominal Amount
Nominal Amount is the amount you wanted to measure.

UNKNOWN
The unknown sample is the interest of analysis. The amounts with area/height are reported according to
the standard sample used for calibration.

STANDARD
The standard sample is a sample with known amounts. A standard sample run for multiple times provides
calibration points. The amounts in unknown sample are reported in the software in proportion to the
calibration points.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-13

 Running an Application 8
When the sample is identified as a standard, the Standard
Sample List

Information dialog appears. Enter a value for the Actual

Amount and optionally, for the Nominal Amount.

A peak specified as an internal standard is identified by a

change in color for the row label.

Actual Amount
Actual Amount is the amount you actually measured to
prepare a particular unknown sample.

Nominal Amount
Nominal Amount is the amount you wanted to measure.

Sample Re-injection
This column is optional and is used if you want to re-inject a sample based on either a named peak or an
unknown peak meeting specified peak criteria in the default analysis on the primary channel.
Note: If you set both fraction and peak
re-injection criteria and both are met, only
fractions will be re-injected.

To set peak criteria for re-injecting a sample:

1 Click in the cell to open the Sample
Re-injection Criteria dialog.
2 Ensure that the Auto Re-injection check box
is selected. (It is by default.)
3 Select the check box next to the name of
each peak to be considered. If no peaks are
selected, all peaks will be considered.

8-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8
4 Specify the criteria for the peaks. Criterion are considered independently. If any of the peaks meet any of the

Sample List
criteria, the sample will be re-injected.
a) Select an operator (null, greater than, or less than). If null is selected, the criteria will be ignored.
b) Type a value.
5 Choose, by selecting the corresponding option button, whether to:
• insert the sample immediately after its parent or
• after all parent samples (at end)
If you will be using a shutdown method, you can specify a step in the Sample List for the shutdown and then
the sample will be inserted after all parent samples and before the shutdown. See Select as Shutdown.
6 Select the Method to execute when re-injecting the sample.
7 Repeat for each sample in the Sample List as desired.

Notes
This optional column appears after a Method is selected. Double-click in the cell and then type any text
that you want to appear in the Run Report.

Additional Columns
Other columns appear depending on the variables set in your Method. For example, if an injection Task in
a Method requests inputs, such as sample volume and sample location, columns labeled #Sample Volume
and #Sample Location appear. If one of the inputs requests the fraction site at which to begin collection,
refer to How to Create a Sample List for Fraction Collection.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-15

 Running an Application 8

How to Create a Sample List

How to Create a Sample List

Before you set up a Sample List, create the Methods and, optionally, analyses to use during the run.
1 Access the Application Run window by:
• right-clicking an Application in the Project Library and then choosing Run or
• selecting an Application in the Project Library and then clicking Run or
• clicking Run in the Method Builder.
2 Verify the Method Configuration. For more information, see Method Configuration Toolbar.
3 Select the Method to use for the first sample. For more information, see Method Name.
4 Right-click on a column name and then toggle desired columns to show or unneeded columns to hide. For more
information, see Default Columns and/or Additional Columns.
5 Optionally, organize the columns by dragging them and dropping them in a new position.
6 Fill-in the cells in the sample row.
• It is possible to copy and paste or increment values in some columns. For more information, see
Sample List.
• Well variables can be satisfied graphically. For more information, see Bed Layout Tab.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 for each additional sample. If necessary, add rows to the Sample List (see Add Sample or Add
Multiple Samples).
8 Optionally, set initial volumes. For more information, see Set Initial Volumes.
9 Optionally, set fraction re-injection criteria. For more information, see How to Create a Sample List to
Re-inject Collected Fractions.
10 Optionally, set the number of minimum fraction sites. For more information, see Sample List Toolbar.
11 Click Save to save the Sample List.

8-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

How to Create a Sample List for Fraction Collection

How to Create a Sample List

If you are doing fraction collection, the software can keep track of the wells used for each
injection (referred to as continuous collection). Or, you can indicate the well at which to start collection for
each injection (referred to as specific site collection).

With continuous collection, you indicate the zone in which collection occurs (Fraction Zone) and then
specify 0 for the Fraction Well. For the first injection, collection starts in the first well of the zone. For the
second and each subsequent sample collected into the zone, collection will begin in the next available
numbered well.

With specific site collection, you indicate both the zone and well at which collection starts for each sample.

You may use both continuous collection and specific site collection within the same Sample List.
Refer to the example Sample Lists that follow.

Example 1: Specific Site collection: collection of each sample’s eluent into same set of
tubes (one zone)
If the fractions for each injection are collected into the same set of tubes, ensure that the zone and well
specified for the #Fraction Zone and #Fraction Well variables are the same for each sample, for example,
specify Fraction Zone for the #Fraction Zone variable for each sample and specify 1 for the #Fraction Well
variable for each sample.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-17

 Running an Application 8

Example 2: Continuous collection: collection of each sample’s eluent into its own set
How to Create a Sample List

of tubes (one zone)

If the fractions for each injection are collected into a different set of tubes, indicate the same zone name
for each sample and then specify 0 for the #Fraction Well variable for each sample.

Example 3: Continuous collection: collection of each sample’s eluent into its own set
of tubes (multiple zones)
If the fractions for each injection are collected into a different set of tubes, indicate the zone name for each
sample and then specify 0 for the #Fraction Well variable for each sample. The following example uses two
zones. Fractions from standard injections (Standard Sample) are collected into one zone (Standard
Fractions), and fractions from unknown injections (Unknown Sample) are collected into another
zone (Unknown Fractions).

8-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

How to Create a Sample List to

How to Create a Sample List

Re-inject Collected Fractions
When setting up a Sample List to re-inject collected fractions,
use the Fraction Re-Injection ( ) button to access the
Fraction Re-injection Criteria dialog.

To set up a Sample List to re-inject collected fractions:

1 Set up the Sample List for injections.
2 Click the Fraction Re-Injection ( ) button.
3 Ensure that the Auto Re-injection check box is selected. (It is by
default.)
4 On the Fraction Re-injection Criteria dialog, specify the criteria for the fractions to re-inject. Do this by specifying
the minimum area of the fractions or the minimum height of the peaks. If both are specified, then both will be
used.
5 Choose, by selecting the corresponding option button, whether to:
• insert the fractions immediately after each parent or
• after all parent samples (at end).
If you will be using a shutdown method, you can specify a step in the Sample List for the shutdown and then
the fractions will be inserted after all parent samples and before the shutdown. See Select as Shutdown.
6 Select the Method to execute when re-injecting the collected fractions.
Note: The Sample Zone must be #Sample Zone and the Sample Well must be #Sample Well, defined in the
Sample Variable dialog in this Method.
7 If you wish to inject the fractions collected when your re-injection Method was run, select the Apply Criteria to
Re-Injected Fractions check box. It defaults cleared.
8 Optionally, set the minimum number of fraction sites required for each sample by doing the following:
a) Click the Fraction Counter ( ) button.
b) Enter the number of minimum fraction sites required for each sample.
c) Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-19

 Running an Application 8

Set Initial Volumes

How to Create a Sample List

For liquid tracking, use the Initial Volume ( ) button to access the Initial Volume Setting dialog.

8-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8
To set initial volumes for any or all wells in each Bed Layout in the Application:

How to Create a Sample List

1 Create the Sample List. For more information, see How to Create a Sample List.
2 Click the Initial Volume ( ) button.
3 Click to select a Bed Layout.
4 Select a Zone.
5 Choose multiple well locations as described below.
• To select random wells, press the CTRL key and then select each well.
• To select a range of wells, lasso the range of wells.
6 Right-click and then select Set Initial Volume. The Initial Volume dialog appears showing the default value of
-1, indicating that an initial volume has not been set for the selected wells.
7 Type the initial volume and then click OK.
8 Verify the entries in the grid.
9 Repeat steps 4–8 for additional wells and/or repeat steps 3–8 for additional Bed Layouts.
10 Click Close. The Initial Volume Confirmation dialog appears.
• Select Continue without setting Initial Volumes to 0 μL if you want volume tracking off for wells for which
an initial volume was not specified. This is the default selection. For example, if you do not wish to track
volumes in the rinse stations, select this option. Rinse volumes will not be tracked unless you specified an
initial volume for the rinse station. Even if this option is selected, the Sample Tracking Report will report all
aspirate and dispense volumes.
• Select Set initial volume of wells in selected zones to 0 μL if no initial volume was specified and then
select the zones in which you wish track volumes in all wells.

Clear Initial Volumes

There are several ways to clear initial volumes that have been set:
• Select the rows, right-click, and then select Delete Row.
• Click Clear Info. The grid is cleared.

Reset Volumes
As aspirations occur, the volumes in the tubes decrease. Volumes are not automatically reset between
runs. To reset volumes to the set initial volumes, click Reset Volume.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-21

 Running an Application 8

How to Export a Sample List

How to Export a Sample List

1 On the Application Run screen, click the

Sample List Export ( ) button. The Select
Sample List Export Path window is
displayed.
2 In the Select Sample List Export
Path window, select a folder and then click
Save.
The Sample List is saved in the specified
folder with a .TSL extension.

Modify Sample List in

Microsoft® Excel®
1 After the Sample List has been exported,
right-click on the file in Windows Explorer
and then select Properties.
2 Associate .TSL files with Microsoft® Excel® and then double-click to open the file in Excel.

If you notice additional columns in your Sample List when it is opened in Excel, this is expected, however,
DO NOT delete them.

3 Make desired changes and then save the modified Excel file by selecting Save from the File menu or by pressing
CTRL + S. DO NOT select SAVE AS. When asked if you wish to keep the file in the current format, click Yes.
When closing the file in Excel, you will be asked if you wish to save the file. Click No. You have already saved it in
the desired format.

Peak and Fraction Re-injection Criteria, Minimum Fraction Sites, and Initial Volumes cannot be modified in
Excel.

8-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Running an Application 8

How to Import a

How to Import a Sample List

Sample List
1 On the Application Run screen, click the
Sample List Import ( ) button. The
Select Sample List Export Files window is
displayed.
2 On the Select Sample List Export
Files window, do the following:
a) Browse for and select the Sample List
file.
b) Click Open.
On completion of the Import operation, the
TRILUTION information box appears and the
imported Sample List opens.
3 On the TRILUTION information dialog box,
complete the following:
a) To view the log information of the Import operation, click Details.
b) Click OK.

Because Sample Lists include information about the Methods and the Bed Layout, Sample Lists that do not
match the Application cannot be imported.

Results
During the run, the software can generate data, reports (which may include chromatogram plots of
acquired traces), and log. See Chapter 11, Results for more information.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 8-23

Starting a Run 9

The Application Run window is where you start and monitor the progress of a run.

While the run is in progress, you can:

• modify steps that have not yet been executed. This includes modifying a Method so updated analysis conditions are used.
• use the toolbar to manipulate the appearance of the run-time graph.

In this chapter, you will learn How to Start a Run.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 9-1

 Starting a Run 9

How to Start a Run

How to Start a Run

To get ready for and begin a run:

1 Make sure all system instruments are turned on and are ready to run (pumps are primed, column is equilibrated,
samples are in place, etc.).
2 Check that the correct Sample List is open.
3 Click Run in the Application Run window.

9-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Starting a Run 9

During a Run

During a Run
When the run starts, you may want to focus your attention on a few elements of the
Application Run window. These elements are described below.

Status Box

Sample List

Chromatogram Pane

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 9-3

 Starting a Run 9

Status Box
During a Run

When you open the Application Run window, and throughout the run, a status box is displayed. The status
box displays information for the instruments in the selected Configuration. You see pressure information
and contact status in this box.

Sample List
The current running step is highlighted green in the Sample List.

Right-click options
A description of options available when right-clicking a pending sample follows.
Option Description
Functions as a resume or continue when a sample/step has been paused.

Allows you to skip a pending sample/step.

Allows you to pause a sample until the right-click Run option is selected.

Chromatogram Pane
A run-time chromatographic plot of acquired data, gradient profile of the Method, and run-time events
are displayed in the Chromatogram pane.

9-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Starting a Run 9

Interrupt a Run

Interrupt a Run
You can choose to pause or terminate a run in progress. To restart a run after termination, see Restart a
Run after Termination.

Pause a Run
To pause a run, click Pause.

This option causes gradient progression and task execution to enter a timed hold. Mobile Phase continues
to flow at the composition and flow rate at the time of the pause; data collection and fraction collection
continue.

To continue the gradient progression and task execution, click Continue. Task execution resumes from the
time of the pause. The gradient progression resumes at the composition and flow rate when the run was
paused. The run time extends the duration of the pause.

Stop a Run
To stop the run before it completes, click Stop.

This option stops the run. You will be asked if you want to save data for the current sample.

The Mobile Phase composition and flow conditions in effect at the time of termination remain in effect.
Flow does not stop automatically after a run! To stop flow, click Stop Pump.

Emergency Stop
This option stops the run and stops the flow from the pumps.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 9-5

 Starting a Run 9

Restart a Run after Termination

Restart a Run after Termination

You can restart a run that was stopped while in progress. You can restart the run at the same step at which
it was terminated. Or, you can restart the run at an earlier step if you want to repeat a series of steps.

After the run has been stopped, do the following:

1 After a run is terminated, a dialog is displayed asking if data should be saved for the current sample. Click Yes or
No.
2 Modify the Sample List to display the samples that you want to run. You can indicate the same samples or
remove ones that had completed before the run was terminated.
3 Change the Run Name and then click Run. The run begins.

9-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Starting a Run 9

After a Run

After a Run
Status of TRILUTION LC
A run is complete once the software has finished all of the samples in the Sample List (or after you have
clicked Stop or Emergency Stop).

The Mobile Phase composition and flow conditions in effect when the run is finished remain in effect. Flow
does not stop automatically after a run! To stop flow, click Stop Pump.
Data and reports can be viewed, and stored data can be re-analyzed, using the Results window; see
Chapter 11, Results.

Shut Down the HPLC System

Shutdown methods are Methods that include conditions that you want in effect after each run. A
shutdown method might reduce the flow rate to zero and extinguish the lamp on a detector. You create
shutdown methods as you would any Method.

To automatically shut down your HPLC system at the end of a run, specify the Method for the last sample
in the Sample List.

Specify a Shutdown
If you will be using a shutdown method, you can specify a step in the Sample List for the shutdown and
then the fractions or samples for re-injection will be inserted after all parent samples and before the
shutdown (if that option is selected).
To specify a shutdown:
1 Select a Method under Method Name.
2 Select the row.
3 Right-click and then select Select as Shutdown.

The shutdown method step number is designated red in the Sample List.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 9-7

 Starting a Run 9

Stop Flow
After a Run

To stop flow, click Stop Pump.

View the Log File

To display the log file produced during a run:
1 Access the Results dialog by right-clicking on an Application in the Project Library and then choosing Result or
by double-clicking the Results icon ( ).
2 Locate the run for which you want to view the log.
3 Right-click on the Run and choose View Log. The file appears in a text editor box. You can add your own
comments, change the font, and print the log file.

9-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Manual HPLC System Control 10

In addition to timed runs, the software also provides manual control over HPLC system components. Manual control is useful for getting the system up and
running, for method development, and for checking HPLC system operation before a run.

Note: Before running your system in manual mode, be sure that the instruments in the HPLC system are turned on and the appropriate connections are made
as described in each instrument’s user’s guide.

Manual control ( ) is accessed from the Application Run window.

In this chapter, you will learn How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to Instruments.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 10-1

 Manual HPLC System Control 10

Manual Control Window

Manual Control Window

You access the Manual Control window by clicking the Manual Control icon ( ) in the
Application Run window.

The configuration selected on the Application Run window will be used in Manual Control.
Following is a Manual Control window.
Manual Run Gradient Prime Home Probes Home Pump Auto Zero Channels

Toolbar

Chart

Workspace

Info Window
Action
Buttons

The Manual Control window

10-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Manual HPLC System Control 10

Toolbar

Manual Control Window

Choose available functions using the icons at the top of the Manual Control window.
Icon Label Description
Instructs Gilson pumps to achieve a desired Mobile Phase composition and flow rate.
Manual Run Gradient Not available while an Application is running.
For more information, see Control of Mobile Phase Pumps.

Primes the dilutor in the specified zone or the transfer tubing at the rinse station. It aspirates the specified
amount of volume from the reservoir (or the syringe capacity), and then dispenses to the specified wells.
Prime
If the volume specified exceeds the syringe capacity, then multiple aspirates and dispenses will be
performed to deliver the requested volume.

Home Probes Homes the X/Y/Z on the specified liquid handler.

Home Pump Homes the pump or the internal dilutor or external dilutor at a specified well.

Auto Zero Channels Sets the channel’s trace to 0 mV.

Executing Toolbar Functions

The toolbar provides pre-defined command run lists on click of an icon.
To execute a pre-defined command run list:
1 Click the icon.
2 Set the properties for the command or select the instrument for which to run the pre-defined command run list,
when prompted.
3 Click OK and the list runs.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 10-3

 Manual HPLC System Control 10

Action Buttons
Manual Control Window

The following action buttons are located in the lower left corner of the Manual Control window.

Action
Description
Button

Places the selected command in the run list. For more information, see How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to
ADD
Instruments.

REMOVE Deletes the selected command from the run list. For more information, see Remove Commands or Tasks.

Executes the commands in the run list. For more information, see How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to
Instruments.
RUN/STOP
To stop the run, click Stop. The Mobile Phase composition and flow conditions in effect at the time of termination remain
in effect. Data collection and pumping does not stop.

STOP PUMP This option stops flow from the pumps. It is only available until the run starts.

Workspace
The workspace is used to build manual run lists.
For more information, see How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to Instruments.

Right-click menu
Manual Control employs the use of right-click options. Right-click on a task or command in the workspace
to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Properties Allows to edit the properties for the task or command.

Remove Deletes the selected command from the run list.

Copy to Task Builder Copies the selected tasks or commands to the clipboard for pasting in the Task Builder.

10-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Manual HPLC System Control 10

Chart

Manual Control Window

Displays a strip chart for one, two, or several data channels.

For more information, see Strip Chart Control.

Strip Chart Toolbar

Choose available functions using the icons in the graph toolbar.
Icon Description
Toggles between hiding and showing actual percent Mobile Phase

Displays the print dialog for printing the chromatogram as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the chromatogram, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Displays the minutes and mVolts at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the traces and Mobile Phase and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Changes the orientation and color of the peak name labels and allows you to choose to show or hide the label.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 10-5

Manual Control Window Manual HPLC System Control 10

Icon Description
Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Moves one or more of the traces.

This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting or dividing
chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

Right-click menu

Select the Move Channel tool ( ) and then right-click on a trace to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Displays the Channel Offset Settings dialog which allows you to change the color of the displayed trace and offset
Set Offset
the race in either the X (Minutes) or Y (mVolts) direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to the
Set mVolts Offsets
previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the traces
Set All mVolts Offsets
to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to the
Set Minutes Offsets
previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

Set All Minutes After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the traces
Offsets to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

Move in Minutes Only Allows you to move the trace only horizontally.

Move in mVolts Only Allows you to move the trace only vertically.

Info Window
Lists commands and the time they were executed.

10-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Manual HPLC System Control 10

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps

Control of Mobile Phase Pumps

Using Manual Control, you can instruct Gilson pumps to achieve a desired Mobile Phase composition and
flow rate.

To control the pumps:

1 On the Manual Control window, click the Gradient button ( ).

2 In the Flow Rate box, type the desired flow rate.
3 In the Ramp Time box, type the ramp time over which to achieve the desired conditions.
4 For each pump except the first one, type the desired percent composition from that pump in the Value field.
5 After specifying all parameters, click OK.

Strip Chart Control

The Chart tab in the Manual Control window allows you to start and stop data collection. You can view a
strip chart for one, two, or several data channels.
1 Choose Chart on the Manual Control window.
2 To begin viewing data from the channels, toggle Start Data Collection on by selecting the check box. The traces
for the channels appear in the window.
3 Data collection continues until you clear the Start Data Collection check box or close the Manual
Control window. When data collection is halted, a dialog box appears that enables you to save the collected
data.
If you select to save the strip chart, it is stored with other run results. (See Chapter 11, Results.) The software also
indicates in the Info Window that the result is a manual result (Manual Result: Yes).

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 10-7

 Manual HPLC System Control 10

How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to Instruments

How to Manually Send Commands or Tasks to Instruments

During manual control, you can send instructions to the instruments in the selected Configuration.
To issue a command or task to one of these instruments:
1 From the List, drag a command or task into the workspace or select the command or task and then click Add.
After adding a custom task to the workspace, you will be asked if you want to update the task defaults. Click Yes
and the values specified for the parameters will be remembered the next time this task is used. Click No and
property changes will only affect the current manual control session.
For a description of the commands, refer to Appendix E, List of Commands.
For a description of the tasks, refer to Appendix A, List of Tasks.
2 Set the properties.
3 Continue adding commands or tasks, or click Run.

Reorder Commands or Tasks

To change the order in which commands or tasks are executed, select the command or task and then click
Up or Down.

Remove Commands or Tasks

To remove commands:
1 Select the command in the workspace.
2 Click Remove, right-click and then select Remove, or press the DELETE key.

To select multiple commands in a sequential order, hold SHIFT and then select the first and the last
command in the sequence with the mouse.
To select commands in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple commands with the mouse.

Data Storage
During a manual run, the software can generate data. See Chapter 11, Results for more information.

10-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

The Run Result window enables you to view chromatogram plots and analysis information for collected data.

From a run, the software produces a Result file containing the channel data collected and stored for all injected samples. This Result file contains time and
signal information for each sample.

To view results of data analysis, you preview the report file generated during a run or re-analysis processing.

Results are accessed by right-clicking on an Application in the Project Library and then choosing Results or by double-clicking the Results icon ( ).
The Results window is displayed.

In this chapter, you will learn:

• How to Export Run Results
• How to Archive Run Results
• How to Restore Run Results
• How to Overlay Results to Compare Sample Traces
• How to Analyze Data in a Different Way

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-1

 Results 11

Results Window
Results Window

Displays all runs for the Application. The exception is when runs have been archived, in which case they
must be restored to be viewed.
Results Tab Calibration Tab Toolbar
Summary Tab

Action Buttons
Results window

To sort the run results, click on a column header. To sort in reverse order, click the column header again.

11-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Action Buttons

Results Window
The following action buttons are located in the lower right corner of the Results window.

Action Button Description

REFRESH Allows you to reload the window with any new or imported run results.

CLOSE Exits the Results window.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the toolbar.

Icon Description

Allows you to list run results based on the filter selected.

When filtering by peak names, separate multiple peak names by % and list them in the order that they elute from the column.

Saves the run (data and Method) to an external location (i.e., network drive) as a Run Archive File (.LCRA). Can then be restored by
the same user or another user.
To select multiple run results in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select run results in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple run results with the mouse.
For more information, see How to Export Run Results.

Saves the run (data and Method) to an external location (i.e., network drive) as a Run Archive File (.LCRA). Can then be restored by
the same user or another user.
The difference between Export and Archive is that Export leaves data in the Results dialog, whereas Archive removes it. Both allow
the data to be restored.
To select multiple run results in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select run results in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple run results with the mouse.
For more information, see How to Archive Run Results.

Imports a .LCRA file and lists the run results in the Results window.
For more information, see How to Restore Run Results.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-3

 Results 11

Results Tab
Results Window

Double-click the run name to show the result.

Right-click menu
Select a run and then right-click and the following options are displayed.

Menu Description

Open Result Displays stored collected data. Information for all samples injected during the run is stored here.

Rename Run Allows you to rename the run.

Saves the run (data and Method) to an external location (i.e., network drive) as a Run Archive File (.LCRA). Can then be
restored by the same user or another user.
Export To select multiple run results in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select run results in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple run results with the mouse.
For more information, see How to Export Run Results.

Saves the run (data and Method) to an external location (i.e., network drive) as a Run Archive File (.LCRA). Can then be
restored by the same user or another user.
The difference between Export and Archive is that Export leaves data in the Results dialog, whereas Archive removes it. Both
Archive allow the data to be restored.
To select multiple run results in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select run results in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple run results with the mouse.
For more information, see How to Archive Run Results.

View Log Opens the log file detailing information from the Info window during the run in Microsoft® Notepad.

Summary Tab
Select the type of summary to view: Standard or Unknown.

Double-click the run name (channel) to open the Summary Report.

11-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Calibration Tab

Results Window
Double-click the run name (channel) to show the calibration plot which is used to calculate amounts for
unknown samples. Examine the calibration curve generated for each standard peak. Viewing calibration
plots is especially important if quadratic or cubic was the curve fitting method used to generate them.

For more information, see How to View Calibrations.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-5

 Results 11

How to Export Run Results

How to Export Run Results

1 On the Results window, do one of the following:

• Select the run name and then right-click and then select Export.
• Select the run name and then click .
The Select Export Path window is displayed.

To select multiple run results in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select run results in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple run results with the mouse.

2 On the Select Export Path window, select a folder and click Save. The run results (and Methods and Tasks, but
not Sample List) are exported. On completion of the Export operation, the run results are saved in the specified
folder with a .LCRA extension. The TRILUTION information dialog box is displayed.

You can create a new folder from the Select Export Path window.

3 On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Export operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

11-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

How to Archive Run Results

How to Archive Run Results

You will have to archive run data before the Application can be deleted.
1 On the Results window, select the run name and then do one of the following:
a) Click the Archive Results icon ( ).
b) Right-click and then select Archive.
The Select Archive Path window is displayed.

To select multiple run results in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select run results in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple run results with the mouse.

The difference between Export and Archive is that Export leaves data in the Results window, whereas
Archive removes it. Both allow the data to be restored.

2 On the Select Archive Path window, select a folder and click Save. The run results (and a copy of the Methods
and Tasks, but not Sample List) are archived. On completion of the Archive operation, the Run is saved in the
specified folder with a .LCRA extension. The TRILUTION information dialog box is displayed.

You can create a new folder from the Select Archive Path window.

3 On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Export operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-7

 Results 11

How to Restore Run Results

How to Restore Run Results

You can restore runs that have been exported or archived.

1 On the Results window, click the Restore Run icon ( ). The Select Results Files to Import window is displayed.
2 From the Select Results Files to Import window, do the following:
a) Browse for and select the Result Export Files.

To select multiple runs in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select runs in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple runs with the mouse.

b) Click Open. The run results (and Methods and Tasks, but not Sample List) are restored. On completion of the
restore operation, the TRILUTION information box is displayed.

If a Task or any Task placed within a Task with the same name is found, an option is provided to import the
Task as a new version, import all Tasks as new version, skip the import of all Tasks, or rename the Task.

c) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Import operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

11-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Run Results Window

Run Results Window

Spectral
Data

Chromatogram

Sample Fraction
Bed Layout Bed Layout

Action Buttons

Run Results window

Chromatogram
Shows the chromatogram plot for collected traces.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-9

 Results 11

Toolbar
Run Results Window

Choose available functions using the icons in the graph toolbar.

Icon Description
Toggles between hiding and showing the baseline.

Toggles between hiding and showing fraction collection start and stop lines.

Toggles between hiding and showing actual percent Mobile Phase

Toggles between hiding and showing expected percent Mobile Phase

Displays the print dialog for printing the chromatogram as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the chromatogram, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Displays the minutes and mVolts at the intersect of the crosshair.

Displays the Peak Analysis Result window.

Changes the color of the traces and Mobile Phase and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Changes the orientation and color of the peak name labels and allows you to choose to show or hide the label.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

11-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Run Results Window

Icon Description
Moves one or more of the traces.
This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting or dividing
chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

Allows you to move peak labels.

Allows to select a peak for which the baseline will be modified or deleted.

Deletes the selected baseline.

Snaps all points to the baseline.

Allows to snap points to the baseline.

Allows to color peaks. Named peaks use the color assigned in the peak table. Unnamed peaks use green.

Inserts a new baseline.

Right-click menu
Right-click in the graph to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Point zoom Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Lasso zoom Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Cross hairs Displays the minutes and mVolts at the intersect of the crosshair.

Moves one or more of the traces.

Move channel This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when
subtracting or dividing chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the
chromatogram.

Move label Allows you to move peak labels.

Move baseline Allows to select a peak for which the baseline will be modified or deleted.

Delete baseline Deletes the selected baseline.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-11

Run Results Window Results 11

Menu Description

Snap baseline Snaps all points to the baseline.

Snap baseline endpoint Allows to snap points to the baseline.

Color peak region Allows to color peaks. Named peaks use the color assigned in the peak table. Unnamed peaks use green.

Insert baseline Inserts a new baseline.

Select the Move Channel tool ( ) and then right-click on a trace to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Displays the Channel Offset Settings dialog which allows you to change the color of the displayed trace and offset
Set Offset
the race in either the X (Minutes) or Y (mVolts) direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to the
Set mVolts Offsets
previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the traces
Set All mVolts Offsets
to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to the
Set Minutes Offsets
previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the traces
Set All Minutes Offsets
to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

Move in Minutes Only Allows you to move the trace only horizontally.

Move in mVolts Only Allows you to move the trace only vertically.

Sample Bed Layout

Shows the location on the Bed Layout for the selected Sample.

11-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Fraction Bed Layout

Run Results Window

Shows the location on the Bed Layout of the fractions collected from the selected Sample.

Action Buttons
The following action buttons are located in the lower left corner of the Run Results window.

Action Button Description

SAVE Saves changes made to the Run Results after re-analysis or analysis of manual changes.

View report information for all samples for a single Method (selected from the Samples drop-down list), Device/
Channel, and Analysis. If 31 or more samples use the same method, you will be prompted to select a sample
PREVIEW
range to display in the report. For more information about the analysis report and additional ways to view it, refer
to Chapter 14, Reports.

Analyzes data using new conditions and/or integrates peaks differently.

RE -ANALYZE
For more information, see How to Analyze Data in a Different Way.

ANALYZE MANUAL CHANGES Writes new data to the Analysis Report after a Manual Baseline Adjustment.

EDIT Opens the Peak Integration and Report tabs for modification.

PREVIOUS Selects the previous sample.

NEXT Selects the next sample.

Spectral Data
Clicking the Spectral Data button in the Run Results window enables you to view chromatogram and
spectral plots and create spectral libraries using data collected by the 171 or 172 Diode Array Detector.
Information is provided on three tabs: Spectral Data Tab, Peak Purity Tab, Library Tab.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-13

 Results 11

Spectral Data Tab

Run Results Window

Use the Spectral Data tab to view and manipulate diode array data.

By default, a 3D plot of the spectral data set, a spectrum plot of the first peak at the APEX, and the
chromatogram are displayed.

3D plot/Iso-electric plot

Zoom
To zoom toward the center of the plot, right-click while dragging the mouse downward.

To zoom away from the center of the plot, right-click while dragging the mouse upward.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the toolbar.
Icon Description

Displays the 3D plot.

Displays the iso-electric plot.

Displays the plot using a continuous color scheme, which provides the best on-screen display.

Displays the plot using a stepped interval color scheme, which redraws quickest.

Displays the plot using a grayscale color scheme, which shows how a black and white printout of the plot would look.

Displays the Time, Wavelength, and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair when the iso-electric plot is displayed.
Click on the iso-electric plot to update the wavelength on the chromatogram and the retention time on the spectrum.

Displays the print dialog for printing the plot as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the plot, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

11-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11
Right-click menu

Run Results Window

Right-click next to the toolbar then select Control Panel to access the following options for the 3D plot:

Option Description

The default is 20.0 degrees. This parameter modifies the angle of the Z axis in relation to the X axis. Setting a smaller
Elevation Angle
number causes the 3D view to tilt away from you. Setting a larger number causes the 3D view to tilt towards you.

The default is -34.5 degrees. Setting a larger angle causes the traces to become more stacked. Setting a smaller angle
Azimuth Angle
causes the traces to appear farther apart.

The default is 5.0; the valid range for this parameter is 1 to 10. Setting a smaller radius makes the plot larger. Setting a
View Radius larger radius makes the plot smaller.
View Radius is calculated as follows: Wavelength x Time x AU

Angular Width The default is 50 degrees. Setting a larger width makes the plot smaller. Setting a smaller width makes the plot larger.

Defaults Click to return the options to their default settings.

Apply Click to accept the selected options and apply them to the plot.

Legend Identifies the absorbance range associated with each color or pattern.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-15

 Results 11

Spectrum plot
Run Results Window

How to display and manipulate the spectrum plot

To display a spectrum at the APEX for a peak other than the first one found, double-click in the peak on the
chromatogram.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the spectrum toolbar.
Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the spectrum as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the spectrum, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the spectrum as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the spectrum.

Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the spectrum and the raw data and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

11-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

R e s u lt s 11
Right-click menu

Run Results Window

Right-click on the spectrum plot to access the following options:

Option Description

Point zoom Zooms in on a point and centers it in the spectrum as it is viewed on-screen.

Lasso zoom Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Cross hairs Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Chromatogram
Shows the chromatogram plot for collected traces.

Settings
Click the Settings button and then modify any or all of the parameters. After clicking OK, the
chromatogram updates to reflect those settings. These settings cannot be saved and will revert to the run
time settings upon exiting the Spectral Data window.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the graph toolbar.
Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the chromatogram as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the chromatogram, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-17

Run Results Window Results 11

Icon Description
Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Displays the minutes and absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the trace allows you to choose to show or hide.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Changes the orientation and color of the peak name labels and allows you to choose to show or hide the labels.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Moves one or more of the traces.

This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting or dividing
chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

Right-click menu
Right-click on the chromatogram to access the following options:

Option Description

Point zoom Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Lasso zoom Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Cross hairs Displays the minutes and absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Moves one or more of the traces.

Move channel This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting
or dividing chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

11-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Run Results Window

Select the Move Channel tool ( ) and then right-click on a trace to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Displays the Channel Offset Settings dialog which allows you to change the color of the displayed trace and
Set Offset
offset the race in either the X (Minutes) or Y (mVolts) direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to
Set Absorbance Offsets
the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the
Set All Absorbance Offsets traces to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the
Y-direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to
Set Minutes Offsets
the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the
Set All Minutes Offsets traces to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the
X-direction.

Move in Minutes Only Allows you to move the trace only horizontally.

Move in Absorbance Only Allows you to move the trace only vertically.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-19

 Results 11

Peak Purity Tab

Run Results Window

Use the Peak Purity tab to compare the apex spectrum to spectra across the peak to check the purity of the
peak. Peak Purity options are set in the Method Builder - Analysis - Peak Integration tab.
By default, the chromatogram, the sampled spectra for the first peak found, and a similarity curve are
displayed.

Chromatogram
Shows the chromatogram plot for collected traces.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the graph toolbar.
Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the chromatogram as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the chromatogram, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Displays the minutes and absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the trace allows you to choose to show or hide.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Changes the orientation and color of the peak name labels and allows you to choose to show or hide the labels.

11-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Run Results Window

Icon Description
Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Moves one or more of the traces.

This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting or dividing
chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

Right-click menu
Right-click on the chromatogram to access the following options:

Option Description

Point zoom Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Lasso zoom Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Cross hairs Displays the minutes and absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Moves one or more of the traces.

Move channel This option can be used to offset a chromatogram that is overlapping another. It can also be helpful when subtracting
or dividing chromatograms since you can adjust for varying retention times by aligning peaks in the chromatogram.

Select the Move Channel tool ( ) and then right-click on a trace to display the following menu options:

Menu Description

Displays the Channel Offset Settings dialog which allows you to change the color of the displayed trace and
Set Offset
offset the race in either the X (Minutes) or Y (mVolts) direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to
Set Absorbance Offsets
the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the Y-direction.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-21

Run Results Window Results 11

Menu Description

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the
Set All Absorbance Offsets traces to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the
Y-direction.

After moving the trace, this option provides an additional menu to zero the trace (Zero), return the trace to
Set Minutes Offsets
the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original setting (Original Setting) in the X-direction.

After moving multiple traces, this option provides an additional menu to zero the traces (Zero), return the
Set All Minutes Offsets traces to the previous setting (Last Setting), or revert to the original settings (Original Setting) in the
X-direction.

Move in Minutes Only Allows you to move the trace only horizontally.

Move in Absorbance Only Allows you to move the trace only vertically.

Spectrum plot
Displays the sampled spectra for the first peak found.

How to display and manipulate the spectrum plot

To display spectra for a peak other than the first one found, double-click in the peak on the chromatogram.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the spectrum toolbar.
Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the spectrum as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the spectrum, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Returns view to the last zoom.

11-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Run Results Window

Icon Description
Zooms in on a point and centers it in the spectrum as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the spectrum.

Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the spectrum and the raw data and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Right-click menu
Right-click on the spectrum plot to access the following options:

Option Description

Point zoom Zooms in on a point and centers it in the spectrum as it is viewed on-screen.

Lasso zoom Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Cross hairs Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-23

 Results 11

Similarity Curve plot

Run Results Window

The similarity curve is a representation of individual purity calculations during elution. The number of
points on the curve are the Number of Sampled Spectra selected in the Peak Purity options in the Method
Builder - Analysis - Peak Integration tab.

Toolbar
Choose available functions using the icons in the similarity curve toolbar.
Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the spectrum as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the spectrum, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the spectrum and the raw data and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Right-click menu
Right-click on the similarity curve plot to access the following options:

Option Description

Cross hairs Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

11-24 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Library Tab

Run Results Window

In TRILUTION LC you can assemble reference databases of spectral peaks of known compounds. You can
then search and match the database’s contents to the chromatogram for an unknown sample and report
the outcome.

You can perform spectral matching at run time or during post-run re-analysis.

Action Buttons
The following action buttons are located on the Library tab.

Action Button Description

Create a new library.

NEW
For more information, see Build a spectral library.

OPEN Open an existing library.

DELETE LIBRARY Opens the Delete Spectral Library dialog for selecting libraries to delete.

IMPORT Imports a .LCSL file.

EXPORT Exports the Spectral Library to a specified location as a .LCSL file.

Opens the Add Spectral Library Entry dialog for adding a peak spectrum to one or more spectral libraries.
ADD
For more information, see Build a spectral library.

Opens the Modify Spectral Library Entry dialog for modifying the comparison wavelength range or comment for an
MODIFY existing spectrum or for adding an existing spectrum to additional libraries.
For more information, see Modify a spectral library entry.

DELETE SPECTRUM Opens the Select Spectral Library dialog for selecting libraries from which the open spectrum should be deleted.

Opens the Search Spectral Library dialog for finding spectral matches for the selected peak.
SEARCH
For more information, see Search for spectral matches.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-25

 Results 11

Toolbar
Run Results Window

Choose available functions using the icons in the spectrum toolbar.

Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the spectrum as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the spectrum, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed spectrum.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the spectrum.

Displays the Wavelength and Absorbance at the intersect of the crosshair.

Changes the color of the spectrum and the raw data and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

Toggles showing peak spectrum and spectral match normalized and original.

11-26 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Build a spectral library

Run Results Window

1 From the Run Results, click Spectral Data and then select the Library tab.
2 Click New to create a new library. The New Spectral Library dialog is displayed.
3 In the New Spectral Library dialog, do the following:
a) In the Spectral Library Name field, type a name.
b) In the Short Description field (optional), type a brief description of the library.
c) In the Long Description field (optional), type a detailed description of the library.
d) Click OK. The new library opens.
4 To add a peak spectrum into the spectral library:
a) Select the name or number of the integrated peak from the drop-down list of Integrated Peaks.
b) Click Add. The Add Spectral Library Entry dialog is displayed.
5 In the New Spectral Library Entry dialog, do the following:
a) In the Peak Name field, change the peak name, if desired.
b) In the Comment field (optional), type a brief description of how data for the peak was acquired. For
example, include mobile phase e and column information.
6 In the Comparison Wavelength Range fields, specify the wavelengths TRILUTION LC will use when comparing
the spectral library peak against an unknown peak. The default values identify the entire wavelength range
collected during a run.
7 Select the check box next to the Library Name for each library to which the peak should be added.

To select all libraries, click .

To clear all selected libraries, click .
To invert the selection of libraries, click .

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-27

 Results 11

Search for spectral matches

Run Results Window

1 Select the name or number of one or more integrated peaks from the drop-down list of Integrated Peaks. As
each peak is selected, a tab displays above the spectrum.
2 Click Search. The Search Spectral Library dialog is displayed.
3 In the Search Spectral Library dialog, do the following:
a) Select the check box next to the Library Name for each library to be searched.

To select all libraries, click .

To clear all selected libraries, click .
To invert the selection of libraries, click .

b) For each peak spectrum to match, do one of the following:

• Select the check box next to the Peak Name and under All Peaks to search all spectral library peaks.
• Select the check box next to the Peak Name and under Time Period and then enter Start and End
times to limit the search to spectral library peaks whose retention times are within that time period.
c) In the Match Threshold field, indicate the smallest match value to be reported. A match value of 1000
indicates a perfect match.
4 Click OK to begin the search.
5 When the search completes, TRILUTION LC displays the five closest matches.
6 From the drop-down list of Library Matches, select a spectrum to overlay.
7 Click OK.

11-28 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

Modify a spectral library entry

Run Results Window

1 Open a spectral library.
2 Click to select a spectrum in the library. The spectrum opens graphically below in a tabbed view.
3 Click Modify. The Modify Spectral Library Entry dialog is displayed.
4 In the Modify Spectral Library dialog, do the following:
a) In the Comment field (optional), type a brief description of how data for the peak was acquired. For
example, include mobile phase e and column information.
b) In the Comparison Wavelength Range fields, specify the wavelengths TRILUTION LC will use when
comparing the spectral library peak against an unknown peak. The default values identify the entire
wavelength range collected during a run.
c) Select the check box next to the Library Name for each library to which the peak should be added.
d) In the Minimum WL and Maximum WL fields, specify the wavelength range for the spectrum to be saved to
the library.

To select all libraries, click .

To clear all selected libraries, click .
To invert the selection of libraries, click .

5 Click OK.

Delete a spectral library entry

1 Open a spectral library.
2 Click to select a spectrum in the library. The spectrum opens graphically below in a tabbed view.
3 Click Delete Spectrum. The Select Spectral Library dialog is displayed.
4 In the Select Spectral Library dialog, select the libraries from which the open spectrum should be deleted.

To select all libraries, click .

To clear all selected libraries, click .
To invert the selection of libraries, click .

5 Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-29

 Results 11

How to Overlay Results to Compare Sample Traces

How to Overlay Results to Compare Sample Traces

View Each Trace

To view each trace collected for a sample, select the data channel from the Device/Channel drop-down
list and the analysis from the Analysis drop-down menu for the trace to display.

Optionally, browse for an additional analysis from another Method in the Application by clicking .

Compare Traces for Different Samples in the Same Window

You can view traces collected for different samples in the same document window by doing the following:
1 Click Add to browse previous runs for sample and channel combinations
2 Double-click the run name and then select the injection number to overlay.
3 Repeat for each additional sample and channel combination to be added.
4 Click Close when finished to add them to the display.

Note: You cannot overlay or merge data into an Analysis Report.

Removing Overlaid Traces

To remove one or more overlaid traces from the graph, click Clear.

11-30 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Results 11

How to Analyze Data in a Different Way

How to Analyze Data in a Different Way

The Run Results window enables you to modify the Analysis in the Method so the data can be analyzed
using new conditions. It also lets you modify analysis parameters so you can see how the changes affect
the integration of peaks. You can then store the outcome of the analysis to an Analysis Report.

To modify the Analysis:

1 Click Edit.
2 Modify analysis parameters. You can:
• change the Peak Table.
• change integration events. See Peak Integration Tab.
• change channel scaling parameters. See Data Channel Settings.
• change report settings. See Report Tab.
3 Click OK to return to the Run Results window. The changes are not saved until you click Save or click Yes when
asked if you want to save data.
4 In the Run Results window, click Re-Analyze.
5 If re-analyzing a calibration, the Recalibration Amount window appears. Do any of the following:
• Add or remove samples from the calibration curve by selecting or clearing the check box next to the sample
number.
• Modify the actual and nominal amounts for each peak.
6 Click OK to accept any changes made and re-analyze or click Cancel to reject the changes made and re-analyze.
7 Optionally, manually adjust baselines and then click Save.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 11-31

 Results 11

Manual Baseline Adjustment

Manual Baseline Adjustment

You can view and modify the baseline generated for samples. Changes to the baseline affect peak
integration reporting in all reports except the Standard Summary report.

You can adjust a peak’s baseline, integrate a peak, or disable integration of a peak.

Adjusting a peak’s baseline. To adjust the baseline beneath a peak, use the Move Baseline tool ( ) to
select the peak and then point and drag the peak’s begin or end point.

Integrating a peak. To integrate a peak not currently integrated, use the Insert Baseline tool ( ). Move
the mouse pointer to the starting point for the peak. Click and drag the mouse pointer below a peak to
draw its baseline. Release the mouse button to set the end point for the peak.

Removing peak integration. To inhibit integration of a peak, use the Move Baseline tool ( ) to select
the peak and then click the Delete Baseline icon ( ).

To adjust the baseline:

1 Select either the begin point (up triangle) and end point (down triangle) for each integrated peak.
2 Drag to the desired location then release.

a) To snap all point back to the baseline, click the Snap Baseline icon ( ).

b) To snap points back to the baseline, select the Snap Baseline Endpoint tool ( ) and then click each point
to snap to the baseline.
3 Click Analyze Manual Changes.
a) Click Yes to save data.
b) Click No to save data later. To save data later, click Save.

Re-analyzing after a manual baseline adjustment cancels any baseline changes.

11-32 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Calibrations 12

Calibration plots are generated during an HPLC run or a batch re-analysis of calibrator samples. Calibrations are accessed from the Results window by
selecting the Calibrations tab. For more information about the Results Window, see Results Window in Chapter 11, Results.

In this chapter, you will learn:

• How to View Calibrations
• How to Recalibrate and Re-analyze

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 12-1

 Calibrations 12

Results Window - Calibration Tab

Results Window - Calibration Tab

Results Window - Calibration Tab

Double-click the run name (channel) to show the calibration plot which is used to calculate amounts for
unknown samples. Examine the calibration curve generated for each standard peak. Viewing calibration
plots is especially important if quadratic or cubic was the curve fitting method used to generate them.

For more information about setting up a run as a calibration, see Calibration.

12-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Calibrations 12

Calibration Window

Calibration Window
The Calibration window

Graph Pane
The graph pane shows the calibration plot.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 12-3

 Calibrations 12

Toolbar
Calibration Window

Choose available functions using the icons in the graph toolbar.

Icon Description
Displays the print dialog for printing the chromatogram as it is currently viewed on-screen.

Copies the chromatogram, as it is currently viewed on-screen, to the clipboard.

Scales both axes to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales the X-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Scales Y-axis to minimum and maximum values for the displayed traces.

Returns view to the last zoom.

Zooms in on a point and centers it in the chromatogram as it is viewed on-screen.

Returns view to last zoom (multiple undo zoom).

Returns view to next zoom (multiple redo zoom).

Enlarges lassoed portion of the graph.

Displays the minutes and mVolts at the intersect of the crosshair.

Displays the Peak Analysis Result window.

Changes the color of the traces and Mobile Phase and allows you to choose to show or hide each.

Sets the lower limit, upper limit, increment value, and color for each axis.

Changes the orientation and color of the peak name labels and allows you to choose to show or hide the label.

Toggles showing or hiding the grid and allows you to change the color of the major (aligned with numbered tick marks) and/or
minor (positioned between the numbered tick marks) grid lines.

Toggles showing or hiding the legend.

12-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Calibrations 12

How to View Calibrations

How to View Calibrations

View Calibration Curve
To view the calibration curve, select an Analysis and a named peak.

Calibration Report
This report comprises seven parts: Annotation (includes optionally a heading, listing of the analysis tasks,
listing of the control tasks, details about the data channel settings, the peak table, a listing of the control
error conditions, and a listing of the analysis error conditions), Graph (chromatogram), Sample
Table (user-specified column contents, may include custom calculations), and Run Variables (a listing of
values for all variables used in the application run), Calibration Plot (the calibration curve data generated
by the standards), and Calibration Plot Table (user-specified column contents for standards and controls,
may include custom calculations).

Viewing the Calibration Report

To view results from a chromatographic run in which calibrators were injected, you can preview the
Calibration Report to view calibration information.
Click Preview to view report information.

The Calibration Report appears, displaying the report information selected on the
Method Builder|Analysis|Report tab from the selected analysis for the selected peak.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 12-5

 Calibrations 12

How to Recalibrate and Re-analyze

How to Recalibrate and Re-analyze

The Recalibration window allows you to add or remove samples from the calibration curve. You can also
modify the actual and nominal amounts for each peak. The outcome of the recalibration is stored to a
Calibration Report.

To modify the Calibration:

1 Access the Run Results window by double-clicking the run name (channel) in the Results tab of the
Results window.
2 Click Re-Analyze.
3 The Recalibration Amount window appears. Do any of the following:
• Add or remove samples from the calibration curve by selecting or clearing the check box next to the sample
number.
• Modify the Actual Amount and/or Nominal Amount for each peak.
4 Click OK to accept any changes made and re-analyze or click Cancel to reject the changes made and re-analyze.

Export/Archive/Restore Calibrations
For information on exporting calibrations, see How to Export Run Results.

For information on archiving calibrations, see How to Archive Run Results.

For information on restoring calibrations, refer to How to Restore Run Results.

12-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Working with Variables 13

Variables accept run time values to perform actions. A Variable is a named container that accepts values for the properties specified at the Task level or
Method level.

The Variable Dialog

In this chapter, you will learn How to Create a New Variable.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 13-1

 Working with Variables 13

How to Create a New Variable

How to Create a New Variable

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Task Builder, from the Operators palette, drag and drop the Variable operator into the Workspace.
The Variable window appears.

• In the Task Builder, click . The Variable List dialog appears. Click New Variable. The Variable dialog
appears.

• In the Method Builder, click . The Variable List dialog appears. Click New Variable. The Variable
dialog appears.
2 In the Variable dialog, do the following:
a) In the Variable Name field, type a unique Variable name.
b) Select a Variable Type from the drop-down provided.
c) Select or type the default value for the Variable Type.
d) Select ‘Show In Parent’ to display the Variable in the Method Builder (if creating a Task variable) or in the
Sample List (if creating a Method variable).
e) Select ‘Auto Increment in Sample List’ to advance one well in each iteration that uses the variable. This
option only functions for Variable Type Well.
f ) Optionally, add values to the Value List by typing the value and then clicking Add. Values entered in this list
display as drop-down values in the Task or Method in which the variable is used.
3 Do one of the following:
• Click New to add additional variables.
• Click OK to exit the Variable window.

13-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Working with Variables 13

View and/or Modify Variable Properties

View and/or Modify Variable Properties

1 Do one of the following:

• In the Task Builder, click . The Variable List dialog appears.

• In the Method Builder, click . The Variable List dialog appears.

2 Select a variable from the variable list and do one of the following:
• Double-click the variable.
• Right-click on the variable and choose Modify from the submenu.
• Click Modify.

The Variable window displays information for the variable.

Delete Variables
1 Do one of the following:

• In the Task Builder, click . The Variable List dialog appears.

• In the Method Builder, click . The Variable List dialog appears.

2 Select a variable from the variable list and do one of the following:
• Right-click on the variable and choose Delete from the submenu.
• Click Delete.
• Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.

The selected Variable is deleted.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 13-3

 Reports 14

The Reports menu is used to generate reports. You can view and print reports directly or export them to rich text format (*.rtf), Adobe® PDF (*.pdf ),
Microsoft® Word (*.doc), or Microsoft® Excel (*.xls) file types for further study and formatting.

You can generate the following types of reports:

• Task Report
• Run Report
• Project Report
• Method Report
• Sample Tracking Report
• Analysis Report
• Summary Report
• Calibration Report

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-1

 Reports 14

The Reports Window

The Reports Window

To open a Report window, on the TRILUTION LC Menu, click Reports. The Reports window is displayed.

The Reports window

14-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Reports Overview

The Reports Window

You can generate the following types of reports:

Report Description

This report comprises three parts: a brief summation of the task information (name, version, description, modified date, and created date), variables defined for the task (Variables),
Task Report
and the un-timed, sequential steps (Steps).

This report comprises a brief summation of the application run information (project name, application name, run name, run date, run by) and the aspirate and dispense actions for
Sample Tracking Report
each sample and fraction.

This report comprises five parts: a brief summation of the application run information (project name, application name, run name, run date, run by), sample list details (including values
Run Report
for variables) captured at the end of the run, initial volumes, fraction re-injection criteria, and minimum fraction sites criteria.

This report comprises five parts: Annotation (includes optionally a heading, listing of the analysis tasks, listing of the control tasks, details about the data channel settings, the
peak table, a listing of the control error conditions, and a listing of the analysis error conditions), Graph (chromatogram), Spectrum (only if using a diode array detector),
Sample Table (user-specified column contents, may include custom calculations), and Run Variables (a listing of values for all variables used in the application run). Each part is optional
Analysis Report and can be omitted by clearing its check box on the Method Builder|Analysis|Report tab.
The analysis report can be generated and viewed for an individual sample or for a range of samples.
Optionally, a company logo and address can be added to this report using the Method Builder - Analysis - Report Tab - Company Logo & Address.

This report comprises three parts: a brief summation of the project information (name, description, modified date, and created date), a brief summation of the application information
Project Report for each application in the project (name, description, modified date, and created date), and a brief summation of the method information for each method in each application in the
project (name, description, modified date, created date, and names of the configuration, bed layout, control, and analysis).

This report comprises five parts: a brief summation of the run and selected data channel (project name, application name, method name, method version, data instrument name, data
channel name, analysis name, report name, run name, and run date), timed integration task listing (Analysis Tasks), details about the data channel settings (Data Channel Settings),
Summary Report a listing of values for all variables used in the application run (Method Variables), the Peak Table, and a Summary Table.
The Summary Report can be generated and viewed as an Unknown Summary Report or a Standard Summary Report.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-3

The Reports Window Reports 14

Report Description

This report comprises six parts: a brief summation of the method information (name, version, descriptions, modified date, and created date), configuration information, bed layout
information (racks used), control information (timed sequential task listing), analysis information (timed integration task listing), and report information (options used in the Analysis
Method Report and Calibration reports).
Optionally, a company logo and address can be added to this report using the Method Builder - Analysis - Report Tab - Company Logo & Address.

This report comprises seven parts: Annotation (includes optionally a heading, listing of the analysis tasks, listing of the control tasks, details about the data channel settings, the
peak table, a listing of the control error conditions, and a listing of the analysis error conditions), Graph (chromatogram), Sample Table (user-specified column contents, may include
custom calculations), and Run Variables (a listing of values for all variables used in the application run), Calibration Plot (the calibration curve data generated by the standards), and
Calibration Report Calibration Plot Table (user-specified column contents for standards and controls, may include custom calculations).
The Calibration Report can be generated and viewed for each peak.
Optionally, a company logo and address can be added to this report using the Method Builder - Analysis - Report Tab - Company Logo & Address.

14-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Task Report

The Reports Window

This report comprises three parts: a brief summation of the task information (name, version, description,
modified date, and created date), variables defined for the task (Variables), and the un-timed, sequential
steps (Steps). Refer to the example on the next page.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-5

The Reports Window Reports 14

14-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Run Report

The Reports Window

This report comprises five parts: a brief summation of the application run information (project name,
application name, run name, run date, run by), sample list details (including values for variables) captured
at the end of the run, initial volumes, fraction re-injection criteria, and minimum fraction sites criteria.
Refer to the example on the next page.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-7

The Reports Window Reports 14

14-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Project Report

The Reports Window

This report comprises three parts: a brief summation of the project information (name, description,
modified date, and created date), a brief summation of the application information for each application in
the project (name, description, modified date, and created date), and a brief summation of the method
information for each method in each application in the project (name, description, modified date, created
date, and names of the configuration, bed layout, control, and analysis). Refer to the example on the next
page.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-9

The Reports Window Reports 14

14-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Method Report

The Reports Window

This report comprises six parts: a brief summation of the method information (name, version,
descriptions, modified date, and created date), configuration information, bed layout information (racks
used), control information (timed sequential task listing), analysis information (timed integration task
listing), and report information (options used in the Analysis and Calibration reports).

Optionally, a company logo and address can be added to this report using the Method Builder - Analysis
- Report Tab - Company Logo & Address.

Refer to the example on the next page.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-11

The Reports Window Reports 14

14-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Sample Tracking Report

The Reports Window

This report comprises a brief summation of the application run information (project name, application
name, run name, run date, run by) and the aspirate and dispense actions for each sample and fraction.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-13

 Reports 14

Analysis Report
The Reports Window

This report comprises five parts: Annotation (includes optionally a heading, listing of the analysis tasks,
listing of the control tasks, details about the data channel settings, the peak table, a listing of the control
error conditions, and a listing of the analysis error conditions), Graph (chromatogram), Spectrum (only if
using a diode array detector), Sample Table (user-specified column contents, may include custom
calculations), and Run Variables (a listing of values for all variables used in the application run). Each part
is optional and can be omitted by clearing its check box on the Method Builder|Analysis|Report tab.

The analysis report can be generated and viewed for an individual sample or for a range of samples.

Optionally, a company logo and address can be added to this report using the Method Builder - Analysis
- Report Tab - Company Logo & Address.

Refer to the example on the next page.

14-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

The Reports Window

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-15
 Reports 14

Summary Report
The Reports Window

This report comprises five parts: a brief summation of the run and selected data channel (project name,
application name, method name, method version, data instrument name, data channel name, analysis
name, report name, run name, and run date), timed integration task listing (Analysis Tasks), details about
the data channel settings (Data Channel Settings), a listing of values for all variables used in the
application run (Method Variables), the Peak Table, and a Summary Table.
The Summary Report can be generated and viewed as an Unknown Summary Report or a Standard
Summary Report. Refer to the example on the next page.

14-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

The Reports Window

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-17
 Reports 14

Calibration Report
The Reports Window

This report comprises seven parts: Annotation (includes optionally a heading, listing of the analysis tasks,
listing of the control tasks, details about the data channel settings, the peak table, a listing of the control
error conditions, and a listing of the analysis error conditions), Graph (chromatogram), Sample
Table (user-specified column contents, may include custom calculations), and Run Variables (a listing of
values for all variables used in the application run), Calibration Plot (the calibration curve data generated
by the standards), and Calibration Plot Table (user-specified column contents for standards and controls,
may include custom calculations).

The Calibration Report can be generated and viewed for each peak.

Optionally, a company logo and address can be added to this report using the Method Builder - Analysis
- Report Tab - Company Logo & Address.

Refer to the example on the next page.

14-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

The Reports Window

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-19
 Reports 14

View a Report
View a Report

In the Reports window, select the button that corresponds to the report to be viewed.
Select the parameters for the report from the drop-down menus.

Viewing Toolbar
The toolbar provides quick access to the viewing features of the Reports window.
The Export button exports the report to a file type.
For more information, see Export a Report.

The Print button prints the report.

The Refresh button refreshes the report.

The Page buttons allow the user to move between the pages of the report

The Go To Page option allows the user to select a specific page in the report to view.

The Find Text option allows the user to jump to specified text in the report.

The Zoom option allows the user to zoom in on or out on the report.

14-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Reports 14

Export a Report

Export a Report
1 On the Reports window, click the Export ( ) button. The Export Report window is displayed.

The Export Report window

2 Select a destination folder so that it appears in the Save in box.
3 Type a file name into the File name box.
4 Select the file type from the Save as type box, by clicking on the down arrow and then selecting the format.
5 Click Save to save the document. A message box will indicate when the export has completed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide 14-21

List of Tasks A

The Tasks palette lists the pre-defined Tasks with properties. These Tasks are read-only. Few properties are common to all the Tasks.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-1

List of Tasks A
Instrument Name

151/152 Detectors Tasks GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks

155/156 Detectors Tasks 305/307 Pumps Tasks

171/172 Diode Array Detectors Tasks 306 Pump Tasks

202C Fraction Collector Tasks 321 HPLC Pump Tasks

206/FC 203B/FC 204/PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks 322 HPLC Pump Tasks

Fraction Collection System Tasks 331/333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks

819 Injection Module Tasks 332/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks

845Z Injection Module Tasks VALVEMATE®/VALVEMATE® II Tasks

215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks 402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks

231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks 506C System Interface Tasks

233 XL Sample Injector Tasks Auxiliary Tasks

234 Autoinjector Tasks Mobile Phase Tasks

235 Autoinjector Tasks All Tasks (in alphabetical order)

GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks

GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks

A-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
151/152 Detectors Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 151 and 152 UV/VIS Detectors.
151/152 Detectors Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

151 152 Detector Settings

This Task sets the peak width, wavelength, and sensitivities for the 151 or 152 UV/VIS Detector.

Detector Autozero Channel

This Task sets the output trace of each channel on Detector to zero.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Set Detector Mode

This Task sets the detection mode on a 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector.

Set Peak Width

This Task sets the Peak Width and Mode on the selected Detector.

Set Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels on the selected Detector.

Set Wavelength
Sets the wavelengths to be monitored based on the Mode selected for the selected Detector.

Start Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

151/152 Detectors Tasks Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-3

List of Tasks A
151/152 Detectors Tasks (Continued)

Gilson Task Name and Description

Turn Lamp Off

This Task turns off power to the lamps while maintaining power to the Detector.

Turn Lamp On
This Task turns the UV and visible lamps on for the specified Detector.

Write to Display
This Task displays a message in the front panel display of the selected instrument.
Note: Write to Display is only available for the 151 Detector as the 152 Detector does not have a front panel display.
151/152 Detectors Tasks Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
155/156 Detectors Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 155 and 156 UV/VIS Detectors.
155/156 Detectors Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

155 156 Detector Settings

This Task sets the mode, peak width, sensitivities, and wavelengths for the 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector.

155 156 Scan Initiation

This Task sets the 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector for an automatic scan.

Detector Autozero Channel

This Task sets the output trace of each channel on Detector to zero.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Set Detector Mode

This Task sets the detection mode on a 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector.

Set Peak Width

This Task sets the Peak Width and Mode on the selected Detector.

Set Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels on the selected Detector.

Set Wavelength
Sets the wavelengths to be monitored based on the Mode selected for the selected Detector.

Start Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

155/156 Detectors Tasks Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-5

List of Tasks A
155/156 Detectors Tasks (Continued)

Stop Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

Turn Lamp Off

This Task turns off power to the lamps while maintaining power to the Detector.

Turn Lamp On
This Task turns the UV and visible lamps on for the specified Detector.

Write to Display
This Task displays a message in the front panel display of the selected instrument.
Note: Write to Display is only available for the 155 Detector as the 156 Detector does not have a front panel display
155/156 Detectors Tasks Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
171/172 Diode Array Detectors Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 171 and 172 Diode Array Detectors.
171/172 Diode Array Detectors Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

171 172 Detector Settings

Sets the DAD wavelengths and bandwidths to be monitored based on each selected Channel for the selected Detector.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Start Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

Turn Lamp Off

This Task turns off power to the lamps while maintaining power to the Detector.

Turn Lamp On
This Task turns the UV and visible lamps on for the specified Detector.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

171/172 Diode Array Detectors Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-7

List of Tasks A
202C Fraction Collector Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 202C Fraction Collector.
202C Fraction Collector Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Fraction Collector

This Task homes the specified Fraction Collector.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

202C Fraction Collector Tasks Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
202C Fraction Collector Tasks (Continued)

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

202C Fraction Collector Tasks Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-9

List of Tasks A
206/FC 203B/FC 204/ PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the FC 203B, FC 204, 206, and PREPFC Fraction Collectors.
206/FC 203B/FC 204/PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Fraction Collector

This Task homes the specified Fraction Collector.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

206/FC 203B/FC 204/ PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
206/FC 203B/FC 204/PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks (Continued)

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

206/FC 203B/FC 204/ PREPFC Fraction Collectors Tasks Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-11

List of Tasks A
Fraction Collection System Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the Fraction Collection System.
Fraction Collection System Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Fraction Collector

This Task homes the specified Fraction Collector.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

Fraction Collection System Tasks Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Fraction Collection System Tasks (Continued)

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Fraction Collection System Tasks Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-13

List of Tasks A
819 Injection Module Tasks
The table below lists tasks for the 819 Injection Module.
819 Injection Module Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

215 819 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task is used when doing injection and fraction collection on the same bed. It performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample
loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

819 Injection Module Tasks

A-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
845Z Injection Module Tasks
The table below lists tasks for the 845Z Injection Module.
845Z Injection Module Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

845Z Prep Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop.

845Z Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop and also rinses the low pressure fraction collection valve.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

845Z Injection Module Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-15

List of Tasks A
215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 215 Liquid Handler and 215 Liquid Handler without Pump.
215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

215 819 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task is used when doing injection and fraction collection on the same bed. It performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample
loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

845Z Prep Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop.

845Z Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop and also rinses the low pressure fraction collection valve.

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Collection and Travel Depth

This Task customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 1 of 4)

A-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks (Continued)

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 2 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-17

List of Tasks A
215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks (Continued)

Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 3 of 4)

A-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks (Continued)

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

Voltage On - Off
This Task opens and powers off or closes and powers on a specified contact on a specified liquid handler.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

Write to Display
This Task displays a message in the front panel display of the selected instrument.

215 Liquid Handler/215 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 4 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-19

List of Tasks A
231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 231 and 232 XL Sample Injectors.
231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks (Continued)

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-21

List of Tasks A
231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks (Continued)

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

XL Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

XL Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

231/232 XL Sample Injectors Tasks Table (Page 3 of 3)

A-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
233 XL Sample Injector Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 233 XL Sample Injector.
233 XL Sample Injector Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

This task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of the fraction collection valve.

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Collection and Travel Depth

This Task customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

233 XL Sample Injector Tasks Table (Page 1 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-23

List of Tasks A
233 XL Sample Injector Tasks (Continued)

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Fraction Collector

This Task homes the specified Fraction Collector.

Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

233 XL Sample Injector Tasks Table (Page 2 of 4)

A-24 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
233 XL Sample Injector Tasks (Continued)

Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

233 XL Sample Injector Tasks Table (Page 3 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-25

List of Tasks A
233 XL Sample Injector Tasks (Continued)

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

XL Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

XL Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

233 XL Sample Injector Tasks Table (Page 4 of 4)

A-26 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
234 Autoinjector Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 234 Autoinjector.
234 Autoinjector Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

234 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

234 Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

234 Autoinjector Tasks Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-27

List of Tasks A
234 Autoinjector Tasks (Continued)

Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

234 Autoinjector Tasks Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-28 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
234 Autoinjector Tasks (Continued)

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

234 Autoinjector Tasks Table (Page 3 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-29

List of Tasks A
235 Autoinjector Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 235 Autoinjector.
235 Autoinjector Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

235S Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

235S Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

235T Injection Rinse

This Task is used to rinse the injection port on a 235 Autoinjector with tee injection port.

235T Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection on a 235 Autoinjector with a tee injection port.

235T Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection on a 235 Autoinjector with tee injection port.

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

235 Autoinjector Tasks Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-30 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235 Autoinjector Tasks (Continued)

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

235 Autoinjector Tasks Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-31

List of Tasks A
235 Autoinjector Tasks (Continued)

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

Voltage On - Off
This Task opens and powers off or closes and powers on a specified contact on a specified liquid handler.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

235 Autoinjector Tasks Table (Page 3 of 3)

A-32 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the GX-271 Analytical Liquid Handler and GX-271 Prep Liquid Handler.
GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Collection and Travel Depth

This Task customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

GX Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

GX Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 1 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-33

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks (Continued)

GX Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes a GX-Series liquid handler and GX Solvent System.

GX Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe into the injection port prior to rinsing.

GX Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

GX Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

GX Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

GX Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

GX Prime
This Task moves to the rinse station and then primes the transfer tubing with reservoir solvent.

GX Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 2 of 4)

A-34 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks (Continued)

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

GX-271 Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

This Task performs a total loop injection.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 3 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-35

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks (Continued)

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Voltage On - Off
This Task opens and powers off or closes and powers on a specified contact on a specified liquid handler.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

GX-271 Analytical/GX-271 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 4 of 4)

A-36 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump.
GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Collection and Travel Depth

This Task customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 1 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-37

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks (Continued)

Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 2 of 4)

A-38 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks (Continued)

Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

Prep Injection with Collection

This Task is used when doing injection and fraction collection on the same bed. It performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample
loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 3 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-39

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks (Continued)

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Total Loop Injection Overfill

This Task performs a total loop injection.

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

Voltage On - Off
This Task opens and powers off or closes and powers on a specified contact on a specified liquid handler.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

GX-271 Liquid Handler without Pump Tasks Table (Page 4 of 4)

A-40 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the GX-281 Analytical Liquid Handler and GX-281 Prep Liquid Handler.
GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

Aspirate
This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to
the well before aspirating liquid.

Collection and Travel Depth

This Task customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Dispense
This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

GX Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes with liquid or air.

GX Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from the wells of the sample zone and then
dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 1 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-41

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks (Continued)

GX Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes a GX-Series liquid handler and GX Solvent System.

GX Injection Rinse
This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe into the injection port prior to rinsing.

GX Inside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

GX Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

GX Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

GX Outside Rinse
This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

GX Prime
This Task moves to the rinse station and then primes the transfer tubing with reservoir solvent.

GX Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 2 of 4)

A-42 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks (Continued)

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

GX-281 Rack Scan

This Task scans the racks on the locator plate of the GX-281 Liquid Handler for the purpose of ensuring that the rack hardware setup matches the software rack (Bed Layout) setup.

GX-281 Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop.

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 3 of 4)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-43

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks (Continued)

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Voltage On - Off
This Task opens and powers off or closes and powers on a specified contact on a specified liquid handler.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

Write to Display
This Task displays a message in the front panel display of the selected instrument.

GX-281 Analytical/GX-281 Prep Liquid Handlers Tasks Table (Page 4 of 4)

A-44 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
305/307 Pumps Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 305 and 307 Pumps.
305/307 Pumps Tasks

Gilson Task Name

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

305/307 Pumps Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-45

List of Tasks A
306 Pump Tasks
The table below lists the task for the 306 Pump.
306 Pump Tasks

Gilson Task Name

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

306 Pump Tasks

A-46 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
321 HPLC Pump Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 321 HPLC Pump.
321 HPLC Pump Tasks

Gilson Task Name

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Solvent Valve Position

This Task switches the solvent valve on the specified pump.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

321 HPLC Pump Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-47

List of Tasks A
322 HPLC Pump Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 322 HPLC Pump.
322 HPLC Pump Tasks

Gilson Task Name

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Solvent Valve Position

This Task switches the solvent valve on the specified pump.

322 HPLC Pump Tasks

A-48 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
331/333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 331 and 333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps.
331/333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks

Gilson Task Name

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Solvent Valve Position

This Task switches the solvent valve on the specified pump.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

331/333 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-49

List of Tasks A
332/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 332/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps.
332/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks

Gilson Task Name

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Solvent Valve Position

This Task switches the solvent valve on the specified pump.

332/334 Prep-Scale HPLC Pumps Tasks

A-50 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
VALVEMATE®/VALVEMATE® II Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the VALVEMATE and VALVEMATE II.
VALVEMATE®/VALVEMATE® II Tasks

Gilson Task Name

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Switch VALVEMATE
This Task changes the valve position on a VALVEMATE.

VALVEMATE®/VALVEMATE® II Tasks Table

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-51

List of Tasks A
402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 402 Pump Single, 402 Pump Dual, and 402 Pump Dual with Tee.
402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

402 Pump Single/402 Pump Dual/402 Pump Dual with Tee Tasks

A-52 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Virtual Pumping System Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the Virtual Pumping System.
Virtual Pumping System Tasks

Gilson Task Name and Description

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Prime Dilutor
This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified zone for the number of cycles.

Virtual Pumping System Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-53

List of Tasks A
506C System Interface Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for the 506C System Interface.
506C System Interface Tasks

Gilson Task Name

506C Autozero Channel

This Task sets the output trace of the specified channels on the System Interface to zero.

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait.

506C System Interface Tasks

A-54 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Auxiliary Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for Auxiliary.
Auxiliary Tasks

Gilson Task Name

Execute
This Task invokes an external application.

GSIOC
This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

Prompt
This Task displays a prompt dialog with the selected message.

Start Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting data. This Task has no properties to set. It is identified by the following image when added to the Control in the Method ( ).

Stop Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting data. This Task has no properties to set. It is identified by the following image when added to the Control in the Method ( ).

Wait Time
This Task waits a specified length of time and displays an optional message. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the Method from executing during the wait

Sync
This task coordinates steps in a Task with a time in a Method.

Conditional Fraction Collection

This task can be used in place of the Fraction Collection Settings Task. It allows for setting multiple parameters for one or more channels at once.

Auxiliary Tasks

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-55

List of Tasks A
Mobile Phase Tasks
The table below lists the tasks for Mobile Phase.
Mobile Phase Tasks

Gilson Task Name

Gradient Task
This task adds a gradient Mobile Phase to the control.
Gradient Task with Variables
This task adds a gradient with variables Mobile Phase to the control.
Isocratic
This task adds an isocratic Mobile Phase to the control.
Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out
This task adds a linear gradient with column wash out Mobile Phase to the control.
Linear Gradient with No Column Wash Out
This task adds a linear gradient with no column wash out Mobile Phase to the Control.
Multi Linear Gradient with Step and Column Wash Out
This task adds a multi linear gradient with step and column wash out Mobile Phase to the Control.
Multi Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out
This task adds a multiple linear gradient with column wash out Mobile Phase to the Control.
Mobile Phase Tasks

Gradient Task
This task adds a gradient Mobile Phase to the control.

Use the following steps to add this task to the control:

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Gradient Task and drop it in the workspace.
3 In the Flow Rate box, type the desired total flow rate.
4 In the Start Time box, type the time at which the pumps will begin pumping at the specified flow and composition conditions.
5 In the End Time box, type the time at which the pumps will stop pumping at the specified flow and composition conditions.
6 In the Concentration % column, type the percent composition for the first pump in the Property column. The software calculates the percent composition for
additional pumps for you.

A-56 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Gradient Task with Variables
This task adds a gradient with variables Mobile Phase to the control.

How to use the Gradient Task with Variables

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Gradient Task with Variables and drop it in the workspace.
3 In the Flow Rate box, type the desired total flow rate or a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the
Sample List. For more information, see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 In the Start Time box, type the time at which the pumps will begin pumping at the specified flow and composition conditions or type a variable. A variable is created
by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information, see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
5 In the End Time box, type the time at which the pumps will stop pumping at the specified flow and composition conditions or type a variable. A variable is created by
typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information, see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
6 In the Concentration % column, type the percent composition for the first pump in the Property column. The software calculates the percent composition for
additional pumps for you.
Or type a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information, see How to
Create and Use Control Variables.

For an example of how to set up a gradient using variables, view the Quick Start Tutorial, supplied with TRILUTION LC.

Isocratic
This task adds an isocratic Mobile Phase to the control.

Use the following steps to add this task to the control:

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Isocratic template and drop it in the workspace.
3 Specify the flow rate or a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information,
see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 Graphically change Concentration % by dragging line.
5 Graphically change Start or End Time by dragging the Start/End nodes.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-57

List of Tasks A
Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out
This task adds a linear gradient with column wash out Mobile Phase to the control.

Use the following steps to add this task to the control:

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out template and drop it in the workspace.
3 Specify the flow rate or a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information,
see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 Graphically change Concentration % by dragging line.
5 Graphically change Start or End Time by dragging the Start/End nodes.

Linear Gradient with No Column Wash Out

This task adds a linear gradient with no column wash out Mobile Phase to the Control.

Use the following steps to add this task to the control:

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Linear Gradient with No Column Wash Out and drop it in the workspace.
3 Specify the flow rate or a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information,
see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 Graphically change Concentration % by dragging line.
5 Graphically change Start or End Time by dragging the Start/End nodes.

Multi Linear Gradient with Step and Column Wash Out

This task adds a multi linear gradient with step and column wash out Mobile Phase to the Control.

Use the following steps to add this task to the control:

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Multi Linear Gradient with Step and Column Wash Out template and drop it in the workspace.
3 Specify the flow rate or a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information,
see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 Graphically change Concentration % by dragging line.
5 Graphically change Start or End Time by dragging the Start/End nodes.

A-58 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Multi Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out
This task adds a multiple linear gradient with column wash out Mobile Phase to the Control.

Use the following steps to add this task to the control:

1 Ensure that you have Mobile Phase pumps in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Multi Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out template and drop it in the workspace.
3 Specify the flow rate or a variable. A variable is created by typing # and then the variable name. The variable value is satisfied in the Sample List. For more information,
see How to Create and Use Control Variables.
4 Graphically change Concentration % by dragging line.
5 Graphically change Start or End Time by dragging the Start/End nodes.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-59

List of Tasks A
All Tasks (in alphabetical order)
All Tasks (in alphabetical order)

Gilson Task Name

151 152 Detector Settings GSIOC Linear Gradient with No Column Wash Out Transfer
155 156 Detector Settings GX Add Diluent Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Turn Lamp Off
155 156 Scan Initiation GX Dilute Mix with Air Turn Lamp On
171 172 Detector Settings GX Home Liquid Handler Mix with Liquid Voltage On - Off
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection GX Injection Rinse Move to Sample Location Wait for Contact
215 819 Partial Loop Injection GX Inside Rinse Multi Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out Wait Time
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection GX Mix with Air Multi Linear Gradient with Step and Column Wash Out Write to Display
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection GX Mix with Liquid Outside Rinse XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection
234 Partial Loop Injection GX Outside Rinse Partial Loop Injection XL Partial Loop Injection
234 Total Loop Injection GX Prime Prep Injection with Collection XL Total Loop Injection
235S Partial Loop Injection GX Transfer Prime Dilutor
235S Total Loop Injection GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Prompt
235T Injection Rinse GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Set Detector Mode
235T Partial Loop Injection GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Set Fraction Site
235T Total Loop Injection GX-271 Total Loop Injection Set Multiple Bed Collection
506C Autozero Channel GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Set Non Peak Per Tube
845Z Prep Injection GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Set Peak Level
845Z Prep Injection with Collection GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Set Peak Per Tube
Add Diluent GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Set Peak Slope
Aspirate GX-281 Rack Scan Set Peak Width
Collection and Travel Depth GX-281 Total Loop Injection Set Sensitivity
Conditional Fraction Collection GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Set Wavelength
Contact Open-Close GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Solvent Valve Position
Detector Autozero Channel Home Fraction Collector Start Data Collection
Dilute Home Liquid Handler Start Fraction Collection
Dispense Injection Rinse Stop Data Collection
Execute Injection Valve Position Stop Fraction Collection
Fraction Collection Settings Inside Rinse Switch VALVEMATE
Gradient Task Isocratic Sync
Gradient Task with Variables Linear Gradient with Column Wash Out Total Loop Injection Overfill
All Tasks (in alphabetical order)

A-60 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
151 152 Detector Settings

151 152 Detector Settings

This Task sets the peak width, wavelength, and sensitivities for the 151 or 152 UV/VIS Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

151 152 Detector Settings Properties

151 152 Detector Settings Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

The detector must know the width of the narrowest peak in your run. The detector uses this information to optimize the presentation of peaks and
to minimize baseline noise.
Peak Width 4 sec
To set the peak width accurately, run a chromatogram using the minimum peak width setting. Measure the width at half height of the narrowest peak.
Valid range is 0 and 4–99 seconds.

Sensitivity 1 One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
151 152 Detector Settings Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-61

 List of Tasks A
151 152 Detector Settings Properties (Continued)
151 152 Detector Settings

Property Name Description Default Value

Sensitivity 2 One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS

Wavelength The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm

151 152 Detector Settings Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-62 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
155 156 Detector Settings

155 156 Detector Settings

This Task sets the mode, peak width, sensitivities, and wavelengths for the 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

155 156 Detector Settings Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-63

 List of Tasks A
155 156 Detector Settings Properties
155 156 Detector Settings

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Detector Mode Select from Single Mode, Dual Mode, or Scan Mode. Dual Mode

The detector must know the width of the narrowest peak in your run. The detector uses this information to optimize the
presentation of peaks and to minimize baseline noise.
Single Mode
To set the peak width accurately, run a chromatogram using the minimum peak width setting. Measure the width at half 4 sec
Peak Width
height of the narrowest peak.
Valid range is 0 and 4–99 seconds.

Single Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
Sensitivity 1

Single Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
Sensitivity 2

Single Mode
The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 1

The detector must know the width of the narrowest peak in your run. The detector uses this information to optimize the
presentation of peaks and to minimize baseline noise.
Dual Mode
To set the peak width accurately, run a chromatogram using the minimum peak width setting. Measure the width at half 4 sec
Peak Width
height of the narrowest peak.
Valid range is 4–99.

Dual Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
Sensitivity 1

Dual Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
Sensitivity 2

Dual Mode
The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 1

Dual Mode
The monitor wavelength for output channel 2. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 2

The detector must know the width of the narrowest peak in your run. The detector uses this information to optimize the
presentation of peaks and to minimize baseline noise.
Scan Mode
To set the peak width accurately, run a chromatogram using the minimum peak width setting. Measure the width at half 4 sec
Peak Width
height of the narrowest peak.
Valid range is 0 and 4–99 seconds.

155 156 Detector Settings Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-64 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
155 156 Detector Settings Properties (Continued)

155 156 Detector Settings

Property Name Description Default Value
Scan Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
Sensitivity 1

Scan Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0 AUFS
Sensitivity 2

Scan Mode
The sensitivity for monitoring output channel 3. Valid range is 0.001–2.000 AUFS 0 AUFS
Scan Sensitivity

Scan Mode
The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Scan Wavelength 1

Scan Mode
The first wavelength in the range that will be scanned. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 190 nm
Scan Start Wavelength

Scan Mode
The last wavelength in the range that will be scanned. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 700 nm
Scan End Wavelength

155 156 Detector Settings Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-65

 List of Tasks A
155 156 Scan Initiation
155 156 Scan Initiation

This Task sets the 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector for an automatic scan.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

155 156 Scan Initiation Properties

155 156 Scan Initiation Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

When automatic scan initiation is selected, the scan is not performed until the absorbance reading reaches the Initiation
Automatic Scan Initiation Selected
Threshold.

155 156 Scan Initiation Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-66 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
155 156 Scan Initiation Properties

155 156 Scan Initiation

Property Name Description Default Value
Initiation Threshold The absorbance reading to trigger the Automatic Scan Initiation. 1

Time it takes the chart recorder to trace a wavelength scan on strip chart paper (does not affect time to scan a peak). Valid range
Scan Output Time 0.2 min
is 0.1–20 min.

155 156 Scan Initiation Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-67

 List of Tasks A
171 172 Detector Settings
171 172 Detector Settings

Sets the DAD wavelengths and bandwidths to be monitored based on each selected Channel for the selected Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

171 172 Detector Settings Properties

171 172 Detector Settings Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Channel Select Channel number for which wavelength and bandwidth values will be set. Repeat for each channel to be used. (1–8) 1

The wavelength at which chromatogram data will be extracted and displayed on-screen during the run.
Monitor Wavelength 254 nm
(Range 186–723 for the 171 Detector and 186–612 for the 172 Detector)

The number of wavelengths that TRILUTION will use in the chromatogram calculation for the reference wavelength. Optimizing the
Monitor Wavelength Bandwidth 10 nm
bandwidth improves the signal-to-noise ratio to obtain the optimum signal for peak detection. (Range 1–15 nm)

171 172 Detector Settings Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-68 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
171 172 Detector Settings Properties

171 172 Detector Settings

Property Name Description Default Value
The reference wavelength is used to correct for background noise and instabilities in the detector. Choose a wavelength that is close to the
Reference Wavelength monitor wavelength and in a region of non-absorbance. 330 nm
(Range 186–723 for the 171 Detector and 186–612 for the 172 Detector)

The reference wavelength bandwidth sets the number of wavelengths that TRILUTION will use in the chromatogram calculation for the
Reference Wavelength Bandwidth reference wavelength. Optimizing the bandwidth improves the signal-to-noise ratio to obtain the optimum signal for peak 40 nm
detection. (Range 1–50 nm)

171 172 Detector Settings Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-69

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Injector

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-70 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 10 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-71

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 2.2 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-72 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 300 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 450 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-73

 List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE
215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Aspirate Push Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-74 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE

215 819 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-75

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Partial Loop Injection
215 819 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

215 819 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-76 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

215 819 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
The injector or injection module that the Task will affect.
Injector Injector
For this Task, select the 819 Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-77

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
215 819 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 2.2 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-78 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

215 819 Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 300 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 450 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

215 819 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-79

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps
215 819 Partial Loop Injection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.

1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

A-80 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INJECTION PORT RINSE

215 819 Partial Loop Injection

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
5 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 2–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
7 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-81

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task is used when doing injection and fraction collection on the same bed. It performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir
to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

A-82 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

The injector or injection module that the Task will affect.

Injector Injector
For this Task, select the 819 Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 10 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 3 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-83

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 2.2 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-84 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 300 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 450 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-85

 List of Tasks A
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch low pressure fraction collection valve to COLLECT for 2 seconds.
6 Lower probe into drain well.
7 Home dilutor.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-86 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
ASPIRATE

215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Push Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
5 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 2–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-87

 List of Tasks A
7 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
215 819 Prep Injection with Collection

8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

A-88 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

This task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of
the fraction collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-89

 List of Tasks A
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Injector The sample injector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Injection Volume and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 10 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 2 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 2 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Injection Volume and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-90 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value
The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-91

 List of Tasks A
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Fraction Collection Valve Rinse Time The time the program will wait after switching the fraction collection valve to COLLECT. 0.1 min

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 400 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 10 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-92 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Set switching valve to LOAD.
4 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
5 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
6 Home dilutor.
7 Switch fraction collection valve to COLLECT for Fraction Collection Valve Rinse Time.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Push Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-93

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
233 XL Prep Injection with Collection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-94 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
234 Partial Loop Injection

234 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

234 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-95

 List of Tasks A
234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
234 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 6 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-96 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

234 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 1 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume.

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 3 mL/min

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-97

 List of Tasks A
234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
234 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 300 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

234 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

234 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.

A-98 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
5 Home dilutor.

234 Partial Loop Injection

6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-99

 List of Tasks A
234 Total Loop Injection
234 Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main
234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

234 Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-100 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

234 Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 5 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Loop Volume Overfill A factor to multiply the Loop Volume by that determines the injection volume. Injection Volume = Loop Volume Overfill x Loop Volume. 5

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-101

 List of Tasks A
234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
234 Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 1 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume.

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-102 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

234 Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 3 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 300 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

234 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

234 Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-103

 List of Tasks A
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
234 Total Loop Injection

4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.

5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.

A-104 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

234 Total Loop Injection

7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-105

 List of Tasks A
235S Partial Loop Injection
235S Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

235S Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-106 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

235S Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 6 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-107

 List of Tasks A
235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
235S Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume.

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 3.3 mL/min

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-108 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

235S Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 300 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

235S Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

235S Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-109

 List of Tasks A
5 Home dilutor.
235S Partial Loop Injection

6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Home dilutor.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Repeat steps 3–4 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.

A-110 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

235S Partial Loop Injection

8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-111

 List of Tasks A
235S Total Loop Injection
235S Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Main
235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

235S Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-112 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

235S Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 6 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Loop Volume Overfill A factor to multiply the Loop Volume by that determines the injection volume. Injection Volume = Loop Volume Overfill x Loop Volume. 5 μL

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-113

 List of Tasks A
235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
235S Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume.

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 3.3 mL/min

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-114 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

235S Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 300 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

235S Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

235S Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-115

 List of Tasks A
5 Home dilutor.
235S Total Loop Injection

6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Home dilutor.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Repeat steps 3–4 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

A-116 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

235S Total Loop Injection

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-117
 List of Tasks A
235T Injection Rinse
235T Injection Rinse

This Task is used to rinse the injection port on a 235 Autoinjector with tee injection port.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

235T Injection Rinse Properties

235T Injection Rinse Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid dispensed. 250 μL

Above Seal Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid dispensed above the seal. 250 μL

Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the injection port. 3.3 mL/min

235T Injection Rinse Properties

A-118 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235T Partial Loop Injection

235T Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection on a 235 Autoinjector with a tee injection port.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

235T Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-119

 List of Tasks A
235T Partial Loop Injection

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 6 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-120 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

235T Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume.

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 200 μL

Above Seal Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid dispensed above the seal. 200 μL

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-121

 List of Tasks A
235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
235T Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 3.3 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 200 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

235T Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

235T Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Tee Injection Port Rinse
5 Above Seal Rinse
6 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.

A-122 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.

235T Partial Loop Injection

4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.

TEE INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Home dilutor.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Repeat steps 3–4 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

ABOVE SEAL RINSE

1 Raise probe to 5 mm above bottom of injection port.
2 Aspirate Above Seal Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Dispense Above Seal Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2-3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-123

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
235T Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-124 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235T Total Loop Injection

235T Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection on a 235 Autoinjector with tee injection port.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Main
235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

235T Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-125

 List of Tasks A
235T Total Loop Injection

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Autoinjector The autoinjector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 6 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Loop Volume Overfill A factor to multiply the Loop Volume by that determines the injection volume. Injection Volume = Loop Volume Overfill x Loop Volume. 5

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-126 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

235T Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Extra Volume.

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2 mm
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-127

 List of Tasks A
235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
235T Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Above Seal Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid dispensed above the seal. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 3.3 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 300 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

235T Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

235T Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Tee Injection Port Rinse
5 Above Seal Rinse
6 Outside Rinse

A-128 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

235T Total Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.

TEE INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Home dilutor.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Repeat steps 3–4 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

ABOVE SEAL RINSE

1 Raise probe to 5 mm above bottom of injection port.
2 Aspirate Above Seal Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Dispense Above Seal Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-129

 List of Tasks A
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
235T Total Loop Injection

5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-130 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
506C Autozero Channel

506C Autozero Channel

This Task sets the output trace of the specified channels on the System Interface to zero.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

506C Autozero Channel Properties

506C Autozero Channel Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

System Interface The System Interface that the Task will affect. Contact

Channel Enter the letter or letters that correspond to the output channel to act on for the system interface selected. ABCD

506C Autozero Channel Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-131

 List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection
845Z Prep Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Main
845Z Prep Injection Properties - Advanced
845Z Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing

845Z Prep Injection - Sequence of Steps

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

The injector or injection module that the Task will affect.

Injector Injector
For this Task, select the 845Z Injection Module.

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-132 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

845Z Prep Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 20 μL

200 μL
Note: This default was
Pull Volume A volume of air used to pull the injection volume into the sample loop. determined using a 125 mm
Z arm and a 0.8 mm ID
probe.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Volume and the Pull Volume moves into the probe. 4 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Advanced

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-133

 List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 500 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-134 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

845Z Prep Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

845Z Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

845Z Prep Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Inside Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-135

 List of Tasks A
ASPIRATE
845Z Prep Injection

1 Switch injection valve to LOAD.

2 Wait 0.2 min.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
4 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
5 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
6 Aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Aspirate Pull Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
9 Wait equilibration time.
10 Synchronize.

INJECT
1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
7 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.

A-136 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
7 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.

845Z Prep Injection

8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-137

 List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection with Collection
845Z Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop and also rinses the low pressure fraction
collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced
845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

845Z Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-138 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main (Continued)

845Z Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value
The injector or injection module that the Task will affect.
Injector Injector
For this Task, select the 845Z Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 20 μL

200 μL
Note: This default was
Pull Volume A volume of air used to pull the injection volume into the sample loop. determined using a 125 mm
Z arm and a 0.8 mm ID
probe.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Volume and the Pull Volume moves into the probe. 4 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-139

 List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
845Z Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 500 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-140 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

845Z Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

845Z Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

845Z Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Inside Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Switch low pressure fraction collection valve to COLLECT for 2 seconds.
7 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
8 Wait 0.2 min.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-141

 List of Tasks A
ASPIRATE
845Z Prep Injection with Collection

1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Aspirate Pull Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
7 Wait equilibration time.
8 Synchronize.

INJECT
1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
7 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
7 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

A-142 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Add Diluent

Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified amount of liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and
then mixes with liquid or air.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Add Diluent Properties - Main
Add Diluent Properties - Advanced
Add Diluent Properties - Mixing
Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing

Add Diluent - Sequence of Steps

Add Diluent Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Diluent Source Select Reservoir or Tray. Reservoir

Add Diluent Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-143

 List of Tasks A
Add Diluent Properties - Main (Continued)
Add Diluent

Property Name Description Default Value

Reservoir
The zone to which the Diluent Volume is delivered. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Reservoir
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Tray
When Tray is selected; the zone from which the Diluent Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Diluent Zone

Tray
When Tray is selected; enter the well number in the Diluent Zone. 0
Diluent Well

Tray
The zone to which the Diluent Volume is delivered. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Diluent Volume The quantity of liquid used to dilute the sample volume in the Sample Well in the Sample Zone. 0 μL

Add Diluent Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Add Diluent Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Aspirate Z Offset value to move
Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Add Diluent Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-144 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Add Diluent Properties - Advanced (Continued)

Add Diluent
Property Name Description Default Value
When selected the distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Aspirate Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Aspirate Z Option used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Aspirate LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared and the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Diluent Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Dispense Z Offset value to move
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
the Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Diluent Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone. The Dispense Z Option must be set to
Dispense LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone.

Add Diluent Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Add Diluent Properties - Mixing

Property Name Description Default Value

Mixing Properties Select Mix with Liquid or Mix with Air to perform a mix of the Diluent Volume with the Sample Volume. Select No Mix for no mixing. No Mix

Mix with Liquid

Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Liquid

The quantity of liquid used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Add Diluent Properties - Mixing Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-145

 List of Tasks A
Add Diluent Properties - Mixing (Continued)
Add Diluent

Property Name Description Default Value

Mix with Liquid
The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 10 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Liquid
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Aspirate Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
Mix Aspirate Z Option
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Aspirate Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
2 mm
Mix Aspirate Z Offset the Mix Aspirate Z Option used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed.

When Tray is selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set
Mix with Liquid to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Aspirate LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone as part of the mixing process.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Liquid
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset the Mix Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense
Mix with Liquid Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

Add Diluent Properties - Mixing Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-146 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Add Diluent Properties - Mixing (Continued)

Add Diluent
Property Name Description Default Value
Mix with Air
Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Air

The quantity of air used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 10 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Air
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Air The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset the Mix Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense
Mix with Air Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

Add Diluent Properties - Mixing Table (Page 3 of 3)

Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 250 μL

Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-147

 List of Tasks A
Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
Add Diluent

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-148 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Add Diluent - Sequence of Steps

Add Diluent
The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Aspirate
2 Dispense
3 Mix with Liquid (Optional)
4 Mix with Air (Optional)
5 Inside Rinse
6 Outside Rinse

ASPIRATE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Reservoir
1 Aspirate Diluent Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.

Probe
1 Move to Diluent Well in Diluent Zone.
2 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Lower probe to Aspirate Z Option and Aspirate Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Diluent Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

DISPENSE

Reservoir
1 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Dispense Diluent Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-149

 List of Tasks A
Probe
Add Diluent

Air Gap Volume = 0

1 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Dispense Diluent Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Air Gap Volume > 0

1 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Dispense Diluent Volume and 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
5 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
6 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
7 Dispense 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.

MIX WITH LIQUID (OPTIONAL)

Mix with Liquid
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe to Mix Aspirate Z Option and Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
7 Dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH AIR (OPTIONAL)

Mix with Air

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.

A-150 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Add Diluent
4 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate (first cycle only).
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
7 Dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 3–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

NO MIX
1 Skip to Inside Rinse.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-151

 List of Tasks A
Aspirate
Aspirate

This Task aspirates an air gap or the specified volume of liquid (Aspirate Volume) from the reservoir or probe and must be synchronized with the Move to
Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before aspirating liquid.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Aspirate Properties

Aspirate Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated. The Move to Sample Location Task’s Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Move to Sample Location’s Sample Zone.

Aspirate Volume The quantity of liquid to be aspirated. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves into the probe. 0 mL/min

Aspirate Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-152 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Aspirate Properties (Continued)

Aspirate
Property Name Brief Description Default Value
Valve Position Select from either Probe, Reservoir, or Gas. PROBE

Air Gap When Valve Position = PROBE; the quantity of an air gap. Cleared

Aspirate Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-153

 List of Tasks A
Collection and Travel Depth
Collection and Travel Depth

This Task customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Collection and Travel Depth Properties

Collection and Travel Depth Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Do not set Collection and
Settings Select Do not set Collection and Travel Depths or Set Collection and Travel Depths.
Travel Depths

The probe height used when dispensing into fraction sites.

Set Collection and Travel Depth Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
-1 mm
Fraction Collection Depth Valid range is Z travel distance and -1 where -1 is equal to the Z Safe Height.
Only used when a liquid handler is functioning as a fraction collector.

The probe height used when moving between fraction sites.

Set Collection and Travel Depth Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
-1 mm
Fraction Travel Depth Valid range is Z travel distance and -1 where -1 is equal to the Z Safe Height.
Only used when a liquid handler is functioning as a fraction collector.

Collection and Travel Depth Properties

A-154 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Conditional Fraction Collection

Conditional Fraction Collection

This task can be used in place of the Fraction Collection Settings Task. It allows for setting multiple parameters for one or more channels at once.

How to set up Conditional Fraction Collection

1 Ensure that you have data channels set in the Configuration.
2 Drag the Conditional Fraction Collection Task and drop it in the workspace.
3 Set the Primary Channel parameters that must be met for fraction collection to occur (either slope or level).
4 Optionally, on the Secondary Channels tab, select an additional channel (Channel 1) or channels (Channel 1 and Channel 2) to be monitored and the parameters that
must be met for fraction collection.
5 Select AND from the Conditional Expression drop-down list to indicate that fraction collection will occur when the Primary Channel conditions and the Secondary
Channel conditions are met.
Or select OR from the Conditional Expression drop-down list to indicate that fraction collection will occur when the Primary Channel or the Secondary Channel
conditions are met.
Refer to the illustrations that follow for examples of how this is used.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-155

 List of Tasks A
6 Optionally, select the Co-eluted Peaks check box to collect co-eluted peaks.
Conditional Fraction Collection

7 Optionally, select the Collect Non Peaks check box to collect non peaks.
8 Drag the Set Fraction Site Task and Start Fraction Collection Tasks (both required when using the Conditional Fraction Collection Task) and drop them in the workspace
after the Conditional Fraction Collection task.
When using a 215 Liquid Handler with high-mount Fraction Collection Valve, also drag the Collection and Travel Depth Task and drop it in the workspace after the
Conditional Fraction Collection Task.

A-156 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Contact Open-Close

Contact Open-Close
This Task opens and powers off, closes and powers on, or pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Contact Open-Close Properties

Contact Open-Close Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument The instrument that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the instrument selected. 1

Closed (On) The action to occur: close and power on the Contact ID. Selected

Open (Off ) The action to occur: open and power off the Contact ID. Cleared

PULSE Toggles the output state. Cleared

Pulse
The time the program will wait between output state toggle. 0.02 min
Pulse Duration

Contact Open-Close Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-157

 List of Tasks A
Detector Autozero Channel
Detector Autozero Channel

This Task sets the output trace of each channel on Detector to zero.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Detector Autozero Channel Properties

Detector Autozero Channel Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Detector Autozero Channel Properties

A-158 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Dilute

Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from
the wells of the sample zone and then dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Dilute Properties - Main
Dilute Properties - Advanced
Dilute Properties - Mixing
Dilute Properties - Rinsing

Dilute - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-159

 List of Tasks A
Dilute

Dilute Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Diluent Source Select Reservoir or Tray. Reservoir

Reservoir
The zone from which the Sample Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Reservoir
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Reservoir
The zone to which the Sample Volume and Diluent Volume are delivered. Sample Zone
Result Zone

Reservoir
Enter the well number in the Result Zone. 0
Result Well

Tray
The zone from which the Sample Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Tray
The zone from which the Diluent Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Diluent Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Diluent Zone. 0
Diluent Well

Tray
The zone to which the Sample Volume and Diluent Volume are delivered. Sample Zone
Result Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Result Zone. 0
Result Well

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Sample Volume The quantity of sample. 0 μL

Diluent Volume The quantity of liquid used to dilute the sample volume in the Sample Well in the Sample Zone. 0 μL

When Tray is selected; an additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is
Diluent Extra Volume 0 μL
not contaminated and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Diluent Volume.

Dilute Properties - Main

A-160 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

Dilute
Dilute Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Flow Rate The speed at which the Sample Volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Diluent Flow Rate The speed at which the Diluent Volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Sample Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Sample Volume from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Aspirate Sample LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Diluent Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Diluent Z Offset value to move up
Diluent Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Diluent Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Diluent
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

When selected the distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Diluent Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Diluent Z Option used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed.

Dilute Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-161

 List of Tasks A
Dilute Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Dilute

Property Name Description Default Value

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Aspirate Diluent LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Diluent Volume, Sample Volume, and Air Gap Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Result Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Result Z Offset value to move up
Result Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Result Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Result
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Result Z Offset 2 mm
the Result Z Option used when delivering the Diluent Volume, Sample Volume, and Air Gap Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone. The Result Z Option must be set to
Dispense LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone.

Dilute Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Dilute Properties - Mixing

Property Name Description Default Value

Mixing Properties Select Mix with Liquid or Mix with Air to perform a mix of the Diluent Volume with the Sample Volume. Select No Mix for no mixing. No Mix

Mix with Liquid

The number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Liquid

The quantity of liquid used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 10 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

Dilute Properties - Mixing Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-162 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Dilute Properties - Mixing (Continued)

Dilute
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Liquid
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Aspirate Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
Mix Aspirate Z Option
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Aspirate Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
2 mm
Mix Aspirate Z Offset the Mix Aspirate Z Option used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Mix with Liquid AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Aspirate LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Liquid
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset the Mix Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense
Mix with Liquid Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

Mix with Air

Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Dilute Properties - Mixing Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-163

 List of Tasks A
Dilute Properties - Mixing (Continued)
Dilute

Property Name Description Default Value

Mix with Air
The quantity of air used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 10 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Air
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Air The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset the Mix Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the he probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense
Mix with Air Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

Dilute Properties - Mixing Table (Page 3 of 3)

Dilute Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 250 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

Dilute Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-164 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Dilute Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

Dilute
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Dilute Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-165

 List of Tasks A
Dilute - Sequence of Steps
Dilute

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.

1 Aspirate
2 Dispense
3 Mix with Liquid (Optional)
4 Mix with Air (Optional)
5 Inside Rinse
6 Outside Rinse

ASPIRATE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Reservoir
1 Aspirate Diluent Volume at Diluent Flow Rate.
2 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
3 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
4 Dispense Diluent Volume at Result Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
7 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
8 Lower probe to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
9 Aspirate Sample Volume at Sample Flow Rate.

Probe
1 Move to Diluent Well in Diluent Zone.
2 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Lower probe to Diluent Z Option and Diluent Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Diluent Volume + Diluent Extra Volume at Diluent Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
7 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
8 Move to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.

A-166 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
9 Aspirate Sample Volume at Sample Flow Rate.

Dilute
10 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

DISPENSE

Reservoir

If Air Gap Volume = 0

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
3 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
4 Dispense Sample Volume at Dispensing Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

If Air Gap Volume > 0

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
3 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
4 Dispense Sample Volume at Dispensing Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
7 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
8 Dispense 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Probe

If Diluent Extra Volume = 0

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
3 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
4 Dispense Sample Volume + Air Gap Volume + Diluent Volume +1/2 Air Gap Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-167

 List of Tasks A
If Diluent Extra Volume > 0
Dilute

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
3 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
4 Dispense Sample Volume + Air Gap Volume + Diluent Volume at Result Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
7 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
8 Dispense Diluent Extra Volume + Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH LIQUID (OPTIONAL)

Mix with Liquid

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe to Mix Aspirate Z Option and Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
7 Dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH AIR (OPTIONAL)

Mix with Air

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
4 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate (first cycle only).
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
7 Dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.

A-168 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
8 Repeat steps 3–7 for Number of Cycles.

Dilute
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-169

 List of Tasks A
Dispense
Dispense

This Task delivers liquid or air and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the well before dispensing.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Dispense Properties

Dispense Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid up as it is dispensed. The Move to Sample Location Task’s Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is dispensed to the Move to Sample Location’s Sample Zone.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Dispense Volume The quantity of liquid or air to be dispensed. 0 μL

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves out of the probe. 0 mL/min

Dispense Properties

A-170 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Execute

Execute
This Task invokes an external application.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Execute Properties

Execute Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Path and Name File path to which the Command Line Parameters are sent. Click to browse for the executable program.

Command Line Parameters The information sent to the program located at the Path and Name.

Synchronize selected waits for the external program to close before continuing task execution. Synchronize cleared launches the
Synchronize Cleared
external program and then immediately resumes task execution.

Execute Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-171

 List of Tasks A
Fraction Collection Settings
Fraction Collection Settings

This Task sets all parameters for fraction collection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main
Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Fraction Sites

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Fraction Collection Mode Slope, Level, Time, or Volume Slope

Slope
Slope (in degrees) of peak’s ascending edge. 25°
Peak Front Slope

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-172 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main (Continued)

Fraction Collection Settings

Property Name Description Default Value
Slope
Slope (in degrees) of peak’s descending edge. 25°
Peak Back Slope

Slope Select from None, Time, or Volume

None
Subdivided Peaks If collecting primarily by Slope or Level, this option allows you to subdivide the peak collection by Time or Volume.

Slope - Subdivide Peaks

Enter the time to dispense at each tube. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Slope -Subdivide Peaks

Enter the maximum volume to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Enter the Sensitivity value.

Slope The sensitivity setting maximizes the number of peaks that are collected while minimizing the collection of trace artifacts. If the trace has 85
Sensitivity a lot of noise, then the value should be decreased to reduce the number of smaller peaks that are collected or increased to increase the
number of peaks that are collected.

Slope
Indicates if all effluent should be collected into tubes (TRUE) or not (FALSE). When TRUE, select from None, Time, or Volume. FALSE
Non Peaks

Slope - Non Peaks

Enter the time to dispense at each tube when collecting non peaks. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Slope - Non Peaks

Enter the maximum volume of non peak effluent to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Slope Indicate whether the front of the slope to the apex (Front APEX), the apex to the tail (APEX Tail) or the entire peak (ALL) should be
ALL
Collection Region collected. To collect the entire peak, but advance to the next well at the apex, select APEX.

Slope
Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of positive peaks TRUE
Collect Positive Peaks

Slope
Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of negative and positive peaks Cleared
Collect Negative Peaks

Slope
Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of co-eluted peaks. Cleared
Co-eluted Peaks

Level When LEVEL is selected; the mV level above which all effluent is collected. This value is especially useful if the detector signal should go
0 mV
Peak Level off-scale during collection.

Level
Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of positive peaks Selected
Collect Positive Peak

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-173

 List of Tasks A
Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main (Continued)
Fraction Collection Settings

Property Name Description Default Value

Level
Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of negative peaks Cleared
Collect Negative Peak

Level Select from None, Time, or Volume.

None
Subdivided Peaks If collecting primarily by Slope or Level, this option allows you to subdivide the peak collection by Time or Volume.

Level - Subdivide Peaks

Enter the time to dispense at each tube. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Level -Subdivide Peaks

Enter the maximum volume to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Level
Indicates if all effluent should be collected into tubes (TRUE) or not (FALSE). FALSE
Collect Non Peak

Level - Non Peaks

Enter the time to dispense at each tube when collecting non peaks. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Level - Non Peaks

Enter the maximum volume of non peak effluent to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Time
Enter the time to dispense at each tube when collecting non peaks. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Volume
Enter the maximum volume of non peak effluent to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Main Table (Page 3 of 3)

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Fraction Sites

Property Name Description Default Value

Do not set Collection and
Collection and Travel Depths The probe height used when dispensing into fraction sites.
Travel Depths

The probe height used when dispensing into fraction sites.

Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Fraction Collection Depth -1 mm
Valid range is Z travel distance and -1 where -1 is equal to the Z Clamp Height.
Only used when a liquid handler is functioning as a fraction collector.

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Fraction Sites Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-174 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Fraction Sites (Continued)

Fraction Collection Settings

Property Name Description Default Value
The probe height used when moving between fraction sites.
Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Fraction Travel Depth -1 mm
Valid range is Z travel distance and -1 where -1 is equal to the Z Safe Height.
Only used when a liquid handler is functioning as a fraction collector.

Fraction Site 1
The first fraction collector that the Task will affect.
Fraction Collector 1

Fraction Site 1
The zone in which fractions are collected on the first fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone 1

Fraction Site 1 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the first fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous
0
Fraction Well 1 collection and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Site 2
The second fraction collector that the Task will affect.
Fraction Collector 2

Fraction Site 2
The zone in which fractions are collected on the second fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone 2

Fraction Site 2 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the second fraction collector. The default of 0 is for
0
Fraction Well 2 continuous collection and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Site 3
The third fraction collector that the Task will affect.
Fraction Collector 3

Fraction Site 3
The zone in which fractions are collected on the third fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone 3

Fraction Site 3 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the third fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous
0
Fraction Well 3 collection and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Site 4
The fourth fraction collector that the Task will affect.
Fraction Collector 4

Fraction Site 4
The zone in which fractions are collected on the fourth fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone 4

Fraction Site 4 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the fourth fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous
0
Fraction Well 4 collection and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Collection Settings Properties - Fraction Sites Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-175

 List of Tasks A
GSIOC
GSIOC

This Task sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GSIOC Properties

GSIOC - Sequence of Steps

GSIOC Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument The instrument that the Task will affect.

GSIOC Command The string that sends an instruction to the Instrument.

Type The command type: BUFFERED or IMMEDIATE. BUFFERED

GSIOC Properties

GSIOC - Sequence of Steps

1 Send GSIOC Command of Type to Instrument.

A-176 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent

GX Add Diluent
This Task aspirates the specified liquid (Diluent Source) from the reservoir or the probe and then dispenses to the wells of the sample zone and then mixes
with liquid or air.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Add Diluent Properties - Main
GX Add Diluent Properties - Advanced
GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing
GX Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing

GX Add Diluent - Sequence of Steps

GX Add Diluent Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

GX Add Diluent Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-177

 List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent Properties - Main (Continued)
GX Add Diluent

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
Note: The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Diluent Source Select Reservoir or Tray. Reservoir

Reservoir
The zone to which the Diluent Volume is delivered. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Reservoir
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Tray
When Tray is selected; the zone from which the Diluent Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Diluent Zone

Tray
When Tray is selected; enter the well number in the Diluent Zone. 0
Diluent Well

Tray
The zone to which the Diluent Volume is delivered. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

Diluent Volume The quantity of liquid used to dilute the sample volume in the Sample Well in the Sample Zone. 0 μL

GX Add Diluent Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX Add Diluent Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

GX Add Diluent Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-178 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent Properties - Advanced (Continued)

GX Add Diluent
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Aspirate Z Offset value to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

When Tray is selected; the distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Aspirate Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Aspirate Z Option used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed.

When Tray is selected; the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Aspirate LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Diluent Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: laces probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Dispense Z Offset value to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Dispense Z
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
Option used when delivering the Diluent Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone. The Dispense Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and
Dispense LLF initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone.

GX Add Diluent Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-179

 List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent

GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing

Property Name Description Default Value

Mixing Properties Select Mix with Liquid or Mix with Air to perform a mix of the Diluent Volume with the Sample Volume. Select No Mix for no mixing. No Mix

Mix with Liquid

Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Liquid

The quantity of liquid used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 5 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
Mix with Liquid factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom
Mix Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Aspirate Z Offset value to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Mix Aspirate
2 mm
Mix Aspirate Z Offset Z Option used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE
Mix with Liquid and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Aspirate LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-180 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing (Continued)

GX Add Diluent
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
Mix with Liquid factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Mix Dispense
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense Z Option must
Mix with Liquid be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

Mix with Air

Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Air

The quantity of air used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 5 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
Mix with Air factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-181

 List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing (Continued)
GX Add Diluent

Property Name Description Default Value

Mix with Air The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Mix Dispense
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense Z Option must
Mix with Air be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

GX Add Diluent Properties - Mixing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Inside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Top
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Inside Rinse
Inside Rinse Z Offset -7 mm
Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-182 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX Add Diluent
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move up from
the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Outside Rinse
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the rinse
Rinse Pump 1
pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX Add Diluent Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-183

 List of Tasks A
GX Add Diluent - Sequence of Steps
GX Add Diluent

1 Aspirate
2 Dispense
3 Mix with Liquid (Optional)
4 Mix with Air (Optional)
5 Inside Rinse
6 Outside Rinse

ASPIRATE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Probe
1 Move to Diluent Well in Diluent Zone.
2 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Lower probe to Aspirate Z Option and Aspirate Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Diluent Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

DISPENSE

Reservoir
1 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Diluent Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Probe

Air Gap Volume = 0

1 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Diluent Volume at Dispense Flow Rate
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-184 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Air Gap Volume > 0

GX Add Diluent
1 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Diluent Volume + 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Dispense Flow Rate
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
5 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
6 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
7 Dispense 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH LIQUID (OPTIONAL)

If Mix with Liquid = TRUE

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe to Mix Aspirate Z Option and Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
7 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH AIR (OPTIONAL)

If Mix with Air = TRUE

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
4 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume (first cycle only) and Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
6 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 for Number of Cycles.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-185

 List of Tasks A
INSIDE RINSE
GX Add Diluent

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-186 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Dilute

GX Dilute
This Task aspirates the specified amount of diluent volume from the reservoir or the bed and then dispenses to result. The Task next aspirates sample from
the wells of the sample zone and then dispenses again to the result zone. Finally, a mix with liquid or air is performed in the wells of the result zone.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Dilute Properties - Main
GX Dilute Properties - Advanced
GX Dilute Properties - Mixing
GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing

GX Dilute - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-187

 List of Tasks A
GX Dilute

GX Dilute Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Diluent Source Select Reservoir or Tray. Reservoir

Reservoir
The zone from which the Sample Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Reservoir
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Reservoir
The zone to which the Sample Volume and Diluent Volume are delivered. Sample Zone
Result Zone

Reservoir
Enter the well number in the Result Zone. 0
Result Well

Tray
The zone from which the Sample Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Sample Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0
Sample Well

Tray
The zone from which the Diluent Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone
Diluent Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Diluent Zone. 0
Diluent Well

Tray
The zone to which the Sample Volume and Diluent Volume are delivered. Sample Zone
Result Zone

Tray
Enter the well number in the Result Zone. 0
Result Well

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

Sample Volume The quantity of sample. 0 μL

GX Dilute Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-188 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Dilute Properties - Main (Continued)

GX Dilute
Property Name Description Default Value
Diluent Volume The quantity of liquid used to dilute the sample volume in the Sample Well in the Sample Zone. 0 μL

When Tray is selected, an additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not
Diluent Extra Volume 0 μL
contaminated and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Diluent Volume.

GX Dilute Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX Dilute Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Flow Rate The speed at which the Sample Volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Diluent Flow Rate The speed at which the Diluent Volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Result Flow Rate The speed at which the Sample Volume, Diluent Volume, and Air Gap Volume move out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

One of the five defined reference points used when aspirating the Sample Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Sample Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Sample Volume from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Aspirate Sample LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

GX Dilute Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-189

 List of Tasks A
GX Dilute Properties - Advanced (Continued)
GX Dilute

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Diluent Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Diluent Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Diluent Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Diluent Z Offset value to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Diluent Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Diluent Z
Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

When Tray is selected, the distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference
Diluent Z Offset 2 mm
point defined by the Diluent Z Option used when aspirating the Diluent Volume from the bed.

When the Tray is selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set
Aspirate Diluent LLF to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Diluent Volume, Sample Volume, and Air Gap Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Result Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Result Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Result Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Result Z Offset value to move up from Tube Bottom
the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Result Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Result Z
Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Result Z Offset 2 mm
Result Z Option used when delivering the Diluent Volume, Sample Volume, and Air Gap Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone. The Result Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE
Dispense LLF and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone.

GX Dilute Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-190 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX Dilute
GX Dilute Properties - Mixing

Property Name Description Default Value

Mixing Properties Select Mix with Liquid or Mix with Air to perform a mix of the Diluent Volume with the Sample Volume. Select No Mix for no mixing. No Mix

Mix with Liquid

Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Liquid

The quantity of liquid used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Liquid

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 5 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Liquid
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Aspirate Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
Mix Aspirate Z Option
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Aspirate
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
2 mm
Mix Aspirate Z Offset Mix Aspirate Z Option used when aspirating the Mixing Volume from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Mix with Liquid AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Aspirate LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Diluent Zone.

GX Dilute Properties - Mixing Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-191

 List of Tasks A
GX Dilute Properties - Mixing (Continued)
GX Dilute

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Liquid
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Liquid The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset Mix Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense Z
Mix with Liquid Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

Mix with Air

Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2
Number of Cycles

Mix with Air

The quantity of air used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL
Mixing Volume

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move into the probe during the mixing process. 1 mL/min
Mix Aspirate Flow Rate

Mix with Air

The speed at which volumes move out of the probe during the mixing process. 5 mL/min
Mix Dispense Flow Rate

GX Dilute Properties - Mixing Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-192 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Dilute Properties - Mixing (Continued)

GX Dilute
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Mix Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Mix with Air
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Mix Dispense Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
Mix Dispense Z Option
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Mix Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Mix
Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Mix with Air The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
2 mm
Mix Dispense Z Offset Mix Dispense Z Option used when delivering the Mixing Volume to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process. The Mix Dispense Z
Mix with Air Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
Mix Dispense LLF
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Sample Zone as part of the mixing process.

GX Dilute Properties - Mixing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-193

 List of Tasks A
GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX Dilute

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Top
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Inside Rinse Z Offset -7 mm
Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-194 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX Dilute
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select
Rinse Pump 1
2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX Dilute Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Dilute - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Aspirate
2 Dispense
3 Mix with Liquid (Optional)
4 Mix with Air (Optional)
5 Inside Rinse
6 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-195

 List of Tasks A
ASPIRATE
GX Dilute

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Reservoir
1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Diluent Volume at Result Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
5 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
6 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
7 Lower probe to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
8 Aspirate Sample Volume at Sample Flow Rate.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Probe
1 Move to Diluent Well in Diluent Zone.
2 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Lower probe to Diluent Z Option and Diluent Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Diluent Volume + Diluent Extra Volume at Diluent Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
7 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
8 Lower probe to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
9 Aspirate Sample Volume at Sample Flow Rate.
10 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-196 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
DISPENSE

GX Dilute
Reservoir

If Air Gap Volume = 0

1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Sample Volume at Result Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

If Air Gap Volume > 0

1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Sample Volume and 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Result Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
5 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
6 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
7 Dispense 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Probe

If Diluent Extra Volume = 0

1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
3 Dispense Sample Volume + Air Gap Volume + Diluent Volume +1/2 Air Gap Volume at Result Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
5 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
6 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
7 Dispense Diluent Extra Volume + Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-197

 List of Tasks A
If Diluent Extra Volume > 0
GX Dilute

1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.

2 Lower probe to Result Z Option and Result Z Offset.
3 Dispense Sample Volume + Air Gap Volume + Diluent Volume at Result Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
5 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
6 Lower probe to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
7 Dispense Diluent Extra Volume + Air Gap Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH LIQUID (OPTIONAL)

If Mix with Liquid = TRUE

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
4 Lower probe to Mix Aspirate Z Option and Mix Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
7 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

MIX WITH AIR (OPTIONAL)

If Mix with Air = TRUE

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
4 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume (first cycle only) and Mixing Volume at Mix Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Lower probe to Mix Dispense Z Option and Mix Dispense Z Offset.
6 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Mixing Volume at Mix Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 for Number of Cycles.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-198 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INSIDE RINSE

GX Dilute
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-199

 List of Tasks A
GX Home Liquid Handler
GX Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes a GX-Series liquid handler and GX Solvent System.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Home Liquid Handler Properties

GX Home Liquid Handler - Sequence of Steps

GX Home Liquid Handler Properties

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Inside Rinse Zone The zone at which the Pump is homed. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1
GX Home Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-200 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Home Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)

GX Home Liquid Handler

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the move:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List
and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Z Offset, the probe will
move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Tube Bottom
Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered)
Z Offset 2 mm
from a reference point defined by the Z Option.

GX Home Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX Home Liquid Handler - Sequence of Steps

1 Home the X/Y/Z of the Liquid Handler.
2 Home GX Solvent System.
3 Move the probe to Inside Rinse Zone.
4 Lower probe to Z Option and Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-201

 List of Tasks A
GX Injection Rinse
GX Injection Rinse

This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe into the injection port prior to rinsing.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Injection Rinse Properties

GX Injection Rinse - Sequence of Steps

GX Injection Rinse Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid dispensed. 1000 μL

Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the injection port. 5 mL/min

GX Injection Rinse Properties

A-202 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Injection Rinse - Sequence of Steps

GX Injection Rinse
1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Rinse Volume at Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-203

 List of Tasks A
GX Inside Rinse
GX Inside Rinse

This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Inside Rinse Properties

GX Inside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

GX Inside Rinse Properties

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

GX Inside Rinse Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-204 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Inside Rinse Properties (Continued)

GX Inside Rinse
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Inside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset Tube Top
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Inside Rinse Z Offset -7 mm
defined by the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

GX Inside Rinse Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX Inside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Rinse Volume at Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-205

 List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Air
GX Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Mix with Air Properties - Main
GX Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing

GX Mix with Air - Sequence of Steps

GX Mix with Air Properties - Main

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

GX Mix with Air Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-206 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Air Properties - Main (Continued)

GX Mix with Air

Property Name Brief Description Default Value
Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Mixing Zone The zone in which the Mixing Volume is mixed. Sample Zone

Mixing Well Enter the well number in the Mixing Zone. 0

Number of Wells to Mix The number of Mixing Wells to mix. 1

Number of Cycles Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2

Mixing Volume The quantity of air used as part of a mixing process. 0

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which a volume of air moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which a volume of air moves out of the probe. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when delivering air to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well
dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Dispense Z Offset, the probe will
move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Tube Bottom
Dispense Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
reference point defined by the Dispense Z Option for delivering air to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Mixing Zone. The Dispense Z Option
Dispense LLF must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Mixing Zone.

GX Mix with Air Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-207

 List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Air

GX Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the
Inside Rinse Flow Rate 5 mL/min
rinse station.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well
dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Top
Rinse Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z
Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a
Inside Rinse Z Offset reference point defined by the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the -7 mm
rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position station 1. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position station 2. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Position station 3. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-208 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX Mix with Air

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Position station 4. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Position station 5. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in
Outside Rinse Flow Rate 5 mL/min
the rinse station.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well
dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the
probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
Rinse Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z
Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a
Outside Rinse Z Offset reference point defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in 2 mm
the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-209

 List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Air - Sequence of Steps
GX Mix with Air

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.

1 Mix
2 Inside Rinse
3 Outside Rinse

MIX
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Mixing Well in Mixing Zone.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
4 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume (first cycle only) and Mixing Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
6 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Mixing Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 3–6 for Number of Cycles.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-210 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
8 Repeat steps 3–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

GX Mix with Air

9 Repeat Number of wells to mix.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-211

 List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Liquid
GX Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main
GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing

GX Mix with Liquid - Sequence of Steps

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-212 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main (Continued)

GX Mix with Liquid

Property Name Brief Description Default Value
Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Mixing Zone The zone in which the Mixing Volume is mixed. Sample Zone

Mixing Well Enter the well number in the Mixing Zone. 0

Number of Wells to Mix The number of Mixing Wells to mix. 1

Number of Cycles Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2

Mixing Volume The quantity of liquid used as part of a mixing process. 0

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Mixing Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which the Mixing Volume moves out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when drawing liquids from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Aspirate Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Aspirate Z Offset 2 mm
Aspirate Z Option for drawing liquids from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Mixing Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Aspirate LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Mixing Zone.

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-213

 List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main (Continued)
GX Mix with Liquid

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when delivering liquids to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Dispense Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Dispense Z Offset 2
Dispense Z Option for delivering liquids to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Mixing Zone. The Dispense Z Option must be set to
Dispense LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Mixing Zone.

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Main Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-214 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX Mix with Liquid

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Top
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Inside Rinse Z Offset -7 mm
Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range is 1–6.
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-215

 List of Tasks A
GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX Mix with Liquid

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select
Rinse Pump 1
2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Mix with Liquid - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Mix
2 Inside Rinse
3 Outside Rinse

A-216 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
MIX

GX Mix with Liquid

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Mixing Well in Mixing Zone.
4 Lower probe to Aspirate Z Option and Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Mixing Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
7 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Mixing Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-217

 List of Tasks A
GX Outside Rinse
GX Outside Rinse

This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Outside Rinse Properties

GX Outside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

GX Outside Rinse Properties

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Purge Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

GX Outside Rinse Properties Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-218 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Outside Rinse Properties (Continued)

GX Outside Rinse
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 3. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 4. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 5. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse
Outside Rinse Flow Rate 5 mL/min
position in the rinse station.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List
and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset,
the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only Tube Bottom
positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+)
or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

GX Outside Rinse Properties Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-219

 List of Tasks A
GX Outside Rinse Properties (Continued)
GX Outside Rinse

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered)
Outside Rinse Z Offset from a reference point defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside 2 mm
rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to
Rinse Pump 1
Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX Outside Rinse Properties Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Outside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch valve to Purge Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
6 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
7 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
8 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
9 Switch Rinse Pump off.
10 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
11 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-220 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Prime

GX Prime
This Task moves to the rinse station and then primes the transfer tubing with reservoir solvent.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Prime Properties

GX Prime - Sequence of Steps

GX Prime Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Solvent Valve Position Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6. 2

Number of Cycles Enter the number of times to repeat dispensing. 3

Flow Rate The speed at which the liquid moves out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Zone The zone to which the volume is dispensed. Inside Rinse

Well Enter the well number in the Zone. 1

GX Prime Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-221

 List of Tasks A
GX Prime Properties (Continued)
GX Prime

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when delivering liquid:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level in X,Y coordinate using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Z Option Tube Top
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Z Offset values to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Z Offset 2 mm
Z Option for delivering liquids to the rinse station.

GX Prime Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX Prime - Sequence of Steps

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Well in Zone.
3 Lower probe to Z Option and Z Offset.
4 Home GX Solvent System.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense transfer tubing capacity x Number of Cycles at Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-222 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Transfer

GX Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX Transfer Properties - Main
GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing

GX Transfer - Sequence of Steps

GX Transfer Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

GX Transfer Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-223

 List of Tasks A
GX Transfer Properties - Main (Continued)
GX Transfer

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Source Zone The zone from which the Source Volume and Source Extra Volume are drawn. Sample Zone

Source Well Enter the well number in the Source Zone. 0

Result Zone The zone to which the Source Volume is delivered. Sample Zone

Result Well Enter the well number in the Result Zone. 0

Number of Wells to Transfer The number of Source Wells to transfer to Result Wells. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of the air gap aspirated before the Source Volume. 50 μL

Source Volume The quantity of sample 0

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be
Extra Volume transferred is not contaminated, and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and 0
the Source Volume.

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Source Volume and Extra Volume move into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which the Source Volume moves out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when drawing liquids from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level in X,Y coordinate using initial volume from
the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Tube Bottom
Aspirate Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z
Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

GX Transfer Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-224 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Transfer Properties - Main (Continued)

GX Transfer
Property Name Description Default Value
The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered)
Aspirate Z Offset 2 mm
from a reference point defined by the Aspirate Z Option for drawing liquids from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Source Zone. The
Aspirate Z Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List
Aspirate LLF to use this option. Cleared

When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Source Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when delivering liquids to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level in X,Y coordinate using initial volume from
the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Tube Bottom
Dispense Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z
Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered)
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
from a reference point defined by the Dispense Z Option for delivering liquids to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone. The Dispense Z
Option must be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this
Dispense LLF option. Cleared

When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone.

GX Transfer Properties - Main Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-225

 List of Tasks A
GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX Transfer

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position
Inside Rinse Flow Rate 5 mL/min
in the rinse station.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List
and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse
Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Tube Top
Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse
Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered)
Inside Rinse Z Offset from a reference point defined by the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse -7 mm
position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 3. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 4. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-226 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX Transfer
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Position rinse station 5. Valid range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse
Outside Rinse Flow Rate 5 mL/min
position in the rinse station.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List
and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Tube Bottom
Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or
negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered)
Outside Rinse Z Offset from a reference point defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse 2 mm
position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to
Rinse Pump 1
Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX Transfer Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 3 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-227

 List of Tasks A
GX Transfer - Sequence of Steps
GX Transfer

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.

1 Aspirate
2 Dispense
3 Inside Rinse
4 Outside Rinse

ASPIRATE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Source Well in Source Zone.
4 Lower probe to Aspirate Z Option and Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Source Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

DISPENSE

If Extra Volume = 0
1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Source Volume + 1/2 Air Gap Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

If Extra Volume > 0

1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Source Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-228 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INSIDE RINSE

GX Transfer
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-229

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

A-230 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not
Extra Volume 25 μL
contaminated, and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 20 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-231

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value Tube Bottom
to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be
Liquid Level Following set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Injection Z Offset 0
defined by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-232 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values Tube Top
to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Drain Z Offset -7
defined by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–2. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-233

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move
to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-234 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-235

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
GX-271 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-236 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-237

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and acts as
Extra Volume 20 μL
an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up from the Tube Bottom
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Sample
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-238 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to move up from
the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Injection Z Offset 0
Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Top
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-239

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Drain
Drain Z Offset -7
Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse
Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered.

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–2. 1

Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Outside
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the
Rinse Pump 1
rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-240 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-241

 List of Tasks A
INJECTION PORT RINSE
GX-271 Partial Loop Injection

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-242 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes rinse of
the low pressure fraction collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-243

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Push Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 20 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-244 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main (Continued)

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value
The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Sample Z Offset 2
defined by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values Tube Bottom
to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Injection Z Offset 0
defined by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-245

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to Tube Top
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Drain Z Offset -7
defined by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–2. 2

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-246 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-247

 List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE
GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch low pressure fraction collection valve to COLLECT for 2 seconds.
6 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
7 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

A-248 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE

GX-271 Prep Injection with Collection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-249

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection
GX-271 Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-271 Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

A-250 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-271 Total Loop Injection

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Loop Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not
Extra Volume 1000 μL
contaminated, and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-251

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-271 Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Injection Z Offset 0
by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 3)

A-252 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX-271 Total Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to Tube Top
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Drain Z Offset -7
by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–2. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-253

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-271 Total Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1
Rinse Pump 1
or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX-271 Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-254 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

GX-271 Total Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Loop Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Loop Volume + 1/2 Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-255

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
GX-271 Total Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-256 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-257

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Loop Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not
Extra Volume 10 μL
contaminated, and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

A factor to multiply the Loop Volume by that determines the injection volume. Injection Volume = Loop Volume Overfill x Loop
Loop Volume Overfill 5
Volume.

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-258 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main (Continued)

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Injection Z Offset 0
by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-259

 List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to Tube Top
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Drain Z Offset -7
by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 500 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–2. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-260 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1
Rinse Pump 1
or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-261

 List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE
GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

A-262 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE

GX-271 Total Loop Injection Overfill

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-263

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

A-264 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Enter 2 for the Left GX Direct Injection Module.

Valve ID 3
Enter 3 for the Right GX Direct Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not
Extra Volume 25 μL
contaminated, and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 20 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-265

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value Tube Bottom
to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be
Liquid Level Following set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Injection Z Offset 0
defined by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-266 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values Tube Top
to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Drain Z Offset -7
defined by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Position range is 1–6. 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-267

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions
from the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move
to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-268 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-269

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
GX-281 Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-270 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-271

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Enter 2 for the Left GX Direct Injection Module.

Valve ID 3
Enter 3 for the Right GX Direct Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and acts as
Extra Volume 20 μL
an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume and Injection Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-272 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up from the Tube Bottom
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Sample
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to move up from
the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Injection Z Offset 0
Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 3)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-273

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Top
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up from the
bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Drain
Drain Z Offset -7
Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range is 1–6.
2
Position The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 3)

A-274 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Outside
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the
Rinse Pump 1
rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 3 of 3)

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-275

 List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE
GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

A-276 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE

GX-281 Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-277

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of
the low pressure fraction collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

A-278 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Enter 2 for the Left GX Direct Injection Module.

Valve ID 3
Enter 3 for the Right GX Direct Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Injection Volume and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 20 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Injection Volume and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-279

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Sample Z Offset 2
defined by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values Tube Bottom
to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Injection Z Offset 0
defined by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-280 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to Tube Top
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Drain Z Offset -7
defined by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 2

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-281

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-282 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch low pressure fraction collection valve to COLLECT for 2 seconds.
6 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
7 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-283

 List of Tasks A
INJECTION PORT RINSE
GX-281 Prep Injection with Collection

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-284 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Rack Scan

GX-281 Rack Scan

This Task scans the racks on the locator plate of the GX-281 Liquid Handler for the purpose of ensuring that the rack hardware setup matches the software
rack (Bed Layout) setup.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Rack Scan Properties

GX-281 Rack Scan Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler
GX-281 Rack Scan Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-285

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Total Loop Injection
GX-281 Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main
GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

A-286 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-281 Total Loop Injection

GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Enter 2 for the Left GX Direct Injection Module.

Valve ID 3
Enter 3 for the Right GX Direct Injection Module.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Extra Volume and Loop Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Loop Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 50 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not
Extra Volume 1000 μL
contaminated, and acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Loop Volume.

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume and Loop Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-287

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-281 Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Extra Volume and Loop Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Extra Volume and Loop Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Injection Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Injection Z Offset 0
by the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-288 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Total Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the GX Solvent System is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to Tube Top
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Drain Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Drain Z Offset -7
by the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 1000 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 5 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-289

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-281 Total Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1
Rinse Pump 1
or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-281 Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-290 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

GX-281 Total Loop Injection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Loop Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense Loop Volume + 1/2 Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-291

 List of Tasks A
INJECTION PORT RINSE
GX-281 Total Loop Injection

1 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
2 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-292 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Main
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection - Sequence of Steps

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-293

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 10 μL

400 μL
Note: This default was determined using a 125 mm
Pull Volume A volume of air used to pull the injection volume into the sample loop. Z travel height, a 0.8 mm ID probe, and 35.6 cm (14
in.) of 0.8 mm ID tubing between the probe and the
injection valve.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Volume and the Pull Volume moves into the probe. 2 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Injection Volume and Pull Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-294 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Inside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset Tube Top
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for
the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Inside Rinse Z Offset -7 mm
defined by the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-295

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-296 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection - Sequence of Steps

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Inside Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
2 Wait 0.02 min.
3 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
4 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
5 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
6 Aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Aspirate Pull Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
9 Wait injection equilibration time.
10 Synchronize.

INJECT
1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-297

 List of Tasks A
INSIDE RINSE
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-298 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a pull volume of air to pull the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure
fraction collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-299

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main (Continued)
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 10 μL

400 μL
Note: This default was determined using a
Pull Volume A volume of air used to pull the injection volume into the sample loop. 125 mm Z travel height, a 0.8 mm ID probe, and
35.6 cm (14 in.) of 0.8 mm ID tubing between the
probe and the injection valve.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Volume and the Pull Volume moves into the probe. 2 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Injection Volume and Pull Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 sec

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Sample Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Sample Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set
Liquid Level Following to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-300 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Inside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the
bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset Tube Top
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Inside Rinse Z Offset -7 mm
defined by the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Number of Rinse Stations Select the number of rinse stations to be used when performing the outside rinse. Valid range is 1–5. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 1. Valid range
Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 2. Valid range
Rinse Well 2 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 3. Valid range
Rinse Well 3 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-301

 List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 4. Valid range
Rinse Well 4 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the GX Solvent System during the outside rinse at rinse station 5. Valid range
Rinse Well 5 Solvent Valve is 1–6. 2
Position
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 2000 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 5 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from
the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset Tube Bottom
values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the
Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
defined by the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output
Rinse Pump 1
1 or select 2 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Pump Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-302 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Inside Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at 5 mL/min.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
6 Switch low pressure fraction collection valve to COLLECT for 2 seconds.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
2 Wait 0.02 min.
3 Switch solvent valve to waste and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
4 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
5 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
6 Aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Aspirate Pull Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
9 Wait injection equilibration time.
10 Synchronize.

INJECT
1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-303

 List of Tasks A
INSIDE RINSE
GX-281 Z Inject Prep Injection with Collection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch solvent valve to Solvent Valve Position and dispense volume held by transfer tubing at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to rinse station/well 1 in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Switch Rinse Pump on at Rinse Pump Speed.
5 Switch solvent valve to Rinse Well 1 Solvent Valve Position and dispense Outside Rinse Volume at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
• If the current solvent valve position is not the same as the previous solvent valve position, dispense Outside Rinse Volume + 2000 uL + Transfer Tubing volume
6 Switch Rinse Pump off.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat steps 2–7 for the Number of Rinse Stations, incrementing the rinse station/well for each rinse station.

A-304 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Home Fraction Collector

Home Fraction Collector

This Task homes the specified Fraction Collector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Home Fraction Collector Properties

Home Fraction Collector Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Fraction Collector The fraction collector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Home Fraction Collector Properties

Home Fraction Collector - Sequence of Steps

1 Move to home position at the left rear of the X and Y matrix.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-305

 List of Tasks A
Home Liquid Handler
Home Liquid Handler

This Task homes the specified liquid handler.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Home Liquid Handler Properties

Home Liquid Handler - Sequence of Steps

Home Liquid Handler Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Inside Rinse Zone The zone at which the Dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Home Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-306 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Home Liquid Handler Properties (Continued)

Home Liquid Handler

Property Name Brief Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when performing the move:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Z Offset The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Z Option. 2 mm

Home Liquid Handler Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Home Liquid Handler - Sequence of Steps

1 Home the X/Y/Z of the Liquid Handler.
2 Move the probe to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe to Z Option and Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-307

 List of Tasks A
Injection Rinse
Injection Rinse

This Task rinses the injection port and must be synchronized with a Move to Sample Location Task to move the probe to the injection port prior to rinsing.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Injection Rinse Properties

Injection Rinse Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid dispensed. 1000 μL

Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the injection port. 3 mL/min

Injection Rinse Properties

A-308 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Injection Valve Position

Injection Valve Position

This Task sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Injection Valve Position Properties

Injection Valve Position Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect.

Injection Valve Position Select from LOAD or INJECT. INJECT

Enter 1 to for the GX Z Injection Module.
Valve ID Enter 2 for the Left GX Direct Injection Module. 1
Enter 3 for the Right GX Direct Injection Module.
Injection Valve Position Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-309

 List of Tasks A
Inside Rinse
Inside Rinse

This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the inside of the probe.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Inside Rinse Properties

Inside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

Inside Rinse Properties

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 1000 μL

Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 3 mL/min

Inside Rinse Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-310 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Inside Rinse Properties (Continued)

Inside Rinse
For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Inside Rinse Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Inside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-311

 List of Tasks A
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-312 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 10 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-313

 List of Tasks A
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0
the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Top
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-314 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset -7
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 500 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-315

 List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE
Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Aspirate Push Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate from Reservoir.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2-3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-316 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE

Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-317

 List of Tasks A
Mix with Air
Mix with Air

This Task aspirates air and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Mix with Air Properties - Main
Mix with Air Properties - Advanced
Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing

Mix with Air - Sequence of Steps

Mix with Air Properties - Main

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Mixing Zone The zone in which the Mixing Volume is mixed. Sample Zone

Mix with Air Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-318 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Mix with Air Properties - Main (Continued)

Mix with Air

Property Name Brief Description Default Value
Mixing Well Enter the well number in the Mixing Zone. 0

Number of Wells to Mix The number of Mixing Wells to mix. 1

Number of Cycles Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2

Mixing Volume The quantity of air used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Mix with Air Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Mix with Air Properties - Advanced

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which a volume air moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which a volume of air moves out of the probe. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when delivering air to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Dispense Z Offset values to move
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
the Dispense Z Option for delivering air to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone. The Dispense Z Option must be set to
Dispense LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option.
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone.

Mix with Air Properties - Advanced

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-319

 List of Tasks A
Mix with Air

Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 250 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-320 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

Mix with Air

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Mix with Air Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Mix with Air - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Mix
2 Inside Rinse
3 Outside Rinse

MIX
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Mixing Well in Mixing Zone.
3 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
4 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate (first cycle only).
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
7 Dispense Mixing Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-321

 List of Tasks A
INSIDE RINSE
Mix with Air

1 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Repeat Number of Wells to Mix.

A-322 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Mix with Liquid

Mix with Liquid

This Task aspirates liquid and then dispenses it into a well a specified number of times.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Mix with Liquid Properties - Main
Mix with Liquid Properties - Advanced
Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing

Mix with Liquid - Sequence of Steps

Mix with Liquid Properties - Main

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Mixing Zone The zone in which the Mixing Volume is mixed. Sample Zone

Mix with Liquid Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-323

 List of Tasks A
Mix with Liquid Properties - Main (Continued)
Mix with Liquid

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Mixing Well Enter the well number in the Mixing Zone. 0

Number of Wells to Mix The number of Mixing Wells to mix. 1

Number of Cycles Type the number of times the Task should repeat the commands related to mixing. 2

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Mixing Volume The quantity of liquid used as part of a mixing process. 0 μL

Mix with Liquid Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Mix with Liquid Properties - Advanced

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Mixing Volume moves into the probe. 1 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which the Mixing Volume moves out of the probe. 10 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when drawing liquids from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Aspirate Z Offset values to move
Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Aspirate Z Offset 2 mm
the Aspirate Z Option for drawing liquids from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Mixing Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Aspirate LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Mixing Zone.

Mix with Liquid Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-324 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Mix with Liquid Properties - Advanced (Continued)

Mix with Liquid

Property Name Brief Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when delivering liquids to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Dispense Z Offset values to move
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
the Dispense Z Option for delivering liquids to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Mixing Zone. The Dispense Z Option must be set to
Dispense LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Mixing Zone.

Mix with Liquid Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 250 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-325

 List of Tasks A
Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing
Mix with Liquid

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Inside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Mix with Liquid Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-326 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Mix with Liquid - Sequence of Steps

Mix with Liquid

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Mix
2 Inside Rinse
3 Outside Rinse

MIX
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Mixing Well in Mixing Zone.
4 Lower probe to Aspirate Z Option and Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Mixing Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
7 Dispense Mixing Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 for Number of Cycles.
9 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Repeat Number of Wells to Mix.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-327

 List of Tasks A
Move to Sample Location
Move to Sample Location

This Task moves the probe to a specified height in a specified well in a specified zone.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Move to Sample Location Properties

Move to Sample Location Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone to move to. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Move to Sample Location Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-328 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Move to Sample Location Properties (Continued)

Move to Sample Location

Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when performing the move:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout; accepts
a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Z Offset The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Z Option. 2 mm

Move to Sample Location Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-329

 List of Tasks A
Outside Rinse
Outside Rinse

This Task moves to the rinse station and then rinses the outside of the probe.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Outside Rinse Properties

Outside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

Outside Rinse Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 1000 μL

Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 3 mL/min

Outside Rinse Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-330 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Outside Rinse Properties (Continued)

Outside Rinse
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to move
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Outside Rinse - Sequence of Steps

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-331

 List of Tasks A
Partial Loop Injection
Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-332 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)

Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Injection Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume and Injection Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-333

 List of Tasks A
Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0
the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Top
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-334 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

Partial Loop Injection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset -7
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 500 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-335

 List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE
Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
5 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 2–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-336 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE

Partial Loop Injection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
7 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-337

 List of Tasks A
Prep Injection with Collection
Prep Injection with Collection

This Task is used when doing injection and fraction collection on the same bed. It performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir
to push the injection volume into the sample loop and includes a rinse of the low pressure fraction collection valve.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main
Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced
Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps

A-338 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A

Prep Injection with Collection

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Injector The injector or injection module that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume is aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Injection Volume and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 6 μL

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 10 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Main

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 3 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-339

 List of Tasks A
Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Prep Injection with Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0
the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-340 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)

Prep Injection with Collection

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Top
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset -7
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 500 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Prep Injection with Collection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-341

 List of Tasks A
Prep Injection with Collection - Sequence of Steps
Prep Injection with Collection

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.

1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

INITIALIZE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Switch low pressure fraction collection valve to COLLECT for 2 seconds.
5 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
6 Home dilutor.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir and aspirate Push Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Injection Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

A-342 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INJECTION PORT RINSE

Prep Injection with Collection

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
5 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 2–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

OUTSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir.
5 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Switch dilutor valve to probe.
7 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-343

 List of Tasks A
Prime Dilutor
Prime Dilutor

This Task primes the dilutor in the specified zone. It aspirates the syringe capacity from the reservoir and then dispenses to the specified wells in the specified
zone for the number of cycles.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Prime Dilutor Properties

Prime Dilutor - Sequence of Steps

Prime Dilutor Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Number of Cycles Enter the number of times to repeat aspirating and dispensing. 4

Flow Rate The speed at which the solvent moves into the syringe and then out of the probe. 10 mL/min

Rinse Zone The zone to which the volume is dispensed. Inside Rinse

Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Rinse Zone. 1

Prime Dilutor Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-344 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Prime Dilutor Properties (Continued)

Prime Dilutor
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when delivering liquids to the rinse station:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Z Option Tube Bottom
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Z Offset value to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Z Option
Z Offset 2 mm
for delivering liquids to the rinse station.

Prime Dilutor Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Prime Dilutor - Sequence of Steps

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height
2 Move probe to Rinse Well in Rinse Zone.
3 Lower probe to Z Option and Z Offset.
4 Home dilutor.
5 Aspirate full syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Flow Rate.
6 Dispense full syringe capacity at Flow Rate.
7 Repeat steps 5–6 for Number of Cycles.
8 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-345

 List of Tasks A
Prompt
Prompt

This Task displays a prompt dialog with the selected message.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Prompt Properties

Prompt Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Message Enter the text to display in the message box. Message

Prompt Properties

A-346 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Detector Mode

Set Detector Mode

This Task sets the detection mode on a 155 or 156 UV/VIS Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Detector Mode Properties

Set Detector Mode Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. DUAL

Set Detector Mode Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-347

 List of Tasks A
Set Fraction Site
Set Fraction Site

This Task identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Fraction Site Properties

Set Fraction Site Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Fraction Collector The fraction collector that the Task will affect. Fraction Collector

Fraction Zone The zone in which fractions are collected. Fraction Zone

Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin. The default of 0 is for continuous collection and the fractions are always
Fraction Well 0
collected in the next available tube.

Set Fraction Site Properties

A-348 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Multiple Bed Collection

Set Multiple Bed Collection

This Task is used to set the fraction site when multiple fraction collectors are being used.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Multiple Bed Collection Properties

Set Multiple Bed Collection Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Fraction Site 1
The first fraction collector that the Task will affect. Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector

Fraction Site 1
The zone in which fractions are collected on the first fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone

Set Multiple Bed Collection Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-349

 List of Tasks A
Set Multiple Bed Collection Properties (Continued)
Set Multiple Bed Collection

Property Name Description Default Value

Fraction Site 1 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the first fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous collection
0
Fraction Well and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Site 2
The second fraction collector that the Task will affect. Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector

Fraction Site 2
The zone in which fractions are collected on the second fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone

Fraction Site 2 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the second fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous
0
Fraction Well collection and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Site 3
The third fraction collector that the Task will affect. Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector

Fraction Site 3
The zone in which fractions are collected on the third fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone

Fraction Site 3 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the third fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous collection
0
Fraction Well and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Fraction Site 4
The fourth fraction collector that the Task will affect. Fraction Collector
Fraction Collector

Fraction Site 4
The zone in which fractions are collected on the fourth fraction collector. Fraction Zone
Fraction Zone

Fraction Site 4 Enter the well number in the Fraction Zone in which collection will begin on the fourth fraction collector. The default of 0 is for continuous collection
0
Fraction Well and the fractions are always collected in the next available tube.

Set Multiple Bed Collection Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-350 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Non Peak Per Tube

Set Non Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting non-peaks.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Non Peak Per Tube Properties

Set Non Peak Per Tube Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Time/Volume Select from NONE, TIME, or VOLUME NONE

Time
When TIME is selected; enter the time to dispense at each tube. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Volume
When VOLUME is selected; enter the maximum volume to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Set Non Peak Per Tube Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-351

 List of Tasks A
Set Peak Level
Set Peak Level

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Peak Level Properties

Set Peak Level Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

When collecting by LEVEL; the mV level above which all effluent is collected. This value is especially useful if the detector signal should go
Peak Level 15
off-scale during collection.

Collect Positive Peak Select to turn on or clear to turn off collection of positive peaks Selected

Collect Negative Peak Select to turn on or clear to turn off collection of negative peaks Cleared

Collect Non Peak Select to indicate if all effluent should be collected into tubes. Cleared

Set Peak Level Properties

A-352 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Peak Per Tube

Set Peak Per Tube

This Task sets parameters for collecting peaks.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Peak Per Tube Properties

Set Peak Per Tube Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Time/Volume Select from NONE, TIME, or VOLUME NONE

Time
Enter the time to dispense at each tube. 0 min
Time Per Tube

Volume
Enter the maximum volume to be collected into each tube. 0 μL
Volume Per Tube

Set Peak Per Tube Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-353

 List of Tasks A
Set Peak Slope
Set Peak Slope

This Task sets the parameters for fraction collection by slope.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Peak Slope Properties

Set Peak Slope Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Peak Front Slope Slope (in degrees) of peak’s ascending edge. 25

Peak Back Slope Slope (in degrees) of peak’s descending edge. 25

Enter the Sensitivity value.

Sensitivity The sensitivity setting maximizes the number of peaks that are collected while minimizing the collection of trace artifacts. 85
If the trace has a lot of noise, then the value should be decreased to reduce the number of smaller peaks that are collected
or increased to increase the number of peaks that are collected.

Set Peak Slope Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-354 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Peak Slope Properties (Continued)

Set Peak Slope

Property Name Description Default Value
Indicate whether the front of the slope to the apex (Front APEX), the apex to the tail (APEX Tail) or the entire peak (ALL)
Collection Region ALL
should be collected. To collect the entire peak, but advance to the next well at the apex, select APEX.

Collect Positive Peaks Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of positive peaks Selected

Collect Negative Peaks Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of negative peaks Cleared

Co-eluted Peaks Select to turn on or clear to turn off the collection of co-eluted peaks. Cleared

Collect Non Peak Indicates if all effluent should be collected into tubes (Selected) or not (Cleared) Cleared

Set Peak Slope Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-355

 List of Tasks A
Set Peak Width
Set Peak Width

This Task sets the Peak Width and Mode on the selected Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Peak Width Properties

Set Peak Width Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. DUAL

The detector must know the width of the narrowest peak in your run. The detector uses this information to optimize the presentation of peaks and
to minimize baseline noise.
Peak Width 4
To set the peak width accurately, run a chromatogram using the minimum peak width setting. Measure the width at half height of the narrowest peak.
Valid range is 0 and 4–99 seconds for SINGLE or SCAN mode or 4–99 for DUAL mode.
Set Peak Width Properties

A-356 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Sensitivity

Set Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels on the selected Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Sensitivity Properties

Set Sensitivity Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Mode Select from Single Mode, Dual Mode, or Scan Mode. Dual Mode

Single Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0
Sensitivity 1

Single Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0
Sensitivity 2

Dual Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0
Sensitivity 1

Set Sensitivity Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-357

 List of Tasks A
Set Sensitivity Properties
Set Sensitivity

Property Name Description Default Value

Dual Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0
Sensitivity 2

Scan Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0
Sensitivity 1

Scan Mode
One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on separate output channels. Valid range is 0.001 to 2.0 AUFS. 0
Sensitivity 2

Scan Mode
The sensitivity for monitoring output channel 3. Valid range is 0.001–2.000 AUFS 0
Scan Sensitivity

Set Sensitivity Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-358 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Set Wavelength

Set Wavelength
Sets the wavelengths to be monitored based on the Mode selected for the selected Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Set Wavelength Properties

Set Wavelength Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. DUAL

Single Mode
The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 1

Dual Mode
The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 1

Dual Mode
The monitor wavelength for output channel 2. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 2

Set Wavelength Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-359

 List of Tasks A
Set Wavelength Properties
Set Wavelength

Property Name Description Default Value

Scan Mode
The monitor wavelength. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 0 nm
Wavelength 1

Scan Mode
The first wavelength in the range that will be scanned. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 190 nm
Scan Start Wavelength

Scan Mode
The last wavelength in the range that will be scanned. Valid range is 190–700 nm. 700 nm
Scan End Wavelength

Set Wavelength Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-360 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Solvent Valve Position

Solvent Valve Position

This Task switches the solvent valve on the specified pump.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Solvent Valve Position Properties

Solvent Valve Position Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Solvent Valve Desired position of the solvent valve on the Pump. Valid range is 1–6. 1

Solvent Valve Position

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-361

 List of Tasks A
Start Data Collection
Start Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

A-362 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Start Fraction Collection

Start Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to begin collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-363

 List of Tasks A
Stop Data Collection
Stop Data Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting data. This Task has no properties to set.

A-364 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Stop Fraction Collection

Stop Fraction Collection

This Task tells TRILUTION LC to stop collecting fractions. This Task has no properties to set.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-365

 List of Tasks A
Switch VALVEMATE
Switch VALVEMATE

This Task changes the valve position on a VALVEMATE.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Switch VALVEMATE Properties

Switch VALVEMATE Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

VALVEMATE The VALVEMATE that the Task will affect. Valve

Desired position of the valve on the VALVEMATE.

Position 1
Note: When using a 2-position valve on a VALVEMATE, choose 1 for position 0 or 2 for position 1.

Switch VALVEMATE Properties

A-366 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Sync

Sync
This task coordinates steps in a Task with a time in a Method.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Sync Properties

Sync - Sequence of Steps

Sync Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Time Type the time at which the Method will wait for the Synchronize in a task.

Tasks In the Tasks drop-down, select the Task to which to synchronize.

Message In the Message drop-down, select the Message to display while waiting for the synchronize.

Type the number that corresponds to the Synchronize in the Task. For example, if three Synchronize commands were inserted in the Task, typing 1
Sync with Synchronize would synchronize the Method to the first Synchronize command in the Task. Typing three would synchronize the Method to the last Synchronize 1
command in the Task.

Sync to end of Task The Method will wait until the Task completes.

Sync Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-367

 List of Tasks A
Sync - Sequence of Steps
Sync

To set a synchronize to coordinate a step in a Task with a time in a Method:

1 Insert a Synchronize command(s) in the Task.
2 Insert that Task in the Method.
3 Insert a Sync Task in the Method.
a) In the Time box, type the time at which the Method will wait for the Synchronize in the Task.

Sync Task Properties

b) In the Tasks drop-down, select the Task to which to synchronize.
c) Optionally, type a message to display while the software waits.
d) Select the option button to either Sync with synchronize or Sync to end of Task.
If Sync with synchronize, then also type the number that corresponds to the Synchronize in the Task. For example, if three Synchronize commands were inserted
in the Task, typing 1 would synchronize the Method to the first Synchronize command in the Task. Typing 3 would synchronize the Method to the last Synchronize
command in the Task.
If Sync to end of Task is selected, the Method will wait until the Task completes.

The Sync Task displays as a blue vertical line in the Control.

A-368 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Total Loop Injection Overfill

Total Loop Injection Overfill

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main
Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Advanced
Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing

Total Loop Injection Overfill - Sequence of Steps

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Sample Zone The zone from which the Extra Volume and Loop Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone
Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-369

 List of Tasks A
Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main (Continued)
Total Loop Injection Overfill

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume and Loop Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Loop Volume.

Loop Volume Overfill A factor to multiply the Loop Volume by that determines the injection volume. Injection Volume = Loop Volume Overfill x Loop Volume. 5

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume and Loop Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-370 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Advanced (Continued)

Total Loop Injection Overfill

Property Name Description Default Value
When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when performing the injection:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Injection Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 0
the Injection Z Option when performing the injection.

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Top
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-371

 List of Tasks A
Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
Total Loop Injection Overfill

Property Name Description Default Value

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset -7
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 500 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Total Loop Injection Overfill Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

Total Loop Injection Overfill - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-372 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

Total Loop Injection Overfill

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset.
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Switch injection valve to INJECT.
2 Home dilutor.
3 Aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Repeat steps 3–4 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-373

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
Total Loop Injection Overfill

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.

A-374 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Transfer

Transfer
This Task aspirates the specified volume of liquid (Source Volume) from the probe and then dispenses the volume to the wells of the result zone.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Transfer Properties - Main
Transfer Properties - Advanced
Transfer Properties - Rinsing

Transfer - Sequence of Steps

Transfer Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

Source Zone The zone from which the Source Volume and Extra Volume are drawn. Sample Zone

Source Well Enter the well number in the Source Zone. 0

Transfer Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-375

 List of Tasks A
Transfer Properties - Main (Continued)
Transfer

Property Name Description Default Value

Result Zone The zone to which the Source Volume is delivered. Sample Zone

Result Well Enter the well number in the Result Zone. 0

Number of Wells to Transfer The number of Source Wells to transfer to Result Wells. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of the air gap aspirated before the Source Volume. 6 μL

Source Volume The quantity of sample 0 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 0 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Source Volume.

Transfer Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

Transfer Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which the Source Volume and Extra Volume move into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which the Source Volume moves out of the probe. 3 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when drawing liquids from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Aspirate Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no
safety factor incorporated).
Aspirate Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Aspirate Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Aspirate Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Aspirate
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Aspirate Z Offset 2 mm
the Aspirate Z Option for drawing liquids from the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Source Zone. The Aspirate Z Option must be set to
Aspirate LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Source Zone.

Transfer Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-376 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Transfer Properties - Advanced (Continued)

Transfer
Property Name Description Default Value
One of five defined reference points used when delivering liquids to the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Dispense Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Dispense Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Dispense Z Offset value to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Dispense Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Dispense
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Dispense Z Offset 2 mm
the Dispense Z Option for delivering liquids to the bed.

When selected the probe will follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone. The Dispense Z Option must be set to
Dispense LLF AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared the probe will not follow the liquid up as it is delivered to the Result Zone.

Transfer Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

Transfer Properties - Rinsing

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

Inside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Inside Rinse Volume is delivered. Inside Rinse

Inside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Inside Rinse Zone. 1

Inside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the inside of the probe. 250 μL

Inside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Inside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the inside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

Transfer Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-377

 List of Tasks A
Transfer Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
Transfer

For information on Rinse Positions, refer to Appendix B, Rinse Locations.

Property Name Description Default Value

One of five defined reference points used when performing the inside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Inside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Inside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Inside Rinse Z Offset values to move Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Inside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Inside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Inside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Inside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the inside rinse position in the rinse station.

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 500 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Outside Rinse Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed
bottom (no safety factor incorporated).
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

Transfer Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

A-378 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Transfer - Sequence of Steps

Transfer
The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Aspirate
2 Dispense
3 Inside Rinse
4 Outside Rinse

ASPIRATE
1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
3 Move to Source Well in Source Zone.
4 Lower probe to Aspirate Z Option and Aspirate Z Offset.
5 Aspirate Source Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

DISPENSE
1 Move to Result Well in Result Zone.
2 Lower probe to Dispense Z Option and Dispense Z Offset.
3 Dispense Source Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INSIDE RINSE
1 Move to Inside Rinse Well in Inside Rinse Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Inside Rinse Z Option and Inside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Inside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity (from Reservoir) at Inside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-379

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
Transfer

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
8 Repeat Number of Wells to Transfer.

A-380 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Turn Lamp Off

Turn Lamp Off

This Task turns off power to the lamps while maintaining power to the Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Turn Lamp Off Properties

Turn Lamp Off Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Turn Lamp Off Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-381

 List of Tasks A
Turn Lamp On
Turn Lamp On

This Task turns the UV and visible lamps on for the specified Detector.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Turn Lamp On Properties

Turn Lamp On Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Detector The detector that the Task will affect. Detector

Turn Lamp On Properties

A-382 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Voltage On - Off

Voltage On - Off
This Task opens and powers off or closes and powers on a specified contact on a specified liquid handler.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Voltage On - Off Properties

Voltage On - Off Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Liquid Handler The liquid handler that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the liquid handler selected. 1

Voltage ON OFF The action to occur: open and power off (OFF) or close and power on (ON) the Contact ID. OFF

Voltage On - Off Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-383

 List of Tasks A
Wait for Contact
Wait for Contact

This Task initiates a wait in the Method until the contact state change is detected. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in
the Method from executing during the wait.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Wait for Contact Properties

Wait for Contact Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument The instrument that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Contact ID The input contact being monitored for a state change. A

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Wait for Contact Properties

A-384 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
Wait Time

Wait Time
This Task waits a specified length of time and displays an optional message. Sync to the end of the task (using a Sync Task) to prevent other Tasks in the
Method from executing during the wait

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Wait Time Properties

Wait Time Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Message Enter the text to display in the message box during the wait time.

Wait Time Time the program waits before starting the next Task. 0 min
Wait Time Properties

Wait Time - Sequence of Steps

1 Wait for Wait Time to elapse while displaying the optional Message.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-385

 List of Tasks A
Write to Display
Write to Display

This Task displays a message in the front panel display of the selected instrument.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

Write to Display Properties

Write to Display Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument The instrument that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Message Enter the text to display on the Instrument’s front panel. Message

Line For two-line displays, indicate the line on which to display the message. 1

Write to Display Properties

A-386 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection using a push volume from the reservoir to push the injection volume into the sample loop.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Injector The sample injector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-387

 List of Tasks A
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Push Volume A volume of reservoir solvent used to push the injection volume into the sample loop. 10 μL

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-388 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 2.2 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-389

 List of Tasks A
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 450 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-390 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch Dilutor Valve to Probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Switch Dilutor Valve to Reservoir and aspirate Push Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
3 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
5 Switch Dilutor Valve to Probe and aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume + Push Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to Reservoir and aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-391

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
XL Low Volume Partial Loop Injection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-392 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
XL Partial Loop Injection

XL Partial Loop Injection

This Task performs a partial loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main
XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

XL Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Injector The sample injector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Pump

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-393

 List of Tasks A
XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
XL Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Injection Volume The volume of sample to be injected. 0 μL

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-394 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

XL Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 2.2 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-395

 List of Tasks A
XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
XL Partial Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 450 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

XL Partial Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Partial Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-396 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

XL Partial Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch dilutor valve to probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate Injection Volume + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset
3 Dispense Extra Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
4 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
5 Wait 1.2 sec.
6 Dispense Injection Volume at Dispense Flow Rate.
7 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
8 Synchronize.
9 Switch Injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to Reservoir and aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-397

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
XL Partial Loop Injection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-398 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
XL Total Loop Injection

XL Total Loop Injection

This Task performs a total loop injection.

For more information about the properties on each tab, see:

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Main
XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced
XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

XL Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Main

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Injector The sample injector that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

Pump The pump that the Task will affect. Liquid Handler

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-399

 List of Tasks A
XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Main (Continued)
XL Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Sample Zone The zone from which the Injection Volume and Extra Volume are aspirated. Sample Zone

Sample Well Enter the well number in the Sample Zone. 0

Injection Zone The zone to which the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume are dispensed. Injection Zone

Injection Well Enter the well number in the Injection Zone. 1

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 3 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and
Extra Volume 10 μL
acts as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Injection Volume.

Loop Volume Overfill A factor to multiply the Loop Volume by that determines the injection volume. Injection Volume = Loop Volume Overfill x Loop Volume. 5

Loop Volume The capacity of the installed sample loop. 0 μL

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Main Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced

Property Name Description Default Value

Aspirate Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move into the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Dispense Flow Rate The speed at which liquid volumes move out of the probe. 0.5 mL/min

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Injection Equilibration Time Time the program waits after loading the Extra Volume, Injection Volume, and Push Volume in the sample loop. 0.05 min

One of five defined reference points used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Sample Z Offset value to move up
Sample Z Option Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Sample Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Sample
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Sample Z Offset 2 mm
the Sample Z Option used when aspirating the Injection Volume and Extra Volume from the bed.

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 1 of 2)

A-400 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced (Continued)

XL Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value
When selected, the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone. The Sample Z Option must be set to
Liquid Level Following AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. Cleared
When cleared, the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated from the Sample Zone.

One of five defined reference points used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Injection Z Offset value to move
Injection Z Option Tube Bottom
up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Injection Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Injection
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Injection Z Offset 2.2 mm
the Injection Z Option used when injecting the Injection Volume and Push Volume.

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Advanced Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing

Property Name Description Default Value

Drain Zone The zone in which the dilutor is homed. Inside Rinse

Drain Well Enter the well number in the Drain Zone. 1

One of five defined reference points used when purging to the drain:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Drain Z Offset, probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety
factor incorporated).
Drain Z Option Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Drain Z Offset values to move up Tube Bottom
from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Drain Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Drain
Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Drain Z Offset 2
the Drain Z Option for purging to the drain.

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 1 of 2)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-401

 List of Tasks A
XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing (Continued)
XL Total Loop Injection

Property Name Description Default Value

Injection Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the injection port at Injection Well in Injection Zone. 250 μL

Injection Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Injection Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and in to the injection port. 4 mL/min

Outside Rinse Zone The zone to which the Outside Rinse Volume is delivered. Outside Rinse

Outside Rinse Well Enter the well number in the Outside Rinse Zone. 1

Outside Rinse Volume The quantity of liquid used to rinse the outside of the probe. 450 μL

Outside Rinse Flow Rate The speed at which the Outside Rinse Volume moves out of the probe and into the outside rinse position in the rinse station. 10 mL/min

One of five defined reference points used when performing the outside rinse:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the
Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if a negative number is entered, probe will move toward the bed bottom.
Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Outside Rinse Z Offset values to
Outside Rinse Z Option Tube Bottom
move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Outside Rinse Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Outside
Rinse Z Offset.
Z Adjust: Moves the probe from the current position up (positive value) or down (negative value).

The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by
Outside Rinse Z Offset 2 mm
the Outside Rinse Z Option for rinsing the probe at the outside rinse position in the rinse station.

XL Total Loop Injection Properties - Rinsing Table (Page 2 of 2)

XL Total Loop Injection - Sequence of Steps

The following is an overview for the sequence of steps.
1 Initialize
2 Aspirate
3 Inject
4 Injection Port Rinse
5 Outside Rinse

A-402 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Tasks A
INITIALIZE

XL Total Loop Injection

1 Move Z to Z Safe Height.
2 Set injection valve to INJECT.
3 Move to Drain Well in Drain Zone.
4 Lower probe into well to Drain Z Option and Drain Z Offset.
5 Home dilutor.
6 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

ASPIRATE
1 Switch Dilutor Valve to Probe and aspirate Air Gap Volume at Air Gap Flow Rate.
2 Move to Sample Well in Sample Zone.
3 Lower probe into well to Sample Z Option and Sample Z Offset.
4 Aspirate the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) + Extra Volume at Aspirate Flow Rate.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

INJECT
1 Move to Injection Well in Injection Zone.
2 Lower probe into well to Injection Z Option and Injection Z Offset
3 Switch injection valve to LOAD.
4 Wait 1.2 sec.
5 Dispense the injection volume (injection volume = Loop Overfill x Loop Volume) at Dispense Flow Rate.
6 Wait Injection Equilibration Time.
7 Synchronize.
8 Switch Injection valve to INJECT.

INJECTION PORT RINSE

1 Home dilutor.
2 Switch dilutor valve to Reservoir and aspirate Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
3 Switch dilutor valve to probe and dispense Injection Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Injection Rinse Flow Rate.
4 Repeat steps 2–3 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
5 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide A-403

 List of Tasks A
OUTSIDE RINSE
XL Total Loop Injection

1 Move to Outside Rinse Well in Outside Rinse Zone.

2 Lower probe into well to Outside Rinse Z Option and Outside Rinse Z Offset.
3 Home dilutor.
4 Switch dilutor valve to reservoir aspirate Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
5 Switch dilutor valve to probe dispense Outside Rinse Volume or syringe capacity at Outside Rinse Flow Rate.
6 Repeat steps 4–5 until requested rinse volume is aspirated and dispensed.
7 Move Z to Z Safe Height.

A-404 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Rinse Locations B

Rinse locations are assigned to zones in the Bed Layout Builder. Inside and outside rinse zones are then chosen in the Task. This appendix describes the
recommended rinse positions for the:
• 215 Liquid Handler
• GX-271 Liquid Handler
• GX-281 Liquid Handler

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide B-1

 Rinse Locations B
215 Liquid Handler
Rinse Locations

Bed Layout Trays (Templates)

215 for Code 517 Rack

215 for Five Code 200-Series Racks

215 for Seven XL Racks

Rinse 215 (Footprint)

Rinse 215

B-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Rinse Locations B

Rinse Locations
Drain 215 Body

Rinse 215 Insert

Rinse 215 Deep Short Insert

Rinse 215 Deep Tall Insert

Rinse 215 Flow-Through Short Insert

Rinse 215 Flow-Through Tall Insert

Rinse 215 Shallow Short Insert

Rinse 215 Shallow Tall Insert

Inside Rinse Location (Left Well) Outside or Flow-Through Rinse Location (Center Well)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide B-3

 Rinse Locations B
GX-271 Liquid Handler
Rinse Locations

Bed Layout Tray (Template)

GX-271 20- and 12X-Series Racks with Direct Inject

GX-271 20-Series Racks
GX-271 20-Series Racks with Direct Inject
GX-271 200-Series Racks
GX-271 200-Series Racks with Direct Inject

GX Rinse Stations (Footprints)

GX Rinse Stations

B-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Rinse Locations B

Rinse Locations
Drain/Rinse station GX Extra Tall (Rack)
Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Inside Rinse 210 26034556

Drain/Rinse Station GX Tall (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Inside Rinse 175 26034555

Drain/Rinse Station GX Short (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Inside Rinse 125 26034554

Drain/Rinse Station GX Short (56 mm Probe) (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number

Inside Rinse 125 26034554

Drain/Rinse Station for Inside Rinse of Probe

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide B-5

 Rinse Locations B
Rinse Locations

Rinse Station GX Extra Tall (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 210 26034553

Rinse Station GX-281 Tall (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 175 26034551

Rinse Station GX-281 Short (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 125 26034552

Rinse Station GX Short (56 mm Probe) (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number

Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 125 26034552

Rinse Station for Outside Rinse Station for Outside

Rinse of Probe (Static) Rinse of Probe (Flowing)

B-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Rinse Locations B
GX-281 Liquid Handler

Rinse Locations
Bed Layout Tray (Template)

GX-281

GX Rinse Stations (Footprints)

GX Rinse Stations

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide B-7

 Rinse Locations B
Rinse Locations

Drain/Rinse Station GX Extra Tall (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Inside Rinse 210 26034556

Drain/Rinse Station GX Tall (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Inside Rinse 175 26034555

Drain/Rinse Station GX Short (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number

Inside Rinse 125 26034554

Drain/Rinse Station for Inside Rinse of Probe

B-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Rinse Locations B

Rinse Locations
Rinse Station GX Extra Tall (Rack)
Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 210 26034553

Rinse Station GX Tall (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number
Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 175 26034551

Rinse Station GX Short (Rack)

Rinse Station
Use Z Clamp Height (mm)
Part Number

Outside Rinse (static or flowing) 125 26034552

Rinse Station for Outside Rinse Station for Outside

Rinse of Probe (Static) Rinse of Probe (Flowing)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide B-9

Peak Integration C

When integrating, Front and Back Slope, Peak Width, and Sensitivity values all influence the amount of the peak that is integrated.

Examples are provided.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide C-1

 Peak Integration C
Effect of Peak Width
Peak Integration

Peak Width was left at the default value of 0 (off, no filtering) and then set at 0.03 min to show how a peak
will not be integrated if the peak width at half height is less than or equal to the Peak Width setting.The
Front Slope, Back Slope and Sensitivity values were held constant at the default values (25, 25, 85).

Peak Width = 0 min Peak Width = 0 min

Peak Width = 0.03 min

C-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Peak Integration C
Effect of Slope

Peak Integration
Front and Back Slope
The Front Slope and Back Slope values were incrementally
increased to show how changing the values affects the
amount of the peak that is integrated. Sensitivity was held
constant at 85 and Peak Width was 0.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide C-3

 Peak Integration C
Back Slope
Peak Integration

If the peak has significant tailing, then the Back Slope value
should be increased to reduce the amount of the tail that is
integrated or decreased to increase the amount of the tail
that is integrated. The Front Slope value was held constant
at 30, Sensitivity was held constant at 85, and Peak Width
was 0.

C-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Peak Integration C
Effect of Sensitivity

Peak Integration
The sensitivity setting maximizes the number of peaks that are integrated while minimizing the
integration of trace artifacts. If the trace has a lot of noise, then the value should be decreased to reduce
the number of smaller peaks that are integrated or increased to increase the number of peaks that are
integrated. The Front and Back Slope values were held constant at 25 and Peak Width was 0.

Sensitivity = 100

Sensitivity = 85
DEFAULT

Sensitivity = 5

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide C-5

Fraction Collection Techniques D

Fraction collection parameters are set in the Control in the Method Builder.

This appendix describes the effects how the settings for collection option affect the amount of the peak that is collected when collecting by Slope.

Examples are provided.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide D-1

 Fraction Collection Techniques D
Coordinate Integration with Fraction Collection
Fraction Collection Techniques

For integration and fraction collection to occur at the same time, use the same Front Slope values in the
Fraction Collection Settings task in the Control and the Peak Slope and Sensitivity task in the Analysis and
also the same Back Slope values in the Fraction Collection Settings task in the Control and the Peak Slope
and Sensitivity task in the Analysis.
The following example uses the default Fraction Collection Settings and the default Peak Slope and
Sensitivity settings.

D-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Fraction Collection Techniques D
Collect Heart of Peak

Fraction Collection Techniques

To collect the heart of the peak, set the Collection Region to ALL (which is default) and increase the
Front Slope and/or Back Slope values. If the peak has significant tailing, then the Back Slope value should
be increased to reduce the amount of the tail that is collected. If the peak has significant fronting, then the
Front Slope value should be increased to reduce the amount of fronting that is collected.
The following example shows the heart of the peak collected (by setting the Front Slope and Back Slope
values to 85) and the entire peak integrated (using the default settings in the Peak Slope and Sensitivity
task in the Analysis).

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide D-3

 Fraction Collection Techniques D
Collect Front to APEX
Fraction Collection Techniques

To collect from the Front Slope value to the highest point of the peak, set the Collection Region to Front
APEX.

The following example shows the front of the peak to the APEX collected by setting the Front Slope value
to 25 and the Collection Region to Front APEX.

D-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Fraction Collection Techniques D
Collect APEX to Tail

Fraction Collection Techniques

To collect from the highest point of the peak to the Back Slope value, set the Collection Region to APEX Tail.
The following example shows the APEX to the tail collected by setting the Back Slope value to 25 and the
Collection Region to APEX Tail.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide D-5

 Fraction Collection Techniques D
Collect APEX
Fraction Collection Techniques

To collect the entire peak, but advance to the next tube at the APEX, set the Collection Region to APEX.
The following example shows the peak being collected into two tubes with the valve switching and the
collector advancing to the next tube at the APEX by setting the Front Slope and Back Slope values to 25
and the Collection Region to APEX.

D-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E

The Commands palette lists the pre-defined Commands with properties. These Commands are read-only. Few properties are common to all Commands.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-1

 List of Commands E
List of Commands

Command Name

Aspirate Move Z Set Non Peak Time Per Tube UnLock Front Panel

Aspirate Air Gap Output Contact Close Set Non Peak Volume Per Tube Voltage Off

Aspirate Z-Inject Output Contact Open Set Peak Level Voltage On

Autozero Channel Output Contact Pulse Set Peak Slope and Sensitivity Wait

Clear Channel Output Contact Status Set Peak Width Wait for Change in Contact State

Dispense Prime Set Scan Output Time Wait with Display

Dispense Air Gap Prompt Set Sensitivity Write to Display

Dispense Inject Prompt for Input Set Switching Valve Position Zero Analog Offset Voltage

Get Current Held Volume Read Display Set Time Per Tube

Get Max Holding Volume Read Valvemate Position Set Volume Per Tube

GSIOC Record Setting Set Wavelength

GSIOC with ID Rinse Pump (GX) Solvent Valve

Home Probes Run Executable Sound

Home Pump Scan Bar Codes Start Collection

Home Syringes Service Heads Start Data Collection

Home Valvemate Set DAD Wavelength Start File

Input Contact Status Set Injection Valve Position Start Scan

LL Seek Set Valvemate Position Stop Collection

LLD Set Collection and Travel Depth Stop Data Collection

LLD Sensitivity Set Dual Ratio Multiplier Synchronize

Lock Front Panel Set Dual Ratio Threshold Sync Wait Done

Log Message Set Flow Rate Turn Lamp Off

Move Delta Set Fraction Site Turn Lamp On

Move to Well Set Low Pressure Valve Turn Lamp Saver Off

Move to XY Set Mode Turn Lamp Saver On

E-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Aspirate

List of Commands
This Command draws liquid.
Aspirate - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

LH Instrument The liquid handler that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Syringe ID Not used. ALL

Valve Position The desired position of the dilutor valve. Select Gas, Probe, or Reservoir. PROBE

Sample Volume The amount of sample to aspirate. This volume can not exceed the syringe capacity. 100 μL

An additional volume to the Sample volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and acts
Extra Volume 0 μL
as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Sample Volume.

Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Used only when Valve Position = PROBE is selected; select TRUE and the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated. The Z Option must be
Use LLF set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. FALSE
Select FALSE and the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated.

Aspirate - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-3

 List of Commands E
Aspirate Air Gap
List of Commands

This command aspirates the specified volume of air at the specified rate using the specified syringe. This
command is used only on pumps to aspirate the specified air volume.
Aspirate Air Gap - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Syringe ID Not used. ALL

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 100 μL

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 0.3 mL/min

Aspirate Air Gap - Properties

E-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Aspirate Z-Inject

List of Commands
This command draws injection volume into the Z-injection valve.
Aspirate Z-Inject - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

LH Instrument The liquid handler that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Syringe ID Not used. ALL

Valve Position The desired position of the dilutor valve. Select Gas, Probe, or Reservoir. PROBE

Sample Volume The amount of sample to aspirate. This volume can not exceed the syringe capacity. 100 μL

An additional volume to the Sample volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and acts
Extra Volume 0 μL
as an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Sample Volume.

Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Used only when Valve Position = PROBE is selected; select TRUE and the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated. The Z Option must be
Use LLF set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. FALSE
Select FALSE and the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated.

Aspirate Z-Inject - Properties

Autozero Channel
This command zeros the output channels of the detector. All buffered values also become zero.
Autozero Channel - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Autozero Channel - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-5

 List of Commands E
Clear Channel
List of Commands

This command clears the FIFO for the selected analog input channel on the 506C System Interface.
Clear Channel - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Contacts

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed
Synchronize ON
at the same time.

Channel The analog input channel to clear. Valid range is A–D (up to four at once). A

Clear Channel - Properties

Dispense
This Command dispense the specified amount sample volume and extra volume.
Dispense - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

LH Instrument The liquid handler that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Syringe ID Not used. ALL

Sample Volume The amount of sample to dispense. This volume can not exceed the syringe capacity. 100 μL

An additional volume to the first volume dispensed. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and acts as
Extra Volume 0 μL
an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Volume.

Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves out of the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Used only when Valve Position = PROBE is selected; select TRUE and the probe will follow the liquid down as it is dispensed. The Z Option must
Use LLF be set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. FALSE
Select FALSE and the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is dispensed.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Dispense - Properties

E-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Dispense Air Gap

List of Commands
This command delivers an air gap.
Dispense Air Gap - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Syringe ID Not used. ALL

Air Gap Volume The quantity of an air gap. 100 μL

Air Gap Flow Rate The speed at which the Air Gap Volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Dispense Inject - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-7

 List of Commands E
Dispense Inject
List of Commands

This command delivers injection volume into the injection port.

Dispense Inject - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

LH Instrument The liquid handler that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Syringe ID Not used. ALL

Sample Volume The amount of sample to aspirate. This volume can not exceed the syringe capacity. 100 μL

An additional volume to the first volume aspirated. It ensures that the actual volume of liquid to be transferred is not contaminated, and acts as
Extra Volume 0 μL
an extra buffer between the air gap/reservoir solvent and the Volume.

Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Used only when Valve Position = PROBE is selected; select TRUE and the probe will follow the liquid down as it is aspirated. The Z Option must be
Use LLF set to AUTO CALCULATE and initial volumes must be set in the Sample List to use this option. FALSE
Select FALSE and the probe will not follow the liquid down as it is aspirated.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Dispense Inject - Properties

E-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Get Current Held Volume

List of Commands
This command queries the software for the volume held in the syringe (if dilutor is present) or transfer
tubing.
Get Current Held Volume - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Read in Variable Used as a variable for a response coming from the instrument. 0 μL

Get Current Held Volume - Properties

Get Max Holding Volume

This Command queries the software for the syringe capacity (if dilutor is present) or transfer tubing
volume.
Get Max Holding Volume - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Read in Variable Used as a variable for a response coming from the instrument. 0 μL

Get Max Holding Volume - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-9

 List of Commands E
GSIOC
List of Commands

This Command sends a GSIOC command to the specified instrument.

GSIOC - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument The instrument that the command will affect.

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Command The string that sends an instruction to the Unit ID.

Type The command type: BUFFERED or IMMEDIATE. IMMEDIATE

Read in Variable Used as a variable for a response coming from the instrument.

GSIOC - Properties

GSIOC with ID
This command sends a GSIOC command to an instrument at the specified unit ID.
GSIOC with ID - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Unit ID The unit ID of the instrument that the command will affect.

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Command The string that sends an instruction to the Unit ID.

Type The command type: BUFFERED or IMMEDIATE. IMMEDIATE

Read in Variable Used as a variable for a response coming from the instrument.

GSIOC with ID - Properties

E-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Home Probes

List of Commands
The Command homes the X/Y/Z on the specified liquid handler.
Home Probes - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Home Probes - Properties

Home Pump
This command homes the pump on the GX Prep Solvent System.
Home Pump - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Home Pump - Properties

Home Syringes
This Command homes the external dilutor or the dilutor on a liquid handler.
Home Syringes - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Home Syringes - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-11

 List of Commands E
Home Valvemate
List of Commands

This Command homes the valve position on a liquid handler.

Home Valvemate - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Valvemate

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Home Valvemate - Properties

Input Contact Status

This Command queries the status of the specified contact input for the specified instrument.
Input Contact Status - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID The input contact being queried. Valid range A–E. A

Input Contact Status - Properties

E-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
LL Seek

List of Commands
This Command moves the probe on the specified instrument to the new Target Z position unless the
liquid detector stops it first.
LL Seek - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Probe ID Not used. ALL

Z Target The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Z Option. 100 mm

Speed The rate at which the Z-arm moves. 40 mm/sec

One of five defined reference points, selected from a drop-down list, used when performing the move:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
Z Option incorporated). Absolute Value

Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.

Touch Off Not used. OFF

LL Seek - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-13

 List of Commands E
LLD
List of Commands

This Command detects the liquid level for the specified instrument and is used for the following
circumstances:
• To move the probe in the Z direction depending on the height of the liquid in the well.
• To move the probe just to the top of the sample. This can be achieved through LLF command also.
• To aspirate only on confirming the presence of the sample in the well.
LLD - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Probe ID Not used. ALL

LLD - Properties

LLD Sensitivity
This Command detects liquid when the Liquid Level Detection is used. A low setting is the most sensitive
and higher settings are less sensitive.
LLD Sensitivity - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Probe ID Not used. ALL

Sensitivity is a percent (0–100%) used to detect liquid when Liquid Level Detection is used. A low setting is the most sensitive and higher settings
Sensitivity 0
are less sensitive.

LLD Sensitivity - Properties

E-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Lock Front Panel

List of Commands
This Command inhibits the use of instrument’s front panel during a run.
Lock Front Panel - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The Instrument that the command will affect. #Instrument

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Lock Front Panel - Properties

Log Message
Log Message - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Log Message - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-15

 List of Commands E
Move Delta
List of Commands

This command moves the arm in the X- and Y-direction as specified. This is used if the probe has to be
moved to a position other than the center of the well. This command is used in the following
circumstances:
• Used in relatively large diameter wells to move from one position to another position within the well.
• To move to different positions between the wells.
Move Delta - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Specify the required displacement of the arm in the X-direction from the current position of the arm.
X Delta 100 mm
Positive number moves the arm to the right, from the current position. Negative number moves the arm to the left, from the current position.

Specify the required displacement of the arm in the Y-direction from the current position of the arm.
Y Delta Positive number moves the arm towards the front, from the current position. Negative number moves the arm backwards, from the current 100 mm
position.

Reference Probe Not used. ALL

Move Delta - Properties

E-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Move to Well

List of Commands
This command moves the Z-arm so that the probe will move to the specified well in the specified zone.
Move to Well - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Probe ID Not used. ALL

Zone Name The name of the zone to move to. Source Zone

Well Number This is the number of the well in the zone. 1

Move Option Not used. Center

Move to Well - Properties

Move to XY
This command moves the arm to an absolute X value and an absolute Y value.
Move to XY - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

X Target Specify the absolute X value that you want the arm to move to. 100 mm

Y Target Specify the absolute Y value that you want the arm to move to. 100 mm

Reference Probe Not used. ALL

Move to XY - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-17

 List of Commands E
Move Z
List of Commands

This command moves the probe on the specified instrument in the Z direction so that the probe is at the
specified distance from the bottom of the well. The bottom of the well is always considered as Zero.
Depending on the distance specified, the resultant movement can be either downward or upward relative
to the current distance. This command is used in the following circumstances:
To move the specified probe in the Z direction.
Move Z - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Probe ID Not used. ALL

Z Target The distance up (when a positive number is entered) or down (when a negative number is entered) from a reference point defined by the Z Option. 100 mm

Speed The rate at which the Z-arm moves. 123 mm/sec

One of five defined reference points, selected from a drop-down list, used when performing the move:
Auto Calculate: Places probe into well and at the liquid level using initial volume from the Sample List and well dimensions from the Bed Layout;
accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Absolute Value: Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered for the Z Offset, the probe will move to the bed bottom (no safety factor
Z Option incorporated). Absolute Value

Tube Bottom: Moves the probe to the well bottom as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts only positive Z Offset values to move up from the bottom.
Top: Moves probe to the top of their Z-travel range; accepts only a negative (-) value for the Z Offset.
Tube Top: Moves the probe to the top of the well as defined by the Bed Layout; accepts a positive (+) or negative (-) value for the Z Offset.

Touch Off Not used. OFF

Move Z - Properties

E-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Output Contact Close

List of Commands
This command closes and powers on the specified output contact on a specified instrument.
Output Contact Close - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the instrument selected. Valid range is 1–8. 1

Output Contact Close - Properties

Output Contact Open

This command opens and powers off the specified output contact on a specified instrument.
Output Contact Open - Instruments

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the instrument selected. Valid range is 1–8. 1

Output Contact Open - Instruments

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-19

 List of Commands E
Output Contact Pulse
List of Commands

This command pulses the specified output contact on a specified instrument.

Output Contact Pulse - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the instrument selected. 1

Duration Length of time the low pressure valve will remain in the COLLECT position. Valid range is 1–8. 0.016 min

Output Contact Pulse - Properties

Output Contact Status

This command queries the status of the specified contact output for the specified instrument.
Output Contact Status - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID The output contact being queried. Valid range is 1–8. 1

Output Contact Status - Properties

E-20 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Prime

List of Commands
This command primes the dilutor (if present) and primes the transfer tubing with reservoir solvent.
Prime - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Flow Rate The speed at which the volume moves into the probe. 1.5 mL/min

Number of Cycles The number of times to repeat aspirating and dispensing. 1

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the Solvent System. Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 2
The position designated for waste cannot be used for a solvent.

Prime - Properties

Prompt
This command displays a prompt dialog with the selected message.
Prompt - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Prompt - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-21

 List of Commands E
Prompt for Input
List of Commands

This command is used in an expression. When the Application is run, a dialog is displayed with an input
field and an OK button. How this input is used is dependent on the expressions used.
Prompt for Input - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Read in Variable Used as a variable for a response coming from the instrument.

Prompt for Input - Properties

Read Display
This command reads the message on the front panel display of the selected instrument and then records
it in the Analysis Report.
Read Display - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Line Number For two-line displays, indicate the line for which to read and record the message. 1

Read in Variable Used as a variable for a response coming from the instrument.

Read Display - Properties

E-22 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Read Valvemate Position

List of Commands
This command reads the position of the switching valve and then records it in the log file.
Read Valvemate Position - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Valvemate

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Read Valvemate Position - Properties

Record Setting
This command queries the value of the selected setting. Should be used in an expression with a variable
of Command Return type.
Record Setting Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and
Synchronize ON
commands will be executed at the same time.

The options for settings which will be queried for a value are: Single WL, Single Sens. 1, Single Sens. 2, Single
Peak Width, Dual WL 1, Dual WL 2, Dual Sens. 1, Dual Sens. 2, Dual Peak Width, Dual Ratio Multi., Dual Ratio Thres.,
Scan WL, Scan WL 1, Scan WL 2, Scan Sens. 1, Scan Sens. 2, Scan Sens. 3, ScanPeakWidth, ScanOut Time,
Setting Single WL
Conc.Factor, Event Channel(s), AutoRange Channel(s), AutoRange Mult., GSIOC UnitID, Operation Mode, Lamp
Saver, UV Lamp Alarm, Visible Lamp Alarm, Channel 1 Scale, Channel 1 OffSet, Channel 2 Scale, Channel 2 OffSet,
Channel 3 Scale, and Channel 3 OffSet.

Record Setting Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-23

 List of Commands E
Rinse Pump (GX)
List of Commands

Turns the specified rinse pump on (HIGH or LOW) or turns it off.

Rinse Pump (GX) - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

The rinse pump that will be used for the flowing outside rinse. Select 1 if the rinse pump is wired to Output 1 and 24V Output 1 or select 2 if the
Rinse Pump ID 1
rinse pump is wired to Output 2 and 24V Output 2.

Rinse Speed Select HIGH, LOW, or OFF. OFF

Rinse Pump (GX) - Properties

Run Executable
This command invokes an external application.
Run Executable - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Path and Name File path to which the Command Line Parameters are sent. Click to browse for the executable program.

Command Line Parameters The information sent to the program located at the Path and Name.

Run Executable - Properties

E-24 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Scan Bar Codes

List of Commands
This command scans the racks on the locator plate of the Liquid Handler specified (currently only
available for the GX-281 Liquid Handler) for the purpose of ensuring that the rack hardware setup
matches the software rack (Bed Layout) setup.
Scan Bar Codes - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Scan Bar Codes - Properties

Service Heads
This command is used when replacing or servicing the pump heads.
Service Heads Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Select TRUE to mount the heads.

Mount Heads FALSE
Select FALSE move the pump head pistons to the dismount position.

Service Heads Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-25

 List of Commands E
Set DAD Wavelength
List of Commands

This command sets the DAD wavelengths to be monitored based on the Channel selected for the selected
Detector.
Set DAD Wavelength - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Channel The channel for which wavelength and bandwidth properties will be set. 0

Wavelength The wavelength at which chromatogram data will be extracted and displayed on-screen during the run. 0 nm

The number of wavelengths that TRILUTION will use in the chromatogram calculation for the reference wavelength. Optimizing the bandwidth
WavelengthBW 0 nm
improves the signal-to-noise ratio to obtain the optimum signal for peak detection.

The reference wavelength is used to correct for background noise and instabilities in the detector. Choose a wavelength that is close to the monitor
Reference 0 nm
wavelength and in a region of non-absorbance.

The reference wavelength bandwidth sets the number of wavelengths that TRILUTION will use in the chromatogram calculation for the reference
ReferenceBW 0 nm
wavelength. Optimizing the bandwidth improves the signal-to-noise ratio to obtain the optimum signal for peak detection.

Set DAD Wavelength - Properties

E-26 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Set Injection Valve Position

List of Commands
This command sets the injection valve position on the Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.
Set Injection Valve Position - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Injector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Injection Valve Position Select from LOAD or INJECT. LOAD

Valve ID Valid range 1-8. 1

Set Injection Valve Position - Properties

Set Valvemate Position

This command sets the position of the switching valve.
Set Valvemate Position - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The name used to identify the instrument that the Command will affect. It must be typed exactly as it is in the Configuration. #Valvemate

Position The number of ports in the VALVEMATE valve. 1

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Set Valvemate Position - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-27

 List of Commands E
Set Collection and Travel Depth
List of Commands

This Command customizes probe (used as a dispense needle) movement during fraction collection.
Set Collection and Travel Depth Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

The probe height used when dispensing into fraction sites.
Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
Collection Depth 125 mm
safety factor incorporated).
Valid range is Z travel distance and -1 where -1 is equal to the Z Clamp Height.

The probe height used when moving between fraction sites.

Moves the probe to the Z-value entered; if 0 is entered, probe will move to the bed bottom (no
Travel Depth 125 mm
safety factor incorporated).
Valid range is Z travel distance and -1 where -1 is equal to the Z Clamp Height.

Set Collection and Travel Depth Properties

Set Dual Ratio Multiplier

This Command sets the ratio output display on channel 3.
Set Dual Ratio Multiplier Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the Command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Use this parameter to enhance the ratio output display on channel 3. (The ratio output is
automatically displayed at 50% full scale. This allows both positive and negative ratios within
Ratio a trace to be presented.) 0

Valid range is 0.01–99.99

Set Dual Ratio Multiplier Properties

E-28 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Set Dual Ratio Threshold

List of Commands
This Command sets the ratio threshold. This Command is used to prevent the detector from interpreting
a noisy baseline as a series of peaks by setting a threshold higher than the highest baseline noise level.
Set Dual Ratio Threshold Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the Command will affect. #Detector

Synchronize Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time. ON

In dual wavelength mode, output channel 3 shows a ratio of the absorbance at wavelength 1 to the absorbance at wavelength 2. The ratio can help you determine peak
purity.
The absorbance ratio is displayed only when the absorbance at both wavelengths exceeds a specified threshold.
Positive ratios indicate that the peak at wavelength 1 is larger than the peak at wavelength 2. Negative ratios indicate that the peak at wavelength 2 is larger than the
Ratio peak at wavelength 1. 0

Set the ratio threshold (in AU) higher than the highest baseline noise level. This prevents the detector from interpreting a noisy baseline as a series of peaks.
In general, the higher the baseline noise, the larger the ratio threshold setting.
Valid range is 0.00001–2.00000.

Set Dual Ratio Threshold Properties

Set Flow Rate

This Command starts the specified pump pumping at the specified flow rate.
Set Flow Rate Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the Command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Flow Rate The total flow rate from the specified pump. 0 mL/min

Set Flow Rate Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-29

 List of Commands E
Set Fraction Site
List of Commands

This Command identifies where fraction collection will begin for an injected sample.
Set Fraction Site Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Fraction Instrument The fraction collector that the Command will affect. 215SingleProbe1

Zone The zone in which fractions are collected. Zone

Enter the well number in the Zone in which collection will begin. The default of 0 is for
Well 1
continuous collection and fractions will always be collected in the next available tube.

Set Fraction Site Properties

Set Low Pressure Valve

This Command switches the low pressure valve to COLLECT for the duration specified.
Set Low Pressure Valve Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Duration Length of time the low pressure valve will remain in the COLLECT position. 0.03 min

Set Low Pressure Valve Properties

Set Mode
This Command sets the mode to Single, Dual, or Scan modes.
Set Mode Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the Command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. SINGLE

Set Mode Properties

E-30 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Set Non Peak Time Per Tube

List of Commands
This Command sets parameters for collecting non-peaks by time.
Set Non Peak Time Per Tube Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Time Enter the time to dispense at each tube. 0.16 min

Set Non Peak Time Per Tube Properties

Set Non Peak Volume Per Tube

This Command sets parameters for collecting non-peaks by volume.
Set Non Peak Volume Per Tube Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Volume Enter the maximum volume to be collected into each tube. 100 μL

Set Non Peak Volume Per Tube Properties

Set Peak Level

This Command sets the parameters for fraction collection by level.
Set Peak Level Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

The mV level above which all effluent is collected. This value is especially useful if the
Level 0 mV
detector signal should go off-scale during collection.

Collect Positive Peaks Turns on (TRUE) or off (FALSE) collection of positive peaks TRUE

Collect Negative Peaks Turns on (TRUE) or off (FALSE) collection of negative peaks FALSE

Collect Non Peaks Indicates if all effluent should be collected into tubes (TRUE) or not (FALSE) FALSE

Set Peak Level Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-31

 List of Commands E
Set Peak Slope and Sensitivity
List of Commands

This Command sets the parameters for peak slope and peak sensitivity for fraction collection.
Set Peak Slope and Sensitivity Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Front Slope Slope (in degrees) at half height of peak’s ascending edge. 15

Enter the Sensitivity value for the entire peak.

Front Slope Sensitivity The sensitivity setting maximizes the number of peaks that are collected while minimizing the collection of trace artifacts. If the trace 15
has a lot of noise, then the value should be decreased to reduce the number of smaller peaks that are collected or increased to increase
the number of peaks that are collected.

Front Auto Calculate Not used. TRUE

Back Slope Slope (in degrees) at half height of peak’s descending edge. 15

Back Slope Sensitivity Not used. 15

Back Auto Calculate Not used. TRUE

Collect Positive Peaks Turns on (TRUE) or off (FALSE) collection of positive peaks TRUE

Collect Negative Peaks Turns on (TRUE) or off (FALSE) collection of negative peaks FALSE

Collect Non Peaks Indicates if all effluent should be collected into tubes (TRUE) or not (FALSE) FALSE

Indicate whether the front of the slope to the apex (Front APEX), the apex to the tail (APEX Tail) or the entire peak (ALL) should be
Collection Region ALL
collected. To collect the entire peak, but advance to the next well at the apex, select APEX.

Set Peak Slope and Sensitivity Properties

Set Peak Width

This Command sets the Peak Width and Mode on the selected Detector.
Set Peak Width Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the Command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Set Peak Width Properties Table (Page 1 of 2)

E-32 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Set Peak Width Properties

List of Commands
Property Name Description Default Value
Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. SINGLE

The detector must know the width of the narrowest peak in your run. The detector uses this
information to optimize the presentation of peaks and to minimize baseline noise.
Peak Width To set the peak width accurately, run a chromatogram using the minimum peak width setting. 0
Measure the width at half height of the narrowest peak.
Valid range is 0 and 4–99 seconds for SINGLE or SCAN mode or 4–99 for DUAL mode.

Set Peak Width Properties Table (Page 2 of 2)

Set Scan Output Time

This Command sets the Time it takes chart recorder to trace a wavelength scan on strip chart paper.
Set Scan Output Time Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the Command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Time it takes chart recorder to trace a wavelength scan on strip chart paper (does not affect
Scan Out Time 0 min
time to scan a peak). Valid range is 0.1–20 min.

Set Scan Output Time Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-33

 List of Commands E
Set Sensitivity
List of Commands

Sets the sensitivities for monitoring a sample on a separate output channels on the selected Detector.
Set Sensitivity Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. SINGLE

One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on a separate output channels. Valid range is
Sensitivity 1 0
0.001 to 2.0 AUFS.

One of two sensitivities for monitoring a sample on a separate output channels. Valid range is
Sensitivity 2 0
0.001 to 2.0 AUFS.

Only used when SCAN mode is selected; the sensitivity for monitoring output channel 3. Valid
Sensitivity 3 0
range is 0.001–2.000 AUFS

Set Sensitivity Properties

Set Switching Valve Position

This command sets the switching valve position on the 233 XL Sample Injector to either LOAD or INJECT.
Set Switching Valve Position Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The name of the 233 XL Sample Injector that the command will affect. #Injector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued
Synchronize ON
completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Valve Select from LOAD or INJECT. LOAD

Set Switching Valve Position Properties

E-34 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Set Time Per Tube

List of Commands
This command sets parameters for collecting peaks by time.
Set Time Per Tube Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Time Enter the time to dispense at each tube. 0.16 min

Set Time Per Tube Properties

Set Volume Per Tube

This command sets parameters for collecting peaks by volume.
Set Volume Per Tube Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Volume Enter the maximum volume to be collected into each tube. 100 μL

Set Volume Per Tube Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-35

 List of Commands E
Set Wavelength
List of Commands

Sets the wavelengths to be monitored based on the Mode selected for the selected Detector.
Set Wavelength Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. #Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued
Synchronize ON
completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Mode Select from DUAL, SCAN, or SINGLE. SINGLE

The monitor wavelength when DUAL or SINGLE mode is selected. Valid range is
Wavelength 1 0 nm
190–700 nm.

The monitor wavelength for output channel 2 when DUAL mode is selected. Valid range
Wavelength 2 0 nm
is 190–700 nm.

Only used when SCAN mode is selected; the sensitivity for monitoring output channel 3.
Wavelength 3 0 nm
Valid range is 0.001–2.000 AUFS

Set Wavelength Properties

Solvent Valve
This command changes the position of the solvent selection valve on a pump (if installed) or on the GX
Prep Solvent System.
Solvent Valve Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Pump

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued
Synchronize ON
completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Desired position of the solvent selection valve on the pump or GX Prep Solvent System.
Valid range is 1–6.
Solvent Valve Position 1
The position designated for waste on the GX Prep Solvent System cannot be used for a
solvent.

Solvent Valve Properties

E-36 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Sound

List of Commands
This command causes the selected instrument to beep the duration.
Sound - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Instrument

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Duration Length of time the low pressure valve will remain in the COLLECT position. 0.016 min

Sound - Properties

Start Collection
This command tells the software to begin collecting fractions. This command has no properties to set.

Start Data Collection

This command tells the software to begin collecting data. This command has no properties to set.

Start File
This command runs a file that was created in the detector’s software.
Start File Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

File Number The number that corresponds to the detector file to run. Valid range is 0–9. 1

Start File Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-37

 List of Commands E
Start Scan
List of Commands

This command initiates the scan between Wavelength 1 and Wavelength 2.

Start Scan Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Start Scan Properties

Stop Collection
This command tells the software to stop collecting fractions. This command has no properties to set

Stop Data Collection

This command tells the software to stop collecting data. This command has no properties to set.

Sync Wait Done

This command is used to coordinate a step in a Task with a time in a Method.

Synchronize
This command is used to coordinate tasks in a Method.
Synchronize - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Instrument

Type The command type.

Synchronize - Properties

E-38 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Turn Lamp Off

List of Commands
This command turns off power to the lamps while maintaining power to the Detector.
Turn Lamp Off Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Turn Lamp Off Properties

Turn Lamp On
Turns the UV and visible lamps on for the specified Detector.
Turn Lamp On Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Turn Lamp On Properties

Turn Lamp Saver Off

This command toggles the lamp saver option off.
Turn Lamp Saver Off Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Turn Lamp Saver Off Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-39

 List of Commands E
Turn Lamp Saver On
List of Commands

This command toggles the lamp saver option on. When the lamp saver option is on, the detector
automatically turns off a lamp if it is not being used by the detector.
Turn Lamp Saver On Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The detector that the command will affect. Detector

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Turn Lamp Saver On Properties

UnLock Front Panel

Enables use of instrument’s front panel during a run.
UnLock Front Panel - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The Instrument that the command will affect. #Instrument

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

UnLock Front Panel - Properties

E-40 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Voltage Off

List of Commands
This command opens and powers off the output contact on a specified liquid handler.

Voltage Off - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the liquid handler selected. 1

Voltage Off - Properties

Voltage On
This command opens and powers on the output contact on a specified liquid handler.

Voltage On - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID Enter the number that corresponds to the output contact to act on for the liquid handler selected. 1

Voltage On - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-41

 List of Commands E
Wait
List of Commands

This command waits a specified length of time.

Wait - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Wait Time Time the program waits before starting the next command. 0.016 min

Select TRUE and the computer will beep until the display message is detected.
Alarm FALSE
Select FALSE to inhibit beeping while waiting for the display message from the injector program.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Wait - Properties

Wait for Change in Contact State

This command initiates a wait in the Method until a contact state change is detected of the specified input
contact on the specified instrument.

Wait for Change in Contact State - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Contact ID The input contact being queried. Valid range A–E. A

Select TRUE and the computer will beep until the display message is detected.
Alarm FALSE
Select FALSE to inhibit beeping while waiting for the display message from the injector program.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Wait for Change in Contact State - Properties

E-42 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

List of Commands E
Wait with Display

List of Commands
For synchronization between injector program and TRILUTION. During the run, TRILUTION enters a wait state
until the indicated message appears. When the message appears, TRILUTION continues the run.
Wait with Display - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The Instrument that the command will affect. #Instrument

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box.

Line Number For two-line displays, indicate the line on which to display the message. 1

Select TRUE and the computer will beep until the display message is detected.
Alarm FALSE
Select FALSE to inhibit beeping while waiting for the display message from the injector program.

Wait with Display - Properties

Write to Display
This command displays a message in the front panel display of the selected instrument.
Write to Display - Properties

Property Name Brief Description Default Value

Instrument Name The instrument that the command will affect. #Liquid Handler

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes. Select OFF and commands will be executed at the
Synchronize ON
same time.

Message Enter the text to display in the message box. Message

Line Number For two-line displays, indicate the line on which to display the message. 1

Write to Display - Properties

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide E-43

 List of Commands E
Zero Analog Offset Voltage
List of Commands

This command sets the selected 506C System Interface channel’s trace to 0 mV.
Zero Analog Offset Voltage Command Properties

Property Name Description Default Value

Instrument Name The 506C System Interface that the command will affect. Contacts

Select ON and commands will be executed only after the previous command issued completes.
Synchronize ON
Select OFF and commands will be executed at the same time.

Channel The analog input channel to zero. Valid range is A–D (up to four at once). A

Zero Analog Offset Voltage Command Properties

E-44 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F

A Task is an action to be performed on a specific instrument. It is a combination of Commands and Operators. A Task serves as a building block for a Method.

The Task Builder allows you to create, modify, delete, export, and import Tasks.

The drag-and-drop feature allows easy creation of Tasks. You can drag Commands, Tasks, Variables, Operators and Expressions and then drop them in the
workspace.

A Task is positioned anywhere in the Task Builder workspace, depending on where the Task is dropped.

Tasks can be exported or imported across locations. The new Tasks saved are listed in the Tasks palette. Multiple Tasks can be opened at a time.

Access the Task builder by:

• clicking Task from the Liquid Chromatography menu.
• right-clicking on a control Task in a Method and then selecting Open.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-1

 Task Builder F
Task Builder Window
Task Builder

The Task builder is a graphical user interface used to build a Task.

Tasks Palette

Operators Palette

Workspace

Commands Palette

Action Buttons

The Task builder window

Tasks Palette
The Tasks palette lists the saved tasks and pre-defined tasks.

A Task placed within a Task is referred to as a Nested Task. You can drag a Task from the Tasks palette and
drop it in another Task displayed in the workspace to create a Nested Task.

For a description of Gilson-supplied tasks, see Appendix A, List of Tasks.

F-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F
Operators Palette

Task Builder
The Operators palette lists the Operators, Variables, and Expressions.

Commands Palette
A Command serves as the building block of a Task. They are the instructions to be performed on
instruments. The Commands are instrument specific and hence control the instrument operations.
A Command has a set of properties. These properties vary in each Command. For a description of the
commands, see Appendix E, List of Commands.

A Command cannot be added, modified, or deleted.

Action Buttons
The following action buttons are located in the lower left corner of the Task builder.

Action Button Description

NEW Create a new Task.

Open an existing Task.

OPEN
For more information, see View a Task.

SAVE Save an existing Task to the same name.

Save a new Task or save an existing Task to a new name and specify the Task Type. Optionally, type a short and/
SAVE AS
or long description for the Task.

MODIFY Modify the short and/or long description and/or task type for the Task or select a custom icon.

DELETE Deletes the open Task or all versions of the Task.

Exports the Task to a specified location as a .LCTE file.

EXPORT
For more information, see How to Export Tasks.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-3

 Task Builder F
Task Builder

Action Button Description

REFRESH Allows you to reload the Tasks palette with any new Tasks created.

Imports a .LCTE file and lists the Task in the Tasks palette and replaces it in the Method.
IMPORT
For more information, see How to Import Tasks.

CLOSE Closes the open Task while leaving the Task builder open.

CLOSE ALL Closes all open Tasks while leaving the Task builder open.

Workspace
The workspace is used to build new or modify existing tasks. The right panel contains the details for a
selected operator or expression.

Toolbar
Provides quick access to some options available in the Task window. To activate a tool, click on its icon.

Undo Reverses the last action when the last action was to add or delete a task, command, or operator.

Redo Repeats the last action prior to an undo.

Lists the available variables for the Task. Click to view the list of variables used in the task. For more
Variable List
information about variables, see Chapter 13, Working with Variables.

Back Provides the ability to return focus to the left panel in the workspace.

Help Displays the on-line help information.

F-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F
Right-click menu

Task Builder
Command
Right-click on a Command icon to display the following options:

Menu Description

Cuts the Command for deleting or pasting in a new location in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in
Cut
another Task.

Copy Copies the Command to duplicate in a new location in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in another Task.

Paste Places a cut or copied Command in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in another Task.

Delete Removes the Command from the workspace.

Line Break A toggle for moving Commands after the selected Command to the next line below the selected Command.

Properties Opens the Command property page for the selected Command.

Task
Right-click on a Task icon to display the following options:

Menu Description

Cut Cuts the Task for deleting or pasting in a new location in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in another Task.

Copy Copies the Task to duplicate in a new location in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in another Task.

Paste Places a cut or copied Task in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in another Task.

Delete Removes the Task from the workspace.

Line Break A toggle for moving Tasks after the selected Task to the next line below the selected Task.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-5

 Task Builder F
Task Builder

Menu Description

Properties Opens the task property page for the selected Task.

Open Task Opens the Task.

Workspace
Right-click in the workspace to display the following options:

Menu Description

Paste Places a cut or copied Command or Task in the workspace, in an operator or expression, or in another Task.

View Extended Hides the right panel in the workspace.

View Normal Shows the right panel in the workspace.

F-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F
How to Create a Task

Task Builder
Do one or all of the following one or many times:
• From the Commands palette, drag a Command and then drop it in the workspace. The command property page
for that Command appears.
Review the values for each command property and modify, if necessary.
For descriptions of the commands, see Appendix E, List of Commands.
• From the Tasks palette, drag a Task and then drop it in the workspace. The task property page for that Task
appears.
Review the values for each Task property and modify, if necessary.
For descriptions of the tasks, see Appendix A, List of Tasks.
• From the Operators palette, drag an expression, variable, or operator and then drop it in the workspace.
For more information about variables, see Chapter 13, Working with Variables.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-7

 Task Builder F
View a Task
Task Builder

On the Task Builder, do one of the following:

• On the Tasks palette, do one of the following:
• Double-click a Task.
• Right-click on a Task and then on the submenu
displayed, click Open.
• Click Open. The Open Task window is displayed.
a) Optionally, clear the Show Latest Version check box to
see all versions of all Tasks that have been created on
the computer and have not been deleted.
b) Select the Task to open.
c) Click OK.
The Task is displayed in the workspace.

Multiple Tasks can be open in the same builder. Individual tabs appear at the top of the window for each
open Task. Click on the tab to view the Task in the workspace.

F-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F
Modify a Task

Task Builder
You can modify a Task by doing the following:
• Adding Tasks, Commands, or Operators to the workspace.
• Deleting Tasks, Commands, or Operators from the workspace.
• Modifying the properties of the Tasks, Commands, or Operators in the workspace.
• Changing the short description, long description or task type.

When you right-click on a Task, Command, Variable, or Operator in the workspace, a Right-click menu
appears.
You can delete Commands, Tasks, and Operators in the workspace by pressing the DELETE key.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-9

 Task Builder F
Save a Task
Task Builder

1 Click Save. The Save Task window is displayed.

2 On the Save Task window, do the following:
a) In the Name field, type a Task name.
b) In the Short Description field (optional), type a
brief description about the Task.
c) In the Long Description field (optional), type a
longer description about the Task.

The following special characters are not

permitted in names or descriptions:
ampersand (&), apostrophe (‘), greater than (>),
and back slash (\).

d) In the Task Type field, check the appropriate box

or boxes to indicate the filtering for this Task.
e) Click the browse ( ) button and then select an
icon for the Task (optional). The icon can be of file
type Icon (.ICO), Bitmap (.BMP), or JPEG (.JPG),
GIF (.GIF), or Portable Network Group (.PNG).
f) Click OK.

The Task is saved and listed in the Tasks palette.

F-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F
How to Export Tasks

Task Builder
1 On the Task Builder, click Export. The Export window
is displayed.
2 In the Export window, do the following:
a) In the Select the items to be exported field,
select the Tasks.

To select multiple Tasks in a sequential order,

hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select Tasks in a random order, hold CTRL and
then select multiple Tasks with the mouse.
To select all Tasks, click .
To clear all selected Tasks, click .
To invert the selection of Tasks, click .

b) In the Select a path field, do the following:

1) Click . The Browse For folder window is
displayed.

You can create a new folder from the Browse For folder window.

2) On the Browse For folder window, select a folder and click OK.
3 Click OK. On completion of the Export operation, the Task is saved in the specified folder with a .LCTE extension.
The TRILUTION information dialog box is displayed.

If a Task with the same name is found in the Export path, an option is provided to rename or overwrite the
Task or to skip the Export operation for that Task.

a) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the Export operation log information, click Details.
• Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-11

 Task Builder F
How to Import Tasks
Task Builder

1 In the Task Builder, click Import. The

Select Task Files to Import window is
displayed.
2 From the Select Task Files to
Import window, do the following:
a) Browse for and select the Task Export
Files.

To select multiple Tasks in a

sequential order, hold SHIFT + any
arrow key simultaneously.
To select Tasks in a random order,
hold CTRL and then select multiple
Tasks with the mouse.

b) Click Open. On completion of the

Import operation, the TRILUTION information box is displayed.

If a Task or any Task placed within a Task with the same name is found, an option is provided to import the
Task as a new version, import all Tasks as new version, or rename the Task.

c) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:

• To view the log information of the Import operation, click Details.
• Click OK.

F-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Task Builder F
Delete a Task

Task Builder
1 On the Tasks palette, do one of the following:
• Select a Task and right-click to view the submenu. On the submenu, click Delete.
• Open a Task and on the action bar, click Delete.

Gilson-supplied tasks cannot be deleted.

2 On the Delete confirmation dialog box, choose whether to

delete only the current version or all versions of the Task. The
default is to delete only the current version of the Task. To delete
all versions of the Task, select the Delete All Versions check box.
3 Click Yes. The Task is deleted. Use the Purge and Recover utility
to permanently delete the Task.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide F-13

 Task Builder F
Close
Task Builder

Close the Open Task

To close the Task that is open in the workspace, click Close.

Close All Open Tasks

To close all open Tasks, but leave the Task Builder open, click Close All.

Close the Task Builder

Click on the upper right corner of the Task Builder.

F-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G

Access the Bed Layout and Utilities by choosing Liquid Chromatography|Utilities|Bed Layout and Utilities.

In this chapter, you will learn:

• How to Create a Template
• How to Create a Rack
• How to Export Racks and Templates
• How to Import Racks and Templates

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-1

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
Custom Templates
Bed Layout and Utilities

Design your template with footprints. You can select pre-defined footprints or define a footprint of your
own. Information stored concerning the template includes physical dimensions and the origin (where
0,0,0 is).

Keywords:
• Template: The bottom, required layer of a Bed Layout. Only footprints can be added to templates.
• Origin: Defined by the user, the location of the coordinates X=0, Y=0, Z=0.
• Footprint: A placeholder or area that accepts racks. For more information, see Create a Footprint.
• Rack: A rack requires a footprint before it can be added to a template. Examples of racks are Racks, Rinse
Stations, Injection Port Bars, Tip Boxes, and Microplates. For more information, see How to Create a Rack.

How to Create a Template

1 Click New Template. The
New Template window appears.
2 In the New Template window, enter the
template dimensions.
3 Select one or more compatible
instruments by checking the box.
4 Optionally, click and then do the
following:
a) To zoom the Template, toggle the
Auto Scale selection off.
b) To zoom in on the Template, click
once or repeatedly
(increments by 0.5). The software
will zoom in to the center of the
template

c) To zoom out on the Template, click once or repeatedly.

5 Click OK.
6 Click Save As.
7 Enter the template name, description, and short description in the Save As Template window.
8 Click OK.

G-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
Origin

Bed Layout and Utilities

Origin (X Origin=0, Y Origin=0, Z Origin=0)

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-3

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
Bed Layout and Utilities

Move X-285 and Y-165

Origin (Default Settings Applied)

G-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
Add Footprints

Bed Layout and Utilities

A footprint is an area that accepts racks. Gilson supplies footprints or create custom footprints.

Gilson-supplied footprints cannot be modified or deleted.

Add a Single Footprint

1 Click on the template, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
The Template Elements dialog appears.
3 Select a footprint.
4 Enter the X, Y, and Z Relative positions.
The position is calculated with respect to the origin.
When X = 0 and Y= 0, the center of the footprint is positioned over the origin.
When Z = 0, the bottom of the footprint is placed at the same level as the top of the template.
5 Optionally, select a value from the Rotation drop-down. Default is 0°. (Rotation values: 90°, 180°, and 270°)
6 Click Add. Confirm that the footprint has been added in the Preview.
7 Click Close to return to the template.

Add Multiple Footprints

This option allows you to add an array of identical footprints to a template.
1 Click on the template, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
The Template Elements dialog appears.
3 Select the footprint that you want to add as an array.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-5

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
4 Select the Multiple check box to enable the necessary fields.
Bed Layout and Utilities

5 Enter the X, Y, and Z Relative positions for the center of the element in column 1, row 1.
The position is calculated with respect to the origin.
When X = 0 and Y= 0, the footprint in column 1, row 1 is centered over the center of the origin.
6 Specify the number of columns and the number of rows.
7 Specify the distance between wells within a column (Y Offset) and the distance between wells within a row
(X Offset).
8 Optionally, select a value from the Rotation drop-down. Default is 0°. (Rotation values: 90°, 180°, and 270°)
9 Click Add. Confirm that the elements were added in the Preview.
10 Click Close to return to the Template.

Create a Footprint
1 Click on the template, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
The Template Elements dialog appears.
3 In the Template Elements dialog click New.
4 Enter a Footprint Name for the footprint.
5 Select the Shape: Rectangle or Circle.
a) For a rectangle, enter the Length and Width.
b) For a circle, enter the Diameter.
6 Click OK.

To add the new footprint to a template, see Add

Footprints.

Delete a Template
1 Click Delete Template. The Delete Template window appears.
2 Select the template to be deleted and click Delete. If more than one version of the template exists, the software
will confirm that you want to delete all versions of the template.
3 Use the Purge and Recover utility to permanently delete the Template.

G-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
Custom Racks

Bed Layout and Utilities

Create a rack by specifying the dimensions for the rack and the wells or elements to be used on the rack.
Either create custom wells or elements or use the pre-defined wells and elements provided by Gilson.
Wells and elements can be added individually or as an array.

Information stored concerning the rack includes its physical dimensions, the type of wells that it holds and
their location, and the templates on which the rack can be placed.

Keywords:
• Element: A rack element is a footprint or a well. For more information, see Create an Element.
• Footprint: Area that accepts racks. For more information, see Create a Footprint.
• Wells: Wells (specifically custom wells) can only go in racks. For more information, see Create a Well.
• Rack: A rack requires a footprint before it can be added to a template. Examples of racks are Racks, Rinse
Stations, Injection Port Bars, Tip Boxes, and Microplates. For more information, see How to Create a Rack.
• Template: The template is the bottom, a required layer of a Bed Layout. Only footprints can be added to
templates. For more information, see How to Create a Template.
• Handle: A position designated in a rack which makes the rack mobile. Zones cannot be assigned to a handle.
• Target: A position defined within a well. Zones can be assigned to a target. For more information, see Create a
Target.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-7

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
How to Create a Rack
Bed Layout and Utilities

1 Click New Rack button, the

New Rack dialog appears.
2 In the New Rack window, set the
rack shape: Rectangle or Circle.
3 Enter the dimensions.
a) For a rectangular rack, define X
(width), Y (length), and the
height.
b) For a circular rack, define the
diameter and the height.
The rack height is measured with
respect to the point of contact
between the rack and its holder.
For a rack placed on a template, ‘Height’ is measured with respect to the rack bottom.
For a rack placed on antlers, ‘Height’ is measured with respect to the underside of the rack tabs. A height of “0”
means that the top of the rack is level with the plane of the support.
This reference is important, when a footprint or well is added to a custom rack, the height Z is calculated with
respect to this plane. Also, the probe height in a custom rack is calculated with respect to this plane.
You must be very careful when designing a custom rack that can be placed on antlers and on a tray, as the probe
height in tasks will be calculated with respect to this coordinate.
4 Enter the coordinates for the rack Origin. The default is 0,0,0 which is the center of the rack.
5 Select the footprints where the rack can be placed. You can select several footprints.
6 Click OK.

G-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
Add Elements

Bed Layout and Utilities

Using the Rack Elements dialog, add a single element or an array of elements.

The Rack Elements dialog

Add a single element

1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Select an element: Footprint, Well, Tip, or Handle.
4 Enter the X, Y, and Z Relative positions.
The position is calculated with respect to the origin.
When X = 0 and Y = 0, the center of the element is positioned over the origin.
When Z = 0, the bottom of the element is placed at the same level as the top of the rack: level with the point of
contact between the rack and its holder (tray or antler).
5 Optionally, select a value from the Rotation drop-down. Default is 0°. (Rotation values: 90°, 180°, and 270°)
6 Click Add. Confirm that the element was added in the Preview.
7 Click Close to return to the Rack.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-9

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
Add multiple elements
Bed Layout and Utilities

This option allows you to add an array of identical elements to a rack.

1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Select the element that you want to add as an array.
4 Select the Multiple check box to enable the necessary fields.
5 Enter the X, Y, and Z Relative positions for the center of the element in column 1, row 1.
The position is calculated with respect to the rack center.
When X = 0 and Y= 0, the element in column 1, row 1 is centered over the origin.
When Z = 0, the bottom of the element is placed at the same level as the top of the rack: level with the point of
contact between the rack and its holder (tray or antler).
6 Specify the number of columns and the number of rows.
7 Specify the distance between wells within a column (Y Offset) and the distance between wells within a row
(X Offset).
8 Optionally, select a value from the Rotation drop-down. Default is 0°. (Rotation values: 90°, 180°, and 270°)
9 Click Add. Confirm that the elements were added in the Preview.
10 Click Close to return to the Rack.

G-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
Create an Element

Bed Layout and Utilities

Elements can be created for non-standard equipment.

You can:
• Create a Footprint
• Create a Well
• Create a Target

Create a Footprint
1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Click Footprint and then New.
4 Enter a Footprint Name for the footprint.
5 Select the Shape: Rectangle or Circle.
a) For a circle, enter the Diameter.
b) For a rectangle, enter the Length and Width.
6 Click OK.

Create a Well
1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Click Well and then New.
4 Enter a Well Name for the well.
5 Select a Well Type from the drop-down list.
6 Select the Shape: Rectangle or Circle.
a) For a circular well, enter the Diameter, Height, and Maximum Volume for the well.
b) For a rectangular well, enter the Length, Width, Height, and Maximum Volume for the well.
Maximum Volume must be a number other than zero (0).
7 Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-11

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
Create a Target
Bed Layout and Utilities

1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.

2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Click Well and then click New or Edit.
4 Do one of the following:
• Right-click in the Targets grid and then select New.
• Click New.
5 Enter a Target Name for the target.
6 Select a Target Type from the drop-down list.
7 Enter the X, Y, and Z Relative positions for the target. The position is calculated with respect to the center of the
well.
8 Click OK to exit the New Target dialog.

Modify a Target
1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Select the Well that contains the Target and then click Edit. The Well Properties dialog is displayed.
4 Do one of the following:
• Right-click on the Target and then select Edit.
• Click Edit.
5 Change the Target Name for the target, if desired.
6 Change the relative X, Y, and Z positions for the target, if desired. The position is calculated with respect to the
center of the well.
7 Click OK to exit the Target Properties dialog.

Delete a Target
1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....

G-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
3 Select the Well that contains the Target and then click Edit. The Well Properties dialog is displayed.

Bed Layout and Utilities

4 Do one of the following:
• Right-click on the Target and then select Delete.
• Click Delete.
5 Click OK to exit the Target Properties dialog.

Edit a Custom Element

You can perform the following editing actions:

View Element Properties

1 Right-click on the element and then select Properties....
2 Select the Advanced check box to view the attributes for the element. The relative coordinates display. The
coordinates are relative to the center of the holder.

Move an Element
1 Right-click on the element and then select Properties....
2 Change the appropriate position coordinates.

Delete an Element
You can only delete user-defined elements.
1 Click on the rack, it highlights in red.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Add Elements.
• Right-click and then select Add Elements....
3 Click on the type of custom element that you want to delete: a footprint, well, or tip.
4 Select the specific element you want to delete from the list.
5 Click Delete.
6 Use the Purge and Recover utility to permanently delete the element.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-13

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
Delete a Rack
Bed Layout and Utilities

1 Click Delete Rack. The Delete Rack window appears.

2 Select the rack to be deleted and click Delete. If more than one version of the rack exists, the software will
confirm that you want to delete all versions of the rack.
3 Use the Purge and Recover utility to permanently delete the Rack.

G-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G
How to Export Racks and Templates

Bed Layout and Utilities

1 Click Export.
2 Select the Rack List or Template List option button.
3 Select a Rack or Template.
4 Click . The Browse For Folder window is displayed.
5 On the Browse For Folder window, select a folder to which the Rack or Template will be exported and then click
OK.
6 Click OK. On completion of the export operation, the Rack or Template is saved in the specified folder with a
.LHR (Rack) or .LHT (Template) extension. The TRILUTION information dialog box is displayed.
a) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:
1) To view the log information of the export operation, click Details.
2) Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-15

 Bed Layout and Utilities G
How to Import Racks and Templates
Bed Layout and Utilities

1 Click Import. The Select Rack/Template Files window is displayed.

2 From the Select Rack/Template Files window, do the following:
a) Browse for and select the Rack or Template Exported Files.

To select multiple Racks or Templates in a sequential order, hold SHIFT + any arrow key simultaneously.
To select Racks or Templates in a random order, hold CTRL and then select multiple Racks or Templates with
the mouse.

b) Click Open. On completion of the Import operation, the TRILUTION information box is displayed.
c) On the TRILUTION information dialog box, do the following:
1) To view the log information of the import operation, click Details.
2) Click OK.

G-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Bed Layout and Utilities G

Close Bed Layout and Utilities

Close Bed Layout and Utilities

Do one of the following:

• Click ( ) on the lower right corner to return to the TRILUTION LC menu.

• Click ( ) on the upper right corner to close the utility.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide G-17

Open Access H

Users log on to the TRILUTION LC Open Access and choose the application to run from a pick-list. They then use a simple “wizard” which directs them through
the experiment. The intuitive nature of the “wizard” ensures Users will have a quick learning curve.

TRILUTION LC’s multi-tiered approach allows users of all levels, from novice to expert, access to one of the leading chromatographic softwares in the industry.
Several laboratories can benefit from a single Administrator’s expertise.
In this chapter, you will learn:
• How to Enable Open Access for Applications
• How to Launch Open Access

You will also learn about the Open Access Wizard.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-1

 Open Access H
TRILUTION LC Open Access
Open Access

Open Access provides a graphical interface for setting up an Application Run. Complete the Open Access
Wizard to select the samples to be processed, satisfy any variables, and optionally set the initial volume of
wells.

How to Enable Open Access for Applications

Before a user can run an Application in Open Access, the Application must be enabled for Open Access
and the Project must be shared in the Project Library of TRILUTION LC. Users who can enable Open Access
for Applications and share Projects are those who have the View, Create, and Modify permissions for the
Project Library. Enabling Open Access for the Application is a right-click option. (See Enable
Open Access.) Sharing a Project is also a right-click option. (See Project and How to Share a Project.)

After an Application has been enabled for

Open Access, a dialog appears requesting
specification of the Sample Zone. The dialog also
includes a check box to Enable Placement Safety
which defaults selected. When placement safety is
enabled, users will not be prompted to place samples
if the instrument is running.
Note: All Methods in an Open Access Application
must use the same Bed Layout (Template, Racks,
Zones, and Wells) for instruments at the same unit ID.
Additionally, the Sample Well in the injection task
must be #Sample Well.

H-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
How to Launch Open Access

Open Access
To launch the software:
1 Close TRILUTION LC.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click Start and then select (All) Programs>Gilson Applications>TRILUTION LC 2.0>TRILUTION LC
Open Access.
• On the Desktop, double-click the TRILUTION LC Open Access icon ( ).
The Open Access Application window is displayed.
3 On the Open Access Application window, click Run Application. The TRILUTION LC log on window is displayed.
4 In the TRILUTION LC log on window, do the following:
a) In the User Name field, type your user name.
b) In the Password field, type your password.
Note: Passwords have a 20-character limit.
c) Click OK.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-3

 Open Access H
Open Access Application Window
Open Access

The Open Access Application window

Description
In the Open Access Application window, you can do the following:
• Select an Application to run.
• View the Applications running and in queue for all users on this computer.
• Right-click on a queued or running Application and then select Fraction Re-injection to set the criteria for
fraction re-injection for that Application.
• Right-click on a queued Application and then select Remove Application to remove the Application from the
queue before it begins running.
• Free wells for subsequent Application Runs.

H-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
Action Buttons

Open Access
The Open Access Application window has the following action buttons:
• Emergency Stop: This button stops the run and stops the flow from the pumps.
• Log Off: This button ends the current user’s session.
• Pause: This button causes gradient progression and task execution to enter a timed hold. Mobile Phase
continues to flow at the composition and flow rate at the time of the pause; data collection and fraction
collection continue.
To continue the gradient progression and task execution, click Continue. Task execution resumes from the time
of the pause. The gradient progression resumes at the composition and flow rate when the run was paused. The
run time extends the duration of the pause.
• Run Application: This button displays the TRILUTION LC Log On dialog and then Applications available to run for
the logged on user.
• Show Graph: This button displays the real-time chromatogram if clicked while the Application is running.
• Solvent Settings: This button allows you to update, while running, the volume of solvents available.
• Results: This button allows you to view the results of your run. For more information, see Chapter 11, Results.
• Close: Exits and closes TRILUTION LC Open Access.

Begin the Open Access Wizard

To begin the Open Access Wizard do the following:
1 Click Run Application. The TRILUTION LC Log On window is displayed.
2 In the TRILUTION LC Log On window, do the following:
• In the User Name field, type your user name.
• In the Password field, type your password.
• Click Log On. The Applications are listed in the Applications palette.
The Open Access Application window is displayed.
3 Double-click the name of the Application that will be run. The Open Access Wizard begins.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-5

 Open Access H
Open Access Wizard
Open Access

The Open Access Wizard comprises six main screens, appearing in the following order:
1 Application Information
2 Sample Submit
3 Sample Placement
4 Summary
5 Submission of Sample(s)
6 Free Wells

Application Information

The Open Access Wizard: Application Information screen

H-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
Description

Open Access
In the Application Information window, you can do the following:
• Name the run.

The Application Information screen displays the following information:

• Application Name: The name of the current Application.
• Short Description: The short description entered, if any, for the current Application.
• Long Description: The long description entered, if any, for the current Application.

Action Buttons
The Application Information screen has the following action buttons:
• Continue: This button advances to the Sample Submit screen.
• Cancel: Exits the Open Access Wizard and returns to the Open Access Main Menu.
• Help: Provides information about the screen.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-7

 Open Access H
Sample Submit
Open Access

Open Access Wizard: Sample Submit screen

Description
In the Open Access Wizard - Sample Submit screen, you can do the following:
• Set the number of samples to run.
Number of Samples: The field for indicating the number of samples that will be run. After typing the number,
press ENTER.
• Provide information about each sample to run.
• Set initial volumes (optional).
• Set fraction re-injection criteria (optional).

The Sample Submit screen contains an editable grid that specifies how many samples will be run,
information about those samples, and qualifies any variables in the associated Methods.

For more information about using the editable grid, see How to Create a Sample List.

H-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
Action Buttons

Open Access
The Sample Submit screen has the following action buttons:
• Advanced: This button allows you to specify that a sample well can be used more than once by displaying the
sample well column and enabling it to be edited.
• Back: This button returns to the Application Information screen.
• Next: This button advances to the Sample Placement screen.
• Cancel: Exits the Open Access Wizard and returns to the Open Access Main Menu.
• Help: Provides information about the screen.

• : Allows you to set initial volumes for any or all wells in each Bed Layout in the Application. For more
information, refer to Set Initial Volumes.

• : Allows you to set the criteria for fraction re-injection and to select the Method to run when re-injecting
fractions. For more information, refer to How to Create a Sample List to Re-inject Collected Fractions.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-9

 Open Access H
Sample Placement
Open Access

The Sample Placement Screen

Description
The Sample Placement screen confirms that you have added samples and shows where they will be
placed.

Warning! Do not place the samples now, as the instrument may be in motion.

Action Buttons
The Sample Placement screen has the following action buttons:
• Back: This button returns to the Sample Submit screen.
• Next: This button advances to the Summary screen.
• Cancel: Exits the Open Access Wizard and returns to the Open Access Main Menu.
• Help: Provides information about the screen.

H-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
Summary

Open Access
Open Access Wizard: Summary screen

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-11

 Open Access H
Description
Open Access

The Summary screen has the following sections:

• Current User: The current user logged on to TRILUTION LC Open Access.
• Number of Samples: The number of samples that will be run.
• Time of Submission: The length of time that must elapse before samples can be placed for the Application Run
being set up.
• Mobile Phase Status: Lists the volume of Mobile Phase required based on the number of samples and the flow
rate and Mobile Phase composition set in the Method. Also lists the available volume, which is set by clicking
Solvent Settings.
• Number of Applications in Queue: The number of Applications that must finish running before the current
Application will begin running.
• Estimated Time to Start: The approximate length of time that will elapse before the current Application will
begin running.
• Estimated Time to Complete: This is a length of time equal to the Estimated Time to Start + (Run Time *
Number of Samples).

Action Buttons
The Summary screen has the following action buttons:
• Solvent Settings: Allows you to indicate the volume of reservoir solvent; uses your unit settings for volume for
the unit of measure.
• Back: Returns to the Sample Placement screen.
• Finish: Exits the Open Access Wizard and displays the Submission of Sample(s) screen, if the instrument is
ready to accept the samples.
• Cancel: Exits the Open Access Wizard and returns to the Open Access Main Menu.
• Help: Provides information about the screen.

H-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
Submission of Sample(s)

Open Access
Submission of Sample(s) Screen

Description
The Submission of Sample(s) screen shows where samples should be placed.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-13

 Open Access H
Action Buttons
Open Access

The Submission of Sample(s) screen has the following action button:

• OK: This button starts the Application running and advances to the queue listing in the Open Access
Application window.

Queue Listing in the Open Access Application window

H-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
Free Wells

Open Access
The Free Wells Dialog (Application Running)

Description
The Free Wells dialog is accessed by double-clicking a completed Application in the Open Access
Application window. It shows you where your samples were and where your fractions are. Use this screen
to free those wells for use by other Applications. You will not be able to free wells that are used in a running
Application.

Action Buttons
The Free Wells dialog has the following action buttons:
• Free Wells: Clicking this button lets the software know that the wells previously used by the selected
Application are now available for use by other Applications and it closes the dialog.
• Cancel: Exits the Free Wells dialog without freeing the wells.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-15

 Open Access H
The queue will indicate if there are free wells pending.
Open Access

H-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Open Access H
When the Application Run finishes, you will be prompted to remove the vessels.

Open Access
Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide H-17
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features I

The implementation of an electronic record management system can be complex. TRILUTION LC can assist chromatographers in attaining 21 CFR Part 11
compliance through the implementation of Electronic Record Management (ERM). The ERM features allow electronic records security and
tracking (audit trails) and electronic signatures, as well as permitting customized user access levels within the software. This section describes how to set up
and use these features.
This chapter describes:
• ERM Administration
• User and Groups
• Share

For information about activating the ERM features, see ERM.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide I-1

 Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features I
ERM Administration
Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features

ERM Features are accessed from the Liquid Chromatography|Utilities|ERM|ERM Features menu by a
user assigned to the default Admin group. In this dialog, choose whether or not to enable electronic
record management (ERM) features. Check boxes default cleared, thus ERM defaults disabled. When
Enable ERM Features is selected, the Audit log is enabled. When Enable Signature Points is selected, a
signature will be required by every user for every save. These signatures will be tracked in the E-Signature
log.

For information on how to set up users and groups, See Users and Groups in Chapter1.

I-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features I
User and Groups

Electronic Record Management (ERM) Features

During the software installation, by default, two groups are created: Admin and Analyst. “Administrator”
is the default user in the Admin group. The Admin group is assigned all the rights. “Analyst” is the default
user in the Analyst group. The Analyst group can view, create, and modify in the software.

Group Default Permissions

• Create
• Modify
• Delete
Admin • View
• Import
• Export
• Run

• Create
• Modify
Analyst
• View
• Run

Default Permissions for Default Groups

Share
To enable other users to view or modify a Project, it must be shared. Once shared, the logged on user can
act on the Project per the permissions assigned to that user’s group. For example, a user with the Modify
Project Library permission can make changes to a Project that has been shared with him.

To share a Project, the user must have the View and Modify permissions for the Project Library. He can then
share any Projects he has access to (he created them or they have been shared with him).

Note: Shared projects can only be deleted by the user who created the project regardless of whether
another user has Delete permissions in the Project Library.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide I-3

GSIOC Configuration Editor J

The GSIOC Configuration Editor enables you to modify COM (serial communications) port and baud rate information. Or, you can use this editor if incorrect
information appears in the GSIOC Utility window.
1 Locate the GSIOC Configuration Editor (GSCONFIG.EXE) using windows Explorer or the shortcut at
Start—Programs—Gilson Applications—Utilities—GSIOC Configuration Editor. During
installation, this editor was stored to C:\GILSON\UTIL unless the installation path was changed.
2 Start the editor. The GSIOC Configuration Editor window appears.

3 In the Port box, indicate the computer’s serial communications port (COM) port to which the Gilson
interface instrument (such as the liquid handler or 506C System Interface) is connected.
4 Click 19200 or 9600 to select the baud. The baud is the rate of data transmission between the computer
and the Gilson instrument.
5 Click OK to save the changes. A message box appears indicating that the computer must be restarted
before any changes become effective.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide J-1

GSIOC Utility K

The GSIOC Utility allows you to issue commands to Gilson GSIOC instruments. Your Gilson-authorized representative may ask you to use this utility to verify
that an instrument is connected correctly to the computer. For communication to occur, the Gilson instrument must be connected via an RS-232 connection
to the computer or connected via a GSIOC connection to a Gilson interface instrument that is connected to the computer.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-1

 GSIOC Utility K
Starting the GSIOC Utility
GSIOC Utility

1 Locate the GSIOC Utility (GSUTIL32.EXE) using windows Explorer or the shortcut at Start > (All) Programs >
Gilson Applications > Utilities > GSIOC Utility. During installation, this utility was stored to C:\GILSON\UTIL
unless the installation path was changed.
2 Start the utility. The GSIOC Utility window appears.

Reviewing the Port and Baud Information

In the GSIOC Utility window, review the COM port and baud information. If any information is incorrect or
missing, close the GSIOC Utility and use the GSIOC Configuration Editor to update the information. Refer
to .

Listing GSIOC Instruments

Using the GSIOC Utility, you can determine the instruments currently connected to the computer.

In the Mode menu, select Scan!

The Unit ID list box displays the unit IDs and the version of the connected instruments. If any connected
instruments are missing from the list, ensure that the proper RS-232 or GSIOC connection exists between
the computer and the instruments, and that the instruments do not have duplicate unit ID numbers.

K-2 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Basic Mode

GSIOC Utility
In the Basic mode, immediate and buffered GSIOC commands can be sent to specific Gilson instruments.
Review the Port, IRQ, and Baud information in this window. If any information is incorrect or missing, close
the GSIOC Utility and use the GSIOC Configuration Editor to update the information.

There are two drop-down menus in the Basic mode of the Gilson GSIOC Utility: Mode Menu and Help
Menu.

Basic Mode Buttons and Features

Immediate button
Sends an immediate command to the Unit ID selected.
Immediate commands request status information from an instrument. These commands are executed
immediately, temporarily interrupting any command in progress. Each command is a string of no more
than 40 characters.

You can find a list of valid immediate commands for each instrument in its user’s guide.

Buffered button
Sends a buffered command to the Unit ID selected.

Buffered commands send instructions to an instrument. These commands are executed one at a time.
Each command is a string of no more than 40 characters.

You can find a list of valid buffered commands for each instrument in its user’s guide.

Command field
Where the command to be sent is specified. For more information on sending commands, see Send an
Immediate Command or Send a Buffered Command.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-3

 GSIOC Utility K
Response field
GSIOC Utility

Returns a response to an immediate or buffered command.

The response to a successfully completed buffered command is “ok”.

Refer to the user’s guide for the Gilson instrument for a description of the valid response to immediate
commands.

The response to an unsuccessfully completed immediate or buffered command is “#error”.

K-4 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Basic Mode Menus

GSIOC Utility
Mode Menu
There are three options in the Mode menu: Scan!, Advanced, and Ghost.

Scan!
The Scan! option on the Mode menu allows you to scan for GSIOC instruments. After a scan, the Unit ID list
box displays the unit IDs and the version of the connected instruments. If any connected instruments are
missing from the list, ensure that the proper RS-232 or GSIOC connection exists between the computer
and the instruments, and that the instruments do not have duplicate Unit ID numbers.

Advanced
The advanced option in the Mode menu allows you to switch between the Basic and Advanced modes. A
check mark means that the GSIOC Utility is in Advanced mode.

Ghost
The Ghost option in the Mode menu makes the GSIOC Utility window transparent (and always on top).
This allows you to view another window behind the Utility. The Utility will remain fully functional in the
Ghost mode.

Help Menu

Help Topics
When selected, the Help window for the Gilson GSIOC Utility appears.

About
When selected, the About window appears.

This window displays the version of the Gilson GSIOC Utility, the GSIOC32.DLL, and the GSIOC Server or
Driver; and the Port, IRQ, and Baud set by the GSIOC Configuration Editor.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-5

 GSIOC Utility K
Advanced Mode
GSIOC Utility

In the Advanced mode, immediate and buffered GSIOC commands can be sent to specific Gilson
instruments. In this mode, immediate and buffered commands with comments can be saved to a
command list to be used as needed. The command lines can be repeated automatically to monitor the
status of the instrument.

Review the Port, IRQ, and Baud information by selecting About... from the Help menu. If any information
is incorrect or missing, close the GSIOC Utility and use the GSIOC Configuration Editor to update the
information.

There are four drop-down menus in the Advanced mode of the Gilson GSIOC Utility: File Menu, Edit Menu,
Mode Menu, and Help Menu.

Advanced Mode Buttons and Features

+ button

The next to is used to insert an immediate command in the command list. For more
information, see Insert an Immediate Command.

The next to is used to insert a buffered command in the command list. For more information,
see Insert a Buffered Command.

Arrow Up or Arrow Down button

These buttons ( or ) are used to change the position of a command in the command list.

How to move a command

Highlight the command in the command list and use to move the command up in the list or to
move the command down in the list.

K-6 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Immediate button

GSIOC Utility
Sends an immediate command to the Unit ID selected. The Comment field is not used.
Selecting the Immediate button will not add the command to the command list.

For more information, see Send an Immediate Command.

Buffered button
Sends a buffered command to the Unit ID selected. The Comment field is not used.
Selecting the Buffered button will not add the command to the command list.

For more information, see Send a Buffered Command.

Response field
Returns a response to an immediate or buffered command.

The response will become gray after 15 seconds if no response is registered.

The response to a successfully completed buffered command is “ok”.

Refer to the user’s guide for the Gilson instrument for a description of the valid response to the immediate
commands.
The response to an unsuccessfully completed immediate or buffered command is “#error”.

How to send a command line

Double-click on the Unit, Type, Command, Response, or Comment field to send the immediate or buffered
command for that specific command line.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-7

 GSIOC Utility K
Command line column headings
GSIOC Utility

Repeat

A green check mark ( ) in the Repeat column means that an immediate command will automatically
repeat when the Auto Repeat option is checked. Double-click on the Repeat field to select or deselect the
Auto Repeat for that command line.

A yellow check mark ( ) in the Repeat column means that a buffered command will automatically repeat
when the Auto Repeat option is checked. Double-click on the Repeat field to select or deselect the Auto
Repeat option for that command line.

Unit
This is the Unit ID for the instrument in the command line.

Type
I - Immediate Command, B - Buffered Command

Command
This is the GSIOC command for the command line.

Response
This is the GSIOC response when the command line is initiated with a double-click on the Unit, Type,
Command, Response, or Comment field. The response will become gray after 15 seconds if no response is
registered.

Comment
This is an optional comment that can be added to the command line.

K-8 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Advanced Mode Menus

GSIOC Utility
File Menu
There are four options in the File menu: Open, Save, Save As..., and Exit.

Open
The Open option in the File menu allows you to open previously created command lists (GSUTIL32 files).
The extension for a GSUTIL32 file is .GSU.

Save
The save option in the File menu allows you to save the Advanced commands to GSUTIL32.GSU. The
GSUTIL32.GSU file is automatically created in the location where GSUTIL32.EXE is stored.

The Advanced commands will automatically be saved to GSUTIL32.GSU if the Gilson GSIOC Utility is exited
without saving.

The GSUTIL32. GSU is automatically opened when the Advanced mode is selected from the Mode menu.

Save As...
The Save As... option on the File menu allows you to save the Gilson GSIOC Utility commands that are
currently defined. The file’s name and path must be specified.

Exit
Closes the Gilson GSIOC Utility software.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-9

 GSIOC Utility K
Edit Menu
GSIOC Utility

There are four options in the Edit Menu: Insert Immediate, Insert Buffered, Selection, and Font....

Insert Immediate
The Insert Immediate option in the Edit menu allows you to insert an immediate command in the
command list. The new command will be added to the last line in the command list.

The GSIOC Command will not be inserted if there is already a command line in the list with the same Unit
ID and Command.
For more information, see Insert an Immediate Command.

Insert Buffered
The Insert Buffered option in the Edit menu allows you to insert a buffered command in the command list.
The new command will be added to the last line in the command list.

The GSIOC Command will not be inserted if there is already a command line in the list with the same Unit
ID and Command.
For more information, see Insert a Buffered Command.

Selection

Delete (Ctrl + D)
Deletes the highlighted command from the command list.

Up (Ctrl + U)
Moves the highlighted command up in the command list.

Down (Ctrl + D)
Moves the highlighted command down in the command list.

K-10 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Execute (Ctrl + E)

GSIOC Utility
Executes the highlighted command.

Repeat (Ctrl + R)
Adds or removes the repeat option for the highlighted command.

Font...
The Font... option on the Edit menu allows you to change the font options for the command list fields and
headers, as well as the Unit ID, Comment, and Command text boxes.

Mode Menu
There are four options in the Mode menu: Scan!, Advanced, Auto Repeat, and Ghost.

Scan!
The Scan! option on the Mode menu allows you to scan for GSIOC instruments. After a scan, the Unit ID list
box displays the unit IDs and the version of the connected instruments. If any connected instruments are
missing from the list, ensure that the proper RS-232 or GSIOC connection exists between the computer
and the instruments, and that the instruments do not have duplicate Unit ID numbers.

Advanced
The advanced option in the Mode menu allows you to switch between the Basic and Advanced modes. A
check mark means that the GSIOC Utility is in Advanced mode.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-11

 GSIOC Utility K
Auto Repeat
GSIOC Utility

The Auto Repeat option on the Mode menu allows you to repeat command lines that appear in the
command list.

A command line will only repeat if a check mark appears in the Repeat field. A check mark can be added
by double-clicking on the Repeat field and selecting the Auto Repeat check box.
Starting from the top command line, this mode will refresh one repeating command line every 1/10th of
a second. For example, if there are ten command lines with Repeat selected, each of these command lines
will be initiated every second.

Auto Repeat mode is useful for monitoring the instrument using immediate commands and is designated
in the Repeat field with a green check mark.

Auto Repeat mode is not intended to be used as a programming tool with buffered commands. Repeating
buffered commands will be executed at a fixed time interval regardless if a command has finished. For this
reason, the check mark in the buffered command line is yellow.

Auto Repeat mode can be selected from the Mode menu or by selecting the check box next to Auto
Repeat.
Auto Repeat is deselected by default with the Advanced mode is first opened. When Gilson GSIOC Utility
- Advanced is saved or closed, the status of Auto Repeat is saved.

Ghost
The Ghost option in the Mode menu makes the GSIOC Utility window transparent (and always on top).
This allows you to view another window behind the Utility. The Utility will remain fully functional in the
Ghost mode.

K-12 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Help Menu

GSIOC Utility
Help Topics
When selected, the Help window for the Gilson GSIOC Utility appears.

About
When selected, the About window appears.

This window displays the version of the Gilson GSIOC Utility, the GSIOC32.DLL, and the GSIOC Server or
Driver; and the Port, IRQ, and Baud set by the GSIOC Configuration Editor.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-13

 GSIOC Utility K
Commands
GSIOC Utility

Immediate Command
Immediate commands request status information from an instrument. These commands are executed
immediately, temporarily interrupting any command in progress. Each command is a string of no more
than 40 characters.

You can find a list of valid immediate commands for each instrument in its user’s guide.

Buffered Command
Buffered commands send instructions to an instrument. These commands are executed one at a time.
Each command is a string of no more than 40 characters.

You can find a list of valid buffered commands for each instrument in its user’s guide.

K-14 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Insert an Immediate Command

GSIOC Utility
There are two ways to insert an immediate command in Advanced mode.

Using the Edit menu

1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type a Command and Comment. (The comment is optional.)
3 Select Insert Immediate from the Edit menu. The new command will be inserted at the bottom of the command
list.

Note: The command will not be inserted if there is already a command line in the list with the same Unit
ID and command.

Using the + button

1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type a Command and Comment. (The comment is optional.)
3 Click the button next to the Immediate button. The new command will be inserted at the bottom of the
command list.

Note: The command will not be inserted if there is already a command line in the list with the same Unit
ID and command.

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-15

 GSIOC Utility K
Insert a Buffered Command
GSIOC Utility

There are two ways to insert a buffered command in Advanced mode.

Using the Edit menu

1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type a Command and Comment. (The comment is optional.)
3 Select Insert Immediate from the Edit menu. The new command will be inserted at the bottom of the command
list.

Note: The command will not be inserted if there is already a command line in the list with the same Unit
ID and command.

Using the + button

1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type a Command and Comment. (The comment is optional.)
3 Click the button next to the Buffered button. The new command will be inserted at the bottom of the
command list.

Note: The command will not be inserted if there is already a command line in the list with the same Unit
ID and command.

Send an Immediate Command

Basic Mode
1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type (or select) a Command.
3 Click .

K-16 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide

GSIOC Utility K
Advanced Mode

GSIOC Utility
Using the button
1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type a Command and Comment. (The comment is optional.)
3 Click .

Using Execute from the Edit menu

1 Highlight the command to be sent in the command list.
2 Choose Selection from the Edit menu and select Execute. (Or, type Ctrl + E.)

Using the command list

Double-click on the command line of the command you want to send.

Send a Buffered Command

Basic Mode
1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type (or select) a Command.
3 Click .

Advanced Mode

Using the button

1 From the Unit ID drop-down box, select the unit ID of the instrument to send the command to.
2 Type a Command and Comment. (The comment is optional.)
3 Click .

Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide K-17

 GSIOC Utility K
Using Execute from the Edit menu
GSIOC Utility

1 Highlight the command to be sent in the command list.

2 Choose Selection from the Edit menu and select Execute. (Or, type Ctrl + E.)

Using the command list

Double-click on the command line of the command you want to send.

K-18 Gilson TRILUTION® LC Software Version 2.0 User’s Guide